COMMISSION IMPLEMENTING REGULATION (EU) …/...
of XXX
amending Commission Regulations (EU) No 321/2013, No 1299/2014, No 1301/2014, No 1302/2014 and No 1303/2014, Regulation (EU) 2016/919 and Commission Implementing Decision 2011/665/EU as regards the alignment with Directive (EU) 2016/797 of the European Parliament and of the Council and the implementation of specific objectives set out in Commission Delegated Decision (EU) 2017/1474
(Text with EEA relevance)
THE EUROPEAN COMMISSION,
Having regard to the Treaty on the Functioning of the European Union,
Having regard to Directive (EU) 2016/797 of the European Parliament and of the Council of 11 May 2016 on the interoperability of the rail system within the European Union, and in particular Articles 5(11) and 48(2) thereof,
Whereas:
(1)In accordance with Article 19 of Regulation (EU) No 2016/796 of the European Parliament and of the Council the European Union Agency for Railways (the 'Agency') is required to address recommendations to the Commission on the technical specifications for interoperability (TSIs) and their revision and to ensure that TSIs are adapted to technical progress, market trends and social requirements.
(2)TSIs should be amended in order to indicate provisions applicable to existing subsystems and vehicles, in particular in the event of their upgrading and renewal as well as to indicate the parameters of the vehicles and fixed subsystems to be checked by the railway undertaking to ensure compatibility between vehicles and the routes on which they are to be operated and the procedures to be applied to check those parameters after the vehicle authorisation for placing on the market and before the first use of the vehicle.
(3)Commission Delegated Decision (EU) 2017/1474 sets out specific objectives for the drafting, adoption and review of TSIs. On 22 September 2017, the Commission asked the Agency to prepare recommendations implementing a number of those objectives.
(4)Under Decision (EU) 2017/1474, TSIs should be reviewed in order to take into account developments of the Union railway system relating to research and innovation activities, and update references to standards.
(5)Furthermore TSIs should be reviewed in order to close the remaining open points. In particular, open points as regards specifications on the design of track to be compatible with the use of eddy current brake and the minimum factor for traffic codes should be closed in Commission Regulation (EU) No 1299/2014. Open points as regards specifications on aerodynamic effects, passive safety and variable gauge systems and braking systems should be closed in Commission Regulation (EU) No 1302/2014 . Open points as regards specifications on test conditions for on-track tests and variable gauge systems should be closed in Commission Regulation (EU) No 321/2013.
(6)Decision (EU) 2017/1474 also sets out specific objectives applicable to the TSI relating to the subsystem ‘rolling stock — locomotives and passenger rolling stock’ and the TSI relating to the subsystem ‘rolling stock — freight wagons’. In particular the provisions on automatic variable gauge systems should be reviewed and access to passenger coaches, the authorisation of passenger vehicles in large areas of use and the composition of passenger trains should be facilitated.
(7)Certain components for which a single failure has potential to lead directly to a serious accident are critical for the safety of the rail system and should be labelled as ‘safety-critical’ on a case-by-case basis. The manufacturer should identify safetycritical components in the vehicle maintenance file.
(8)Trackside and on-board investments should be protected by guaranteeing backward compatibility and stability of the specifications of the European rail traffic management system (ERTMS). In order to keep pace with technological progress and encourage modernisation such as ERTMS game changers, as specified in the Agency’s report on ERTMS longerterm perspective (ERA-REP-150), their implementation should, under certain conditions, be allowed. Where the Agency issues draft release specifications of ERTMS game changers before the planned legal release in 2022, suppliers and early implementers should use the specifications in their pilot phase.
(9)On the basis of the system architecture research and innovation work of the Shift2Rail Joint Undertaking, , the Agency work on the game changer related to the evolution of the radio communication system aims at proposing solutions that would allow independent life management cycles for the radio communication system and the train protection system, while facilitating the integration of the new radio communication system with the European Train Control system (ETCS) on-boards that follow the set#3 of specifications.
(10)Not even a successful certification process can always exclude the risk, when onboard and trackside controlcommand and signalling subsystems interact, of one of them repeatedly failing to function or perform as intended under certain conditions. This may be due to variance in national control-command and signalling equipment (e.g. interlockings), engineering and operational rules, deficiencies in the specifications, different interpretations, design errors or equipment being installed incorrectly. Therefore, checks might need to be carried out to demonstrate the technical compatibility of the control-command and signalling subsystems in the area of use for a vehicle. The necessity of these checks should be considered as a temporary measure to increase the confidence on the technical compatibility between the subsystems. In addition, Commission Regulation (EU) 2016/919 should specify the procedure for those checks. In particular, the principles applicable to those checks should be transparent and prepare the ground for further harmonisation. The possibility of executing those checks in a laboratory representing the trackside configuration to be made available by the Infrastructure Manager should be prioritised.
(11)To limit to a minimum the checks each Member State should promote harmonisation amongst its infrastructures. Following this principle, only one single set of compatibility checks for radio (one for voice transmission and another one for data transmission), if at all needed, should be requested per Member State.
(12)Consideration should be given on the necessary steps in the shortest possible time to increase the confidence on the technical compatibility and to reduce and eliminate the tests or checks to prove technical compatibility of on-board units with different European rail traffic management system trackside implementations. Therefore, the Agency should assess the underlying technical divergences and define the necessary steps to eliminate the tests or checks to prove technical compatibility of on-board units with different trackside implementations.
(13)Certain TSIs may provide transitional measures in order to keep the railway sector competitive and to prevent undue costs triggered by too frequent changes in the legal framework. Such transitional measures apply to projects in the course of performance and to projects at an advance stage of development on the date of application of the relevant TSI. The projects that applied those transitional measures should not be released from the obligation to apply that TSI or parts of it pursuant to Article 7(1)(a) of Directive 2016/797.
(14)Directive (EU) 2016/797 and Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) 2018/545 set out the Agency’s role as authorising entity. In addition, Regulation (EU) 2018/545 sets out the procedure applicable in the event of a change to existing vehicle types, in particular for the creation of versions of a vehicle type and versions of a vehicle type variant. The Agency’s role in registering data in the European register of authorised types of railway vehicles (ERATV) and the tasks of authorising entities as regards versions of a vehicle type and versions of a vehicle type variant should be adapted accordingly.
(15)Regulations (EU) No 321/2013, (EU) No 1302/2014, and (EU) 2016/919 should take into account changes in the procedure for placing mobile subsystems on the market, as provided for in Articles 20 to 26 of Directive (EU) 2016/797. Those TSIs should therefore list the basic design characteristics used to identify the vehicle type and set out requirements regarding changes that impact them. The list of ERATV parameters should be amended accordingly.
(16)Under Decision (EU) 2017/1474, TSIs should indicate whether it is necessary to re-notify the conformity assessment bodies that were notified on the basis of a previous version of the TSI and whether a simplified notification process should be applied. This Regulation brings about limited changes and it should not be necessary to re-notify bodies notified on the basis of a previous version of the TSIs.
(17)This Regulation amends TSIs so as to further achieve interoperability within the Union rail system, improve and develop international rail transport, contribute to the progressive creation of the internal market and complement TSIs in view of covering essential requirements. It enables to achieve the objectives and to meet the essential requirements of both Directives 2008/57/EC and (EU) 2016/797. Therefore this Regulation should be directly applicable in all Member States including Member States which have notified the Agency and the Commission under Article 57(2) of Directive (EU) 2016/797 that they have extended the transposition period and thus continue to apply Directive 2008/57/EC until 15 June 2020 at the latest. Notified Bodies exercising under Directive 2008/57/EC in the Member States that have extended the transposition period should be able to issue 'EC' certificate in accordance with this Regulation as long as Directive 2008/57/EC applies in the Member State where they are established.
(18)On 17 December 2015, 6 January 2016 and 14 November 2017, the Agency issued three recommendations to amend Regulation (EU) No 1302/2014 covering the conditions for having an authorisation for placing on the market not limited to particular national networks, the closing of open-points, requirements regarding safety critical components and the revision of provisions on automatic variable gauge systems.
(19)On 11 April 2016, the Agency issued a recommendation on the amendment to Regulation (EU) No 321/2013 covering the closing of open-points.
(20)On 4 October 2017, the Agency issued a recommendation on the amendment to Regulation (EU) No 1299/2014 covering the closing of open-points.
(21)On 19 July 2018, the Agency issued a recommendation on the amendment to Regulations (EU) No 321/2013 and (EU) No 1302/2014 and Commission Implementing Decision 2011/665/EU covering the changes in the procedure for placing mobile subsystems on the market, including the checking of vehicle-route compatibility after the vehicle authorisation and before the first use of authorised vehicles and provisions applicable to existing subsystems and vehicles, in particular in the event of their upgrading and renewal.
(22)On 19 October 2018, the Agency issued a recommendation on the amendment to Regulation (EU) 2016/919 covering the changes in the procedure for placing mobile subsystems on the market, including the checking of vehicle-route compatibility before the first use of authorised vehicles and provisions applicable to existing subsystems and vehicles, in particular in the event of their upgrading and renewal.
(23)On 15 November 2018, the Agency issued a recommendation on the amendment to Regulation (EU) No 1303/2014 covering the changes to align this Regulation with Directive (EU) 2016/797.
(24)On 29 November 2018, the Agency issued a recommendation on the amendment to Regulations (EU) No 1299/2014 and (EU) No 1301/2014 covering the changes to align those Regulations with Directive (EU) 2016/797.
(25)Regulation (EU) No 321/2013, Regulation (EU) No 1299/2014, Regulation (EU) No 1301/2014, Regulation (EU) No 1302/2014, Regulation (EU) No 1303/2014, Regulation (EU) 2016/919 and Implementing Decision 2011/665/EU should therefore be amended accordingly.
(26)The measures provided for in this Regulation are in accordance with the opinion of the Committee established in accordance with Article 51(1) of Directive (EU) 2016/797,
HAS ADOPTED THIS REGULATION:
Article 1
Regulation (EU) No 321/2013 is amended as follows:
(1)in Article 2(1) , the reference to ‘point 2.7 of Annex II to Directive 2008/57/EC’ is replaced by a reference to ‘point 2.7 of Annex II to Directive (EU) 2016/797’;
(2)in Article 3, the second subparagraph, is amended as follows:
(a)point (a) is replaced by the following:
‘ (a) when it is renewed and upgraded in accordance with section 7.2.2 of the Annex to Regulation (EU) No 321/2013’;
(b)point (c) is replaced by the following:
‘(c) with regards to the marking ‘GE’ as depicted in point 5 of Appendix C of the Annex, wagons of the existing fleet which have been authorised in accordance with Commission Decision 2006/861/EC as amended by Decision 2009/107/EC or with Decision 2006/861/EC as amended by Decisions 2009/107/EC and 2012/464/EU and meeting the conditions set out in point 7.6.4 of Decision 2009/107/EC may receive this marking ‘GE’ without any additional third party assessment or new authorisation for placing on the market. The use of this marking in wagons in operation remains under the responsibility of the railway undertakings. ’;
(3)Article 4 is amended as follows:
(a)paragraph 1 is replaced by the following:
‘1. With regard to “open points” set out in Appendix A, the conditions to be complied with for the verification of the essential requirements of Directive (EU) 2016/797 shall be those laid down by national rules in force in the Member State which is part of the area of use of the vehicles covered by this Regulation’;
(b)point (c) of paragraph 2 is replaced as follows:
‘(c) the bodies designated to carry out the conformity assessment and verification procedures with respect to the open points’;
(4)Article 5 is amended as follows:
(a)paragraph 1 is replaced by the following:
‘1. With regard to specific cases set out in Section 7.3 of the Annex, the conditions to be met for the verification of the essential requirements of Directive (EU) 2016/797 shall be those laid down in Section 7.3 of the Annex or by national rules in force in the Member State which is part of the area of use of the vehicles covered by this Regulation’;
(b)point (c) of paragraph 2 is replaced as follows:
‘(c) the bodies designated to carry out the conformity assessment and verification procedures for the national rules relating to the specific cases set out in point 7.3 of the Annex’;
(5)Articles 8 is amended as follows:
(a)paragraph 2 is replaced by the following:
‘2. The production or upgrade/renewal of the subsystem using non-certified interoperability constituents shall be completed within the transition period set out in paragraph 1, including placing on the market. ’;
(b)in point (b) of paragraph 3, the reference to ‘Article 18 of Directive 2004/49/EC’ is replaced by a reference to ‘Article 19 of Directive (EU) 2016/798’;
(6)Article 8a is amended as follows:
(a)point (b) of paragraph 1 is replaced by the following:
‘(b) the interoperability constituent has been used in a subsystem that had been approved and placed on the market in at least one Member State before the date of application of this Regulation.’;
(b)paragraph 2 is replaced by the following:
'2. The production, upgrade or renewal of any subsystem using non-certified interoperability constituents shall be completed, including granting authorisation for placing on the market, before the transition period set out in paragraph 1 expires.';
(c)in point (b) of paragraph 3, the reference to ‘Article 18 of Directive 2004/49/EC’ is replaced by a reference to ‘Article 19 of Directive (EU) 2016/798’;
(7)Article 8 c is amended as follows:
(a)point (b) of paragraph 1 is replaced by the following:
‘(b) the interoperability constituent has been used in a subsystem that had been approved and placed on the market in at least one Member State before the expiry of its approval period.’;
(b)paragraph 2 is replaced by the following:
'2. The production, upgrade or renewal of any subsystem using non-certified interoperability constituents shall be completed, including granting authorisation for placing on the market, before the transition period set out in paragraph 1 expires.';
(c)in point (b) of paragraph 3, the reference to ‘Article 18 of Directive 2004/49/EC’ is replaced by a reference to ‘Article 19 of Directive (EU) 2016/798’;
(8)Article 10a is amended as follows:
(a)in paragraph 4, the reference to ‘Article 6 of Directive 2008/57/EC’ is replaced by a reference to ‘Article 5 of Directive (EU) 2016/797’;
(b)in paragraph 5, the reference to ‘Directive 2008/57/EC’ is replaced by a reference to ‘Directive (EU) 2016/797’;
(9)the Annex is amended in accordance with Annex I to this Regulation.
Article 2
Regulation (EU) No 1299/2014 is amended as follows:
(1)Article 2 is amended as follows:
(a)in paragraph 1, the reference to ‘point 2.1 of Annex I to Directive 2008/57/EC’ is replaced by a reference to ‘point 2.1 of Annex II to Directive (EU) 2016/797’;
(b)in paragraph 3, the reference to ‘Article 20 of Directive 2008/57/EC’ is replaced by a reference to ‘Article 18 of Directive (EU) 2016/797’;
(c)paragraph 4 is deleted;
(2)Article 3 is amended as follows:
(a)paragraph 1 is replaced by the following:
‘1. With regard to the aspects listed as “open points” in Appendix R to the Annex to this Regulation, the conditions to be complied with for verifying the essential requirements set out in Annex III to Directive (EU) 2016/797 shall be those laid down by national rules in force in the Member State which authorise the placing in service of the subsystem covered by this Regulation.’;
(b)point (c) of paragraph 2 is replaced as follows:
‘(c) the bodies designated to carry out the conformity assessment and verification procedures with respect to the open points’;
(3) Article 4 is amended as follows:
(a)paragraph 1 of is replaced by the following:
‘1. With regard to specific cases listed in Section 7.7 of the Annex, the conditions to be met for the verification of the essential requirements set out in Annex III to Directive (EU) 2016/797 shall be those laid down in Section 7.7 of the Annex or by national rules in force in the Member State which authorises the placing in service of the subsystem covered by this Regulation’;
(4)point (c) of paragraph 2 of Article 4 is replaced by the following:
‘(c) the bodies designated to carry out the conformity assessment and verification procedures for the national rules relating to the specific cases set out in point 7.7 of the Annex’;
(5)Article 7(3) is amended as follows:
(a)in point (a), the reference to ‘Article 18 of Directive 2008/57/EC’ is replaced by a reference to ‘Article 15 of Directive (EU) 2016/797’;
(b)in point (b), the references to ‘Article 16(2)(c) of Directive 2004/49/EC’ and ‘Article 18 of Directive 2004/49/EC’ are replaced by references to ‘Article 16(2)(d) of Directive (EU) 2016/798’ and ‘Article 19 of Directive (EU) 2016/798’ respectively;
(6)in Article 9, paragraph 2 is deleted;
(7)Article 10 is amended as follows:
(a)in paragraph 4, the reference to ‘Article 6 of Directive 2008/57/EC’ is replaced by a reference to ‘Article 5 of Directive (EU) 2016/797’;
(b)in paragraph 5, the reference to ‘Directive 2008/57/EC’ is replaced by a reference to ‘Directive (EU) 2016/797’;
(8)the Annex is amended in accordance with Annex II to this Regulation.
Article 3
Regulation (EU) No 1301/2014 is amended as follows:
(1)Article 2 is amended as follows:
(a)in paragraph 1,, the reference to ‘point 2.2 of Annex II to Directive 2008/57/EC’ is replaced by a reference to ‘point 2.2 of Annex II to Directive (EU) 2016/797’;
(b)in paragraph 3, the reference to ‘Article 20 of Directive 2008/57/EC’ is replaced by a reference to ‘Article 18 of Directive (EU) 2016/797’;
(c)paragraph 4 is deleted;
(2)Article 3 is amended as follows:
(a)paragraph 1 is replaced by the following:
‘1. With regard to the aspects listed as “open points” in Appendix R of the Annex, the conditions to be complied with for verifying the essential requirements set out in Annex III to Directive (EU) 2016/797 shall be those laid down by national rules in force in the Member State which authorises the placing in service of the subsystem covered by this Regulation.’;
(b)point (c) of paragraph 2 is replaced as follows:
‘(c) the bodies designated to carry out the conformity assessment and verification procedures with respect to the open points’;
(3)Article 4 is amended as follows:
(a)paragraph 1 is replaced by the following:
‘1. With regard to specific cases listed in Section 7.4.2 of the Annex, the conditions to be met for the verification of compliance with the essential requirements set out in Annex III to Directive (EU) 2016/797 shall be those laid down in Section 7.4.2 of the Annex or by national rules in force in the Member State which authorises the placing in service of the subsystem covered by this Regulation.’;
(b)point (c) of paragraph 2 is replaced by the following:
‘(c) the bodies designated to carry out the conformity assessment and verification procedures for the national rules relating to the specific cases set out in point 7.4.2 of the Annex’;
(4)Article 7(3) is amended as follows:
(a)in point (a), the reference to ‘Article 18 of Directive 2008/57/EC’ is replaced by a reference to ‘Article 15 of Directive (EU) 2016/797’;
(b)in point (b), the references to ‘Article 16(2)(c) of Directive 2004/49/EC’ and ‘Article 18 of Directive 2004/49/EC’ are replaced by references to ‘ ‘Article 16(2)(d) of Directive (EU) 2016/798’ and Article 19 of Directive (EU) 2016/798’ respectively;
(5)in Article 9, paragraph 2 is deleted;
(6)Article 10 is amended as follows:
(a)in paragraph 4, the reference to ‘Article 6 of Directive 2008/57/EC’ is replaced by a reference to ‘Article 5 of Directive (EU) 2016/797’;
(b)in paragraph 5, the reference to ‘Directive 2008/57/EC’ is replaced by a reference to ‘Directive (EU) 2016/797’;
(7)the Annex is amended in accordance with Annex III to this Regulation.
Article 4
Regulation (EU) No 1302/2014 is amended as follows:
(1)in Article 2(1), the reference to ‘point 2.7 of Annex II to Directive 2008/57/EC’ is replaced by a reference to ‘point 2.7 of Annex II to Directive (EU) 2016/797’;
(2)in Article 3, paragraph 2 is replaced by the following:
‘2.
The TSI shall not apply to existing rolling stock of the rail system in the Union which is already placed in service on all or part of the network of any Member State on 1 January 2015, except when it is subject to renewal or upgrading in accordance with Section 7.1.2 of the Annex.’;
(3)Article 4 is amended as follows:
(a)paragraph 1 is replaced by the following:
‘1.
With regard to the aspects listed as “open points” in Appendix I of the Annex, the conditions to be complied with for verifying the essential requirements set out in Annex III to Directive (EU) 2016/797 shall be those laid down by national rules in force in the Member States which are part of the area of use of the vehicles covered by this Regulation.’;
(b)point (c) of paragraph 2 is replaced as follows:
‘(c) the bodies designated to carry out the conformity assessment and verification procedures with respect to the open points’;
(4)Article 5 is amended as follows:
(a)paragraph 1 is replaced by the following:
‘1.
With regard to specific cases listed in Section 7.3 of the Annex, the conditions to be met for the verification of the essential requirements set out in Annex III to Directive (EU) 2016/797 shall be those laid down in Section 7.3 of the Annex or by national rules in force in the Member States which are part of the area of use of the vehicles covered by this Regulation’;
(5)point (c) of paragraph 2 of Article 5 is replaced by the following:
‘(c) the bodies designated to carry out the conformity assessment and verification procedures for the national rules relating to the specific cases set out in point 7.3 of the Annex’;
(6)Article 8(3) is amended as follows:
(a)in point (a), the references to ‘Article 18 of Directive 2008/57/EC’ and ‘Article 16(2)(c) of Directive 2004/49/EC are replaced by a reference to ‘Article 15 of Directive (EU) 2016/797’;
(b)in point (b) the references to ‘Article 16(2)(c) of Directive 2004/49/EC’ and ‘Article 18 of Directive 2004/49/EC’ are replaced by references to Article 16(2)(d) of Directive (EU) 2016/798’ and ‘Article 19 of Directive (EU) 2016/798’ respectively;
(7)in Article 9, the references to ‘Articles 16 to 18 of Directive 2008/57/EC’ and ‘Article 26 of Directive 2008/57/EC’ are replaced by references to ‘Articles 13 to 15 of Directive (EU) 2016/797’ and ‘Article 24 of Directive (EU) 2016/797’ respectively;
(8)Article 10 is amended as follows:
(a)in paragraph 4, the reference to ‘Article 6 of Directive 2008/57/EC’ is replaced by a reference to ‘Article 5 of Directive (EU) 2016/797’;
(b)in paragraph 5, the reference to ‘Directive 2008/57/EC’ is replaced by a reference to ‘Directive (EU) 2016/797’;
(9)the following paragraph 3 is added in Article 11:
‘3.
Member States may not permit applicants not to apply this Regulation or parts of it pursuant to Article 7(1)(a) of Directive 2016/797 for any project to which sections 7.1.1.2 or 7.3.1 of the Annex apply, except in exceptional circumstances.’;
(10)the Annex is amended in accordance with Annex IV to this Regulation.
Article 5
Regulation (EU) No 1303/2014 is amended as follows:
(1)in Article 2, the reference to ‘Annex II to Directive 2008/57/EC’ is replaced by a reference to ‘Annex II to Directive (EU) 2016/797’;
(2)Article 4 is amended as follows:
(a)paragraph 1 is replaced by the following:
‘1. With regard to specific cases listed in Section 7.3 of the Annex, the conditions to be met for the verification of the essential requirements set out in Annex III to Directive (EU) 2016/797 shall be those laid down in Section 7.3 of the Annex or by national rules in force in the Member State which authorises the placing in service of the fixed subsystems or which is part of the area of use of the vehicles covered by this Regulation.’;
(3)point (c) of paragraph 2 of Article 4 is replaced by the following:
‘(c) the bodies designated to carry out the conformity assessment and verification procedures for the national rules relating to the specific cases set out in point 7.3 of the Annex’;
(4)Article 8 is amended as follows:
(a)in paragraph 4, the reference to ‘Article 6 of Directive 2008/57/EC’ is replaced by a reference to ‘Article 5 of Directive (EU) 2016/797’;
(b)in paragraph 5, the reference to ‘Directive 2008/57/EC’ is replaced by a reference to ‘Directive (EU) 2016/797’;
(5)the Annex is amended in accordance with Annex V to this Regulation.
Article 6
Regulation (EU) 2016/919 is amended as follows:
(1)Article 2 is amended as follows:
(a)paragraph 1 is replaced by :
‘The TSI shall apply to all new, upgraded or renewed 'trackside control-command and signalling' and 'on-board control-command and signalling subsystems of the rail system as defined in points 2.3 and 2.4 of Annex II to Directive (EU) 2016/797. Section 7.2.1a of the Annex shall apply to all changes to an existing On-Board subsystem. ’;
(b)in paragraph 2, the words ‘Article 20 of Directive 2008/57/EC and’ are deleted;
(c)paragraph 3 is deleted;
(2)in Article 3(1), the reference to ‘Article 17(3) of Directive 2008/57/EC’ is replaced by a reference to ‘Article 14 of Directive (EU) 2016/797’;
(3)Article 5 is deleted;
(4)Article 6 is amended as follows:
(a)in paragraph 2, the reference to ‘Articles 13 and 18 of Directive 2008/57/EC’ is replaced by the reference to ‘Articles 10 and 15 of Directive (EU) 2016/797’;
(b)in paragraph 3, the reference to ‘Article 16 of Directive 2004/49/EC’ is replaced by a reference to ‘Article 16 of Directive (EU) 2016/798’;
(5)Article 9 is amended as follows:
(a)in paragraph 4, the reference to ‘Article 29(1) of Directive 2008/57/EC’ is replaced by a reference to ‘Article 51(1) of Directive (EU) 2016/797’;
(b)in paragraph 5, the reference to ‘points 7.3.2.1, 7.3.2.2 and 7.3.2.3 of Decision 2012/88/EU’ is replaced by a reference to ‘Article 2(1) of Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) 2017/6 and point 7.4.1.1 of the Annex to this Regulation.’;
(6)Articles 10 and 11 are replaced by the following:
‘Article 10
Error corrections
If errors that do not allow the system to provide a normal service are detected, the Agency shall of its own motion or at the request of the Commission identify as soon as possible solutions to correct them and an evaluation of their impact on the compatibility and stability of the existing ERTMS deployment. In such cases, the Agency shall send to the Commission an opinion on such solutions and the evaluation. The Commission shall analyse the Agency's opinion, assisted by the committee referred to in Article 51(1) of Directive (EU) 2016/797, and may recommend that the solutions specified in the Agency’s opinion apply until the next revision of the TSI.
Article 11
ERTMS game changers
1.
By June 2021, taking into consideration the input from Shift2Rail and the Agency, the Commission shall issue a report on the definition of the next generation communication system. The report shall include the conditions and possible strategies for the migration to that system with due considerations for the coexistence of the system and spectrum requirements.
2.
Where the Agency has issued an opinion with the draft release specifications relating to an ERTMS game changer as identified within ERA-REP-150, suppliers and early implementers shall use those specifications in their pilots and shall inform the Agency. ’;
(7)the following Article 11a is inserted:
Article 11a
ERTMS compatibility and future revision
1.
By 1 June 2020, the Agency shall send a report to the Commission on the implementation of ETCS system compatibility (ESC) and radio system compatibility (RSC). The report shall include an assessment of the differing types of ESC and RSC, and the potential for reducing the underlying technical divergences of ESC and RSC types. Member States shall provide the Agency with the necessary information to complete the analysis.
2.
By 1 December 2021, the Commission shall, based on input from the Agency, define the necessary steps to eliminate the tests or checks to prove technical compatibility of on-board units with different ERTMS trackside implementations, in particular to achieve harmonisation of engineering and operational rules at Member State level and between Member States. Member States shall provide the Commission and the Agency with the necessary information to complete the analysis.
3.
By 1 December 2020, the Agency shall send a report to the Commission on the potential for including further elements of trackside and vehicle control-command and signalling system architecture, in particular to achieve a future proof design, facilitating the use of state of the art technology and ensuring backward compatibility. ’;
(8)the following paragraph 2 is added in Article 13:
‘2.
Member States may not permit applicants not to apply Section 7.4.2.1 of the Annex pursuant to Article 7(1)(a) of Directive 2016/797 for any project to which section 7.4.2.3 of the Annex applies, except in exceptional circumstances.’;
(9)the Annex is amended in accordance with Annex VII to this Regulation. ’.
Article 7
Implementing Decision 2011/665/EU is amended as follows:
(1)the following Article 2a is inserted:
‘Article 2a
Information to be inserted by the Agency
The Agency shall insert in the European register of authorised types of vehicles information on the vehicle type authorisations or vehicle type variants it has granted and on new versions of a vehicle type or of a vehicle type variant in accordance with Article 50 of Regulation (EU) 2018/545, as set out in Annex II to this Decision.’;
(2)in Article 3, paragraph 1 is replaced by the following:
‘1. Member States shall ensure that the national safety authorities provide the information on the vehicle type authorisations or vehicle type variants they have granted and on the new version of a vehicle type or of a vehicle type variant in accordance with Article 50 of Regulation (EU) 2018/545, as set out in Annex II to this Decision.’;
(3)Article 4 is replaced by the following:
‘Article 4
Restriction codes
Harmonised restriction codes shall be applicable in all Member States.
The list of harmonised restriction codes shall be the list referred to in [of Implementing Decision (EU) 2018/1614.’;
(4)Annex I is amended in accordance with Annex VIII to this Regulation.
(5)Annex II is replaced by Annex IX to this Regulation.
Article 8
In accordance with Regulations (EU) No 1299/2014 and (EU) No 1303/2014, each Member State shall update its national implementation plan for the INF TSI and SRT TSI. Each Member State shall forward its updated implementation plan to the other Member States and the Commission by 1 January 2020.
Article 9
1.Notifications of conformity assessment bodies for the purposes of Regulations (EU) No 321/2013, (EU) No 1299/2014, (EU) No 1301/2014, (EU) No 1302/2014, (EU) No 1303/2014 and (EU) 2016/919 shall remain valid on the basis of those Regulations, as amended by the present Regulation.
2.Conformity assessment bodies notified in accordance with Directive 2008/57/EC may issue ‘EC’ certificate of verification and ‘EC’ certificate of conformity or suitability for use of interoperability constituents in accordance with this Regulation as long as Directive 2008/57/EC applies in the Member State where they are established in accordance with Article 57(2) of Directive (EU) 2016/797 and until 15 June 2020 at the latest.
Article 10
This Regulation shall enter into force on the twentieth day following that of its publication in the Official Journal of the European Union.
It shall apply from 16 June 2019.
This Regulation shall be binding in its entirety and directly applicable in all Member States.
Done at Brussels,
For the Commission
The President
Jean-Claude JUNCKER
ANNEX I
The Annex to Regulation (EU) 321/2013 is amended as follows:
(1)in sections 1, 1.3, 3, 4.1, 4.2.1, 4.7, 5.1, 6.1.2.3, 6.1.3, 6.2.3, 7.1.2, the references to "Directive 2008/57/EC" are replaced by references to "Directive (EU) 2016/797";
(2)section 1.2 is replaced by the following:
‘1.2. Geographical scope
The geographical scope of this TSI is the entire European Union’s rail system as set out in the section 1 of Annex I to Directive (EU) 2016/797, taking into account the limitations concerning the track gauge set out in Article 2.’;
(3)Section 2 is replaced as follows:
‘2. SCOPE AND DEFINITION OF SUBSYSTEM
2.1.
Scope
This TSI is applicable to ‘freight wagons including vehicles designed to carry lorries’ as referred to in Annex I Section 2 to Directive (EU) 2016/797 taking into account the limitations as set out in Article 2. In the following this part of the subsystem rolling stock is called ‘freight wagon’ and belongs to the subsystem ‘rolling stock’ as set out in Annex II to Directive 2016/797.
The other vehicles listed in Section 2 of Annex I to Directive (EU) 2016/797 are excluded from the scope of this TSI; this is especially the case for:
(a)mobile railway infrastructure construction and maintenance equipment
(b)vehicles designed to carry:
–motor vehicles with their passengers on board, or
–motor vehicles without passengers on board but intended to be integrated in passenger trains (car carriers)
(c)vehicles which
–increase their length in loaded configuration, and
–their payload itself is part of the vehicle structure.
Note: See also section 7.1 for particular cases.
2.2.
Definitions
In the present TSI the following definitions are used:
(a)A ‘unit’ is the generic term used to name the rolling stock. It is subject to the application of this TSI, and therefore subject to the EC verification procedure.
A unit can consist of:
–a ‘wagon’ that can be operated separately, featuring an individual frame mounted on its own set of wheels, or
–a rake of permanently connected ‘elements’, those elements cannot be operated separately, or
–‘separate rail bogies connected to compatible road vehicle(s)’ the combination of which forms a rake of a rail compatible system.
(b)A ‘train’ is an operational formation consisting of several units.
(c)The ‘design operating state’ covers all conditions under which the unit is intended to operate and its technical boundaries. This design operating state may go beyond the specifications of this TSI in order that units may be used together in a train on the network under the safety management system of a railway undertaking.’;
(4)Section 3, row 4.2.3.6.6 of Table 1 is replaced as follows:
|
4.2.3.6.6
|
Automatic variable gauge systems
|
1.1.1,
1.1.2,
1.1.3
|
1.2
|
|
|
1.5
|
(5)Section 4.2.2.2 is replaced as follows:
‘The structure of a unit body, any equipment attachments and lifting and jacking points shall be designed such that no cracks, no significant permanent deformation or ruptures occur under the load cases defined in Chapter 5 of EN 12663-2:2010.
In case of a rake of a rail compatible system composed of separate rail bogies connected to compatible road vehicles, the load cases may differ from those mentioned above, due to their bi- modal specification; in such a case, the load cases considered shall be described by the applicant based on a consistent set of specifications with consideration of the specific conditions of use related to train composition, shunting and operation.
The demonstration of conformity is described in point 6.2.2.1.
The lifting and jacking positions shall be marked on the unit. The marking shall comply with point 4.5.14 of EN 15877-1:2012.
Note: Joining techniques are deemed to be covered as well by the demonstration of conformity in accordance to point 6.2.2.1.’;
(6)in the second and third paragraph of section 4.2.3.1, the text ‘EN 15273-2:2009’ ‘Gauging’ is replaced by ‘EN 15273-2:2013+A1:2016’;
(7)in section 4.2.3.1, the text ‘GIC1 and GIC2’ ‘Gauging’ is replaced by ‘GI1 and GI2’;
(8)in section 4.2.3.2, the text ‘EN 15528:2008’ ‘Compatibility with load carrying capacity of lines’ is replaced by ‘EN 15528:2015’;
(9)in section 4.2.3.3, the text ‘Commission Decision 2012/88/EU (1)’ ‘Compatibility with train detection systems’ is replaced by ‘ERA/ERTMS/033281 rev. 4.0’;
(10)in point 4.2.3.3 the footnote ‘(1) OJ L 51, 23.2.2012, p. 1.’ is deleted;
(11)in section 4.2.3.4, the text ‘The specifications of the design and the conformity assessment of on-board equipment is an open point in this TSI.’ is replaced as follows:
‘If the unit is intended to be capable of being monitored by on-board equipment, the following requirements shall apply:
–This equipment shall be able to detect a deterioration of any of the axle box bearings of the unit.
–The bearing condition shall be evaluated either by monitoring its temperature, or its dynamic frequencies or some other suitable bearing condition characteristic.
–The detection system shall be located entirely on board the unit, and diagnosis messages shall be available on board the unit.
–The diagnosis messages delivered and how they are made available shall be described in the operating documentation set out in section 4.4 of this TSI, and in the maintenance rules described in section 4.5 of this TSI.’;
(12)in section 4.2.3.5.2 the text ‘Chapter 5 of EN 14363:2005’ ‘Running dynamic behaviour’ is replaced by ‘chapters 4, 5 and 7 of EN 14363:2016’;
(13)section 4.2.3.6.6 is replaced as follows:
‘4.2.3.6.6. Automatic variable gauge systems
This requirement is applicable to units equipped with an automatic variable gauge system with changeover mechanism of the axial position of the wheels allowing the unit to be compatible with 1 435 mm track gauge and other track gauge(s) within the scope of this TSI by means of passage through a track gauge changeover facility.
The changeover mechanism shall ensure the locking in the correct intended axial position of the wheel.
After passage through the track gauge changeover facility, the verification of the state of the locking system (locked or unlocked) and of the position of the wheels shall be performed by one or more of the following means: visual control, on-board control system or infrastructure/facility control system. In case of on-board control system, a continuous monitoring shall be possible.
If a running gear is equipped with brake equipment subject to a change in position during the gauge change operation, the automatic variable gauge system shall ensure the position and safe locking in the correct position of this equipment simultaneously to those of the wheels.
The failure of the locking of the position of the wheels and braking equipment (if relevant) during operation has typical credible potential to lead directly to a catastrophic accident (resulting in multiple fatalities); considering this severity of the failure consequence, it shall be demonstrated that the risk is controlled to an acceptable level.
The automatic variable gauge system is defined as an interoperability constituent (point 5.3.4b) and is part of the interoperability constituent wheelset (point 5.3.2). The conformity assessment procedure is specified in point 6.1.2.6 (interoperability constituent level), point 6.1.2.2 (safety requirement) and in point 6.2.2.4a (subsystem level) of this TSI.
The track gauges the unit is compatible with shall be recorded in the technical documentation.
A description of the changeover operation in normal mode, including the type(s) of track gauge changeover facility(ies) the unit is compatible with, shall be part of the technical documentation (see also section 4.4 of this TSI).
The requirements and conformity assessments required in other sections of this TSI apply independently for each wheel position corresponding to one track gauge and have to be documented accordingly.’;
(14)in section 4.2.3.6.6, new footnote ‘(1) OJ L 121, 3.5.2013, p. 8.’ is added in the same page as text ‘Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) No 402/2013 (1)’;
(15)in section 4.2.4.2 the text ‘Commission Regulation (EC) No 352/2009 (1)’ is replaced by the text ‘Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) No 402/2013 (1)’;
(16)in section 4.2.4.2 the footnote ‘(1) OJ L 108, 29.4.2009, p. 4.’ is replaced by the footnote ‘(1) OJ L 121, 3.5.2013, p. 8.’;
(17)in section 4.2.4.3.2.1, the text ‘UIC leaflet 544-1:2013’and ‘UIC 544-1:2013’ is replaced by the text ‘UIC 544-1:2014’;
(18)in section 4.2.4.3.2.2, the text ‘the minimum parking brake performance’ is replaced by the text ‘the minimum parking brake force’
(19)in section 4.2.4.3.2.2, the text ‘the minimum performance of the parking brake shall be marked on the unit. The marking shall comply with clause 4.5.25 of EN 15877- 1:2012.’ is deleted;
(20)in section 4.2.5, the text ‘EN 50125-1:1999’ is replaced by ‘EN 50125-1:2014’;
(21)in section 4.2.6.2.1, the text ‘EN 50153:2002’ is replaced by ‘EN 50153:2014’;
(22)in section 6.2.2.8.4, the text ‘TS 45545-7:2009’ is replaced by ‘EN 45545-7:2013’;
(23)in section 4.2.6.2.2 , the text ‘EN 50153:2002’ is replaced by ‘EN 50153:2014’;
(24)in section 4.2.6.3, the text ‘chapter 1 of ERA technical document ERA/TD/2012-04/INT version 1.2 of 18.1.2013 published on the ERA website (http://www.era.europa.eu)’ is replaced by ‘Figure 11 of EN 16116-2:2013’;
(25)in Table 7 of section 4.3.3, the text ‘Reference Commission Decision 2012/88/EU Annex A, Table A2, index 77’ is replaced by ‘Reference ERA/ERTMS/033281 rev. 4.0’;
(26)Section 4.4, is replaced as follows:
‘4.4 Operating rules
Operating rules are developed within the procedures described in the railway undertaking safety management system. These rules take into account the documentation related to operation which forms a part of the technical file as required in Article 15(4) of and as set out in Annex IV to Directive (EU) 2016/797.
For the safety critical components (see also 4.5.), the specific operational and operational traceability requirements are developed by the designers/manufacturers at design phase and through a collaboration between designers/manufacturers and the concerned railway undertakings or the concerned wagon keeper after vehicles have entered into operation.
The documentation related to operation describes the characteristics of the unit in relation to the design operating state to be considered in order to define the operating rules in normal and in various reasonably foreseeable degraded modes.
The documentation related to operation is composed of:
–a description of operation in normal mode, including the operational characteristics and limitations of the unit (e.g. vehicle gauge, maximum design speed, axle loads, brake performance, compatibility with train detection systems, permitted environmental conditions, type(s) and operation of track gauge changeover facility(ies) the unit is compatible with),
–a description of operation in degraded mode (when equipment or functions described in this TSI suffer safety failures) as far as can reasonably predicted, together with the related acceptable limits and operating conditions of the unit that could be experienced,
–a safety critical components list: The safety critical components list shall contain the specific operational and operational traceability requirements.
The applicant shall provide the initial version of the documentation related to operating rules. This documentation might be modified later in accordance with the corresponding Union legislation, taking into account the existing operating and maintenance conditions of the unit. The Notified Body shall verify only that the documentation on operation is provided.’;
(27)Section 4.5, is replaced as follows:
‘4.5 Maintenance rules
Maintenance is a set of activities intended to keep a functional unit in, or to restore it to a state in which it can perform its required function.
The following documents being part of the technical file as required in Article 18(3) of and as set out in Annex VI to Directive (EU) 2016/797 are necessary to undertake maintenance activities on the units:
–general documentation (point 4.5.1),
–the maintenance design justification file (point 4.5.2), and
–the maintenance description file (point 4.5.3).
The applicant shall provide the three documents described in 4.5.1, 4.5.2. and 4.5.3. This documentation might be modified later in accordance with the corresponding EU legislation, taking into account the existing operating and maintenance conditions of the unit. The Notified Body shall verify only that the documentation on maintenance is provided.
The three documents are provided immediately to the entity in charge of maintenance assigned for the maintenance of the unit by the applicant or by any entity authorised by the applicant (e.g. a keeper).
On the basis of these three documents, the entity in charge of maintenance shall define a maintenance plan and appropriate maintenance requirements at maintenance operational level under its sole responsibility (not in the scope of the assessment against this TSI).
The safety critical components and their specific servicing, maintenance and maintenance traceability requirements are identified by the designers/manufacturers at design phase and through a collaboration between designers/manufacturers and the concerned entities in charge of maintenance after vehicles have entered into operation.
4.5.1 General documentation
The general documentation comprises of:
–Drawings and description of the unit and its components.
–Any legal requirement concerning the maintenance of the unit.
–Drawing of systems (electrical, pneumatic, hydraulic and control-circuit diagrams).
–Additional on-board systems (description of the systems including description of functionality, specification of interfaces and data processing and protocols).
–Configuration files for each vehicle (parts list and bill of material) to enable (in particular but not only) traceability during maintenance activities.
4.5.2 Maintenance design justification file
The maintenance design justification file explains how maintenance activities are defined and designed in order to ensure that the rolling stock characteristics will be kept within permissible limits of use during its lifetime. The file shall give input data in order to determine the criteria for inspection and the periodicity of maintenance activities. The maintenance design justification file consists of:
–Precedents, principles and methods used to design the maintenance of the unit.
–Precedents, principles and methods used to identify the safety critical components and their specific operational, servicing, maintenance and traceability requirements. The principles and methods used shall be consistent with the requirements set out in Articles 2(g) and 4(4) of [ECM Regulation].
–Limits of the normal use of the unit (e.g. km/month, climatic limits, foreseen types of loads, etc.).
–Relevant data used to design the maintenance and origin of these data (return of experience).
–Tests, investigations and calculations carried out to design the maintenance.
4.5.3 Maintenance description file
The maintenance description file describes how maintenance activities can be conducted. Maintenance activities include, among others, inspections, monitoring, tests, measurements, replacements, adjustments and repairs.
Maintenance activities are split into:
–preventive maintenance (scheduled and controlled), and
–corrective maintenance.
The maintenance description file includes the following:
–Component hierarchy and functional description which sets up the boundaries of the rolling stock by listing all the items belonging to the product structure of that rolling stock and using an appropriate number of discrete levels. The lowest item of the hierarchy shall be a replaceable component.
–Parts list which shall contain the technical and functional descriptions of the spare parts (replaceable units). The list shall include all parts specified for changing based on condition, which may require a replacement following electrical or mechanical malfunction or which will foreseeable require a replacement after an accidental damage. Interoperability constituents shall be indicated and referenced to their corresponding declaration of conformity.
–Safety critical components list: The safety critical components list shall contain the specific servicing, maintenance and servicing/maintenance traceability requirements.
–Limit values for components which are not to be exceeded in service. It is permitted to specify operational restrictions in degraded mode (limit value reached).
–List of reference to the European legal obligations to which components or subsystems are subject.
–Maintenance plan i.e. the structured set of tasks to perform the maintenance including the activities, procedures and means. The description of this set of tasks includes:
(a)Disassembly/assembly instructions drawings necessary for correct assembly/disassembly of replaceable parts.
(b)Maintenance criteria.
(c)Checks and tests in particular of safety relevant parts; these include visual inspection and non-destructive tests (where appropriate e.g. to detect deficiencies that may impair safety).
(d)Tools and materials required to undertake the task.
(e)Consumables required to undertake the task.
(f)Personal protective safety provision and equipment.
–Necessary tests and procedures to be undertaken after each maintenance operation before re-entry into service of rolling stock.’;
(28)in section 4.8, the text ‘GIC1 and GIC2’ is replaced by ‘GI1 and GI2’;
(29)A new section 4.9 is added as follows:
‘4.9 Route compatibility checks before the use of authorised vehicles
The parameters of the subsystem ‘rolling stock — freight wagons’ to be used by the railway undertaking, for the purpose of route compatibility check, are described in Appendix D1 of Regulation XXX (OPE TSI).’;
(30)in section 5.3.1, the text ‘The running gear shall be designed for an application range, the area of use, as defined by the following parameters:’ is replaced as follows:
‘The running gear shall be designed for all application ranges, the areas of use, as defined by the following parameters:
–Track gauge’;
(31)in section 5.3.2, the text ‘The wheelset shall be assessed and designed for the area of use as defined by’ is replaced as follows:
‘For the purpose of this TSI, wheelsets include the main parts ensuring the mechanical interface with the track (wheels and connecting elements: e.g. transverse axle, independent wheel axle). Accessories parts (axle bearings, axle boxes and brake discs) are assessed at subsystem level.
The wheelset shall be assessed and designed for the area of use as defined by:
–track gauge,’;
(32)in section 5.3.3, the text: ‘— maximum speed and service life, and’ is replaced as follows:
‘-
maximum speed,
–in-service limits, and’
(33)a new section 5.3.4b is added below section 5.3.4a:
‘5.3.4b. Automatic variable gauge system
An IC “automatic variable gauge system” shall be designed and assessed for an area of use defined by:
–the track gauges the system is designed for,
–the range of maximum static axle loads,
–the range of nominal wheel tread diameters,
–the maximum design speed of the unit, and
–the types of track gauge changeover facility(ies) the system is designed for, including the nominal speed through the track changeover facility(ies) and the maximum axial forces during the automatic gauge changeover process.
An automatic variable gauge system shall comply with the requirements set out in point 4.2.3.6.6; these requirements shall be assessed at IC level as set out in point 6.1.2.6.’
(34)in section 6.1.2, Table 9, a new row 4.2.3.6.6 is added below the row ‘4.2.3.6.4 Axle’
|
4.2.3.6.6
|
Automatic variable gauge system
|
X (*)
|
X
|
X
|
X (*)
|
X
|
X (**)
|
(35)in section 6.1.2, the following text is added after the last paragraph:
‘In case of a specific case applicable to a component defined as interoperability constituent in section 5.3 of this TSI, the corresponding requirement can be part of the verification at interoperability constituent level only in the case where the component remains compliant to the chapters 4 and 5 of this TSI and where the specific case does not refer to a national rule (i.e. additional requirement compatible with the core TSI and fully specified in the TSI).
In other cases, the verification shall be made at subsystem level; when a national rule applies to a component, the concerned Member State may define relevant applicable conformity assessment procedures.’;
(36)the section 6.1.2.1 is replaced as follows:
‘6.1.2.1. Running gear
The demonstration of conformity for running dynamic behaviour is set out in EN 16235:2013.
Units equipped with an established running gear as described in chapter 6 of EN 16235:2013 are presumed to be in conformity with the relevant requirement provided that the running gears are operated within their established area of use.
The assessment of the bogie frame strength shall be based on clause 6.2 of EN 13749:2011.’;
(37)In section 6.1.2.2, the last paragraph of is replaced as follows:
‘A verification procedure shall exist to ensure at the assembly phase that no defects may detrimentally affect safety due to any change in the mechanical characteristics of the fitted parts of the axle. This procedure shall contain the determination of the interference values and, in case of press-fitted wheelsets, the corresponding press-fitting diagram.’;
(38)in section 6.1.2.5, four instances of text ‘ERA/TD/2013-02/INT version 2.0 of XX.XX.2014’ are replaced by the text ‘ERA/TD/2013-02/INT version 3.0 of 27.11.2015’;
(39)a new section 6.1.2.6 is added below the section 6.1.2.5:
‘6.1.2.6. Automatic variable gauge system
The assessment procedure shall be based on a validation plan covering all aspects mentioned in points 4.2.3.6.6 and 5.3.4b.
The validation plan shall be consistent with the safety analysis required in clause 4.2.3.6.6 and shall define the assessment needed in all the following different phases:
–Design review
–Static tests (bench tests and integration-in-the-wheelset/unit tests)
–Test on track gauge changeover facility(ies), representative of in-service conditions
–On-track tests, representative of in-service conditions.
Regarding the demonstration of compliance to the safety level required in point 4.2.3.6.6, the assumptions considered for the safety analysis related to the unit the system is intended to be integrated in, and related to the mission profile of that unit, shall be clearly documented.
The automatic variable gauge system may be subject to an assessment of suitability for use (module CV). Before commencing in-service tests, a suitable module (CB or CH1) shall be used to certify the design of the interoperability constituent. The in-service tests shall be organised on request from the manufacturer, who must obtain an agreement from a railway undertaking for its contribution to such assessment.
The certificate delivered by the notified body in charge of the conformity assessment shall include both the conditions for use as per clause 5.3.4b and the type(s) and operating conditions of the track gauge changeover facility(ies) the automatic variable gauge system has been assessed for.’;
(40)In section 6.2.2.1, the text ‘The demonstration of conformity shall be in accordance with Chapters 6 and 7 of EN 12663-2:2010.’ is replaced by ‘The demonstration of conformity shall be in accordance with chapters 6 and 7 of EN 12663-2:2010, or alternatively with chapter 9.2 of EN 12663-1:2010+A1:2014.’;
(41)section 6.2.2.2 is replaced as follows:
‘6.2.2.2. Safety against derailment running on twisted track
The demonstration of conformity shall be carried out in accordance with chapters 4, 5 and 6.1 of EN 14363:2016.’;
(42)section 6.2.2.3 is replaced as follows:
‘6.2.2.3. Running dynamic behaviour
On-track tests
The demonstration of conformity shall be carried out in accordance with chapters 4, 5 and 7 of EN 14363:2016.
For units operated on the 1 668 mm track gauge network, the evaluation of the estimated value for the guiding force normalized to the radius Rm = 350 m according to EN 14363:2016, clause 7.6.3.2.6 (2), shall be calculated according to the following formula: Ya,nf,qst = Ya,f,qst – (11 550 m / Rm – 33) kN.
The limit value of the quasi-static guiding force Yj,a,qst shall be 66 kN.
Values of cant deficiency can be adapted to 1 668 mm track gauge by multiplying the corresponding 1 435 mm parameter values by the following conversion factor: 1 733/1 500.
The combination of the highest equivalent conicity and speed for which the unit meets the stability criterion in chapters 4, 5 and 7 of EN 14363:2016 shall be recorded in the report.’;
(43)in section 6.2.2.4, following text is added below the text:
‘It is permitted to use other standards for the above demonstration of conformity where the EN standards do not cover the proposed technical solution; in that case the notified body shall verify that the alternative standards form part of a technically consistent set of standards applicable to the design, construction and testing of the bearings.
Only standards that are publicly available can be referred to in the demonstration required above.
In the case of bearings manufactured according to a design developed and already used to place products on the market before the entry into force of relevant TSIs applicable to those products, the applicant is allowed to deviate from the demonstration of conformity above and refer to design review and type examination performed for previous applications under comparable conditions instead; this demonstration shall be documented and is considered as providing the same level of proof as type examination according to module SB or design examination according to module SH1.’;
(44)a new section 6.2.2.4a is added below section 6.2.2.4:
‘6.2.2.4a. Automatic variable gauge systems
The safety analysis required in point 4.2.3.6.6, and performed at IC level, shall be consolidated at the level of the unit; in particular, the assumptions made in accordance with point 6.1.2.6 may need to be reviewed to take into account the unit and its mission profile.’;
(45)in section 6.2.2.5, the text ‘for bogie units: Figure 18 of Annex H of Annex I of UIC leaflet 430-1:2012.’ is replaced by ‘for bogie units: Figure 18 of Annex H and Figures 19 and 20 of Annex I of UIC leaflet 430-1:2012.’;
(46)in section 6.2.2.8.1, the text ‘EN 1363-1:1999’ is replaced by ‘EN 1363-1:2012’;
(47)in section 6.2.2.8.2, the text: ‘Testing of the materials ignitability and flame spread properties shall be performed in accordance with ISO 5658-2:2006/Am1:2011 for which the limit value shall be CFE ≥ 18 kW/m2. For the following materials and components the fire safety requirements are deemed to comply with the required ignitability and flame spread properties:’ is replaced by ‘Testing of the materials ignitability and flame spread properties shall be performed in accordance with ISO 5658-2:2006/Am1:2011 for which the limit value shall be CFE ≥ 18 kW/m2.
For rubber parts of bogies, the testing shall be performed in accordance with ISO 5660-1:2015 for which the limit value shall be MARHE ≤ 90 kW/m2 under the test conditions specified in reference T03.02 of Table 6 of EN 45545-2:2013+A1:2015.
For the following materials and components the fire safety requirements are deemed to comply with the required ignitability and flame spread properties:
–Wheelsets, coated or uncoated,’;
(48)in section 6.2.2.8.3, the text ‘EN 50355:2003’ is replaced by ‘EN 50355:2013’;
(49)in section 6.2.2.8.3, the text ‘EN 50343:2003’ is replaced by ‘EN 50343:2014’;
(50)the section 7.1 is replaced as follows:
‘7.1. Authorisation for placing on the market
This TSI is applicable to the subsystem ‘rolling stock — freight wagons’ within the scope set out in its Sections 1.1, 1.2 and 2.1, which are placed on the market after the date of application of this TSI.
This TSI is also applicable on a voluntary basis to:
–units referred to in section 2.1 point (a) in transport (running) configuration, in case they correspond to a ‘unit’ as defined in this TSI, and
–units as defined in section 2.1 point (c), in case they are in empty configuration.
In case the applicant chooses to apply this TSI, the corresponding EC declaration of verification shall be recognised as such by Member States.’
(51)the section 7.1.2 is replaced as follows:
‘7.1.2 Mutual recognition of the first authorisation of placing on the market
In accordance with Article 21(3)(b) of Directive (EU) 2016/797 the authorisation for placing of the market of a vehicle (as defined in this TSI) is granted on the basis of:
·in accordance with point (a) of Article 21(3): the ‘EC’ declaration of verification as provided for in Article 15 of the same directive, and
·in accordance with (d) of Article 21(3): evidence of the technical compatibility of the unit with the network in the area of use covering the EU network.
Points (b) and (c) of Article 21(3) of Directive (EU) 2016/797 do not represent any additional requirement. The technical compatibility of the vehicle with the network being covered by rules (TSIs or national rules), this aspect is also considered at the level of the ‘EC’ verification.
Therefore, the conditions for having an area of use not limited to particular national networks are specified below as additional requirements to be covered in the EC verification of the subsystem rolling stock. These conditions shall be seen as complementary to the requirements in Section 4.2 and must be fulfilled in their entirety:
(a)The unit must be equipped with forged and rolled wheels assessed according to point 6.1.2.3(a).
(b)The compliance/non-compliance with the requirements regarding the axle bearing condition monitoring by line side equipment as set out in point 7.3.2.2.(a) must be recorded in the technical file.
(c)Units intended to operate on the 1 668 mm track gauge network must comply with the requirements regarding the axle bearing condition monitoring by line side equipment as set out in point 7.3.2.2(b).
(d)The reference profile established for the unit as per point 4.2.3.1 must be allocated to one of the target reference profile(s) G1, GA, GB and GC including those used for the lower part GI1 and GI2.
(e)The unit must be compatible with the train detection systems based on track circuits, on axle counters and on loop equipment as specified in clauses 4.2.3.3(a), 4.2.3.3(b) and 4.2.3.3(c).
(f)The unit must be equipped with the manual coupling system in accordance with the prescriptions set out in Appendix C, Section 1, including the fulfilment of Section 8 or with any semi-automatic or automatic standardised coupling system.
(g)The brake system must be in accordance with the conditions of Appendix C, Sections 9, 14 and 15 when applying the reference case set out in point 4.2.4.2.
(h)The unit must be marked with all applicable markings in accordance with EN 15877-1:2012, except the marking defined in its clause 4.5.25(b).
(i)The parking brake force shall be marked as set out in Figure 1, 30 mm below the marking defined in clause 4.5.3 of EN 15877-1:
Figure 1
1.Marking of the parking brake force
(52)Section 7.2, is replaced as follows:
‘7.2 General rules for implementation
7.2.1 Substitution of constituents
This section deals with substitutions of constituents as referred to in Article 2 of Directive (EU) 2016/797.
The following categories have to be considered:
Certified ICs: Components which correspond to an IC in Chapter 5 and which are holding a certificate of conformity.
Other components: Any component, which is not corresponding to an IC in Chapter 5.
Non-certified ICs: Components which correspond to an IC in Chapter 5 but are not holding a certificate of conformity and which are produced before the expiry of the transitional period referred to in Section 6.3.
Table 11 shows the possible permutations.
Table 11
Substitution permutation table
|
|
... substituted by ...
|
|
|
... certified ICs
|
... other components
|
... non-certified ICs
|
|
Certified ICs ...
|
Check
|
not possible
|
check
|
|
Other components ...
|
not possible
|
check
|
not possible
|
|
Non-certified ICs ...
|
Check
|
not possible
|
check
|
The word ‘check’ in Table 11 means that the entity in charge of maintenance (ECM) may under its responsibility substitute a component by another one utilising the same function and at least the same performance in accordance with the relevant TSI requirements considering that these components are:
–suitable, i.e. conform to the relevant TSI(s),
–used within its area of use,
–enabling interoperability,
–meeting the essential requirements, and
–in line with restrictions stated in the technical file.
7.2.2 Changes to an existing unit or to an existing unit type
7.2.2.1 Introduction
This point 7.2.2 defines the principles to be applied by the entities managing the change and authorising entities in line with the EC verification procedure described in Article 15(9), Article 21(12) and Annex IV of Directive (EU) 2016/797. This procedure is further developed in Article 13, 15 and 16 of Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) 2018/545 and in Decision 2010/713/EC.
This point 7.2.2 applies in case of any change(s) to an existing unit or unit type, including renewal or upgrade. It does not apply in case of changes that do not introduce a deviation from the technical files accompanying the EC declarations for verification for the subsystems.
7.2.2.2 Rules to manage changes in both a unit or a unit type
Parts and basic parameters of the unit that are not affected by the change(s) are exempt from conformity assessment against the provisions in this TSI.
A new assessment against the requirements of this TSI or the TSI Noise (Commission Regulation No 1304/2014, see clause 7.2 of that TSI) shall only be needed for the basic parameters in this TSI which may be affected by the change(s).
In accordance with Articles 15 and 16 of Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) 2018/545 and Decision 2010/713/EU and by application of modules SB, SD/SF or SH1 for the EC verification, and if relevant Article 15(5) of Directive (EU) 2016/797, the entity managing the change shall inform a notified body of all changes affecting the conformity of the subsystem with requirements of the relevant TSI(s) requiring new checks by a notified body. This information shall be provided by the entity managing the change with corresponding references to the technical documentation relating to the existing EC type or design examination certificate.
In accordance with article 21.12(b) of Directive (EU) 2016/797, in case of changes requiring reassessment of the safety requirements set out in clauses 4.2.4.2 for the brake system, a new authorization for placing into service will be required unless one of the following conditions are met:
·The brake system fulfills the conditions of C.9 and C.14 of Appendix C after change or,
·Both the original and changed brake systems were assessed against the safety requirements set out in clause 4.2.4.2
National migration strategies related to the implementation of other TSIs (e.g. TSIs covering fixed installations) shall be taken into account when defining to what extent the TSIs covering rolling stock needs to be applied.
The basic design characteristics of the rolling stock are defined in Table 11a. Based on these tables and on the safety judgement mandated in Article 21(12)(b) of Directive (EU) 2016/797, the changes shall be categorised as follows:
·15(1)(c) of Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) 2018/545 if they are above the thresholds set out in column 3 and below thresholds set out in column 4, or
·15(1)(d) of Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) 2018/545 if they are above the thresholds set out in column 4 or if the safety judgement mandated in Article 21(12)(b) of Directive (EU) 2016/797 requires to classify them as 15(1)(d).
Changes not referred to in the paragraph above are deemed not to have any impact on the basic design characteristics and will be categorised as 15(1)(a) or 15(1)(b) of Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) 2018/545, unless the safety judgement mandated in Article 21(12)(b) of Directive (EU) 2016/797 requires to categorise them as 15(1)(d).
All changes shall remain compliant with the applicable TSIs regardless their classification.
The replacement of a whole element within a rake of permanently connected elements after a severe damage does not require a conformity assessment against this TSI, as long as the element is identical to the one it replaces. Such element must be traceable and certified in accordance with any national or international rule, or any code of practice widely acknowledged in the railway domain.
Table 11a
Basic design characteristics related to basic parameters set out in the WAG TSI
|
1. TSI clause
|
2. Related basic design characteristic(s)
|
3. Changes impacting the basic design characteristic and not classified as 21(12)(a) of Directive (EU) 2016/797
|
4. Changes impacting the basic design characteristic and classified as 21(12)(a) of Directive (EU) 2016/797
|
|
4.2.2.1.1
End coupling
|
Type of end coupling
|
Change of end coupler type
|
N/A
|
|
4.2.3.1
Gauging
|
Reference profile
|
N/A
|
Change of reference profile the vehicle is conform to
|
|
|
Minimum vertical convex curve radius capability
|
Change in minimum vertical convex curve radius capability the unit is compatible with of more than 10%
|
N/A
|
|
|
Minimum vertical concave curve radius capability
|
Change in minimum vertical concave curve radius capability the unit is compatible with of more than 10%
|
N/A
|
|
4.2.3.2. Compatibility with load carrying capacity of lines
|
Permissible payload for different line categories
|
Change of any of the vertical loading characteristics resulting in a change of the line category(ies) the wagon is compatible with
|
N/A
|
|
4.2.3.3 Compatibility with train detection systems
|
Compatibility with train detection systems
|
N/A
|
Change of declared compatibility with one or more of the three train detection systems:
Track circuits
Axle counters
Loop equipment
|
|
4.2.3.4
Axle bearing condition monitoring
|
On-board detection system
|
N/A
|
Fitting/Removal of on-board detection system
|
|
4.2.3.5
Running safety
|
Combination of maximum speed and maximum cant deficiency for which the unit was assessed
|
N/A
|
Increase in maximum speed of more than 15 km/h or change of more than ± 10% in maximum admissible cant deficiency
|
|
|
Rail inclination
|
N/A
|
Change of rail inclination the vehicle is conform to
|
|
4.2.3.6.2 Characteristics of wheelsets
|
Wheelset gauge
|
N/A
|
Change of track gauge the wheelset is compatible with
|
|
4.2.3.6.3 Characteristics of wheels
|
Minimum required in-service wheel diameter
|
Change of minimum required in-service diameter of more than 10 mm
|
N/A
|
|
4.2.3.6.6
Automatic variable gauge systems
|
Wheelset gauge changeover facility
|
Change in the unit leading to a change in the changeover facility(ies) the wheelset is compatible with
|
Change of track gauge(s) the wheelset is compatible with
|
|
4.2.3.6.7
Running gear for manual change of wheelsets
|
Wheelset gauge
|
N/A
|
Change of track gauge(s) the wheelset is compatible with
|
|
4.2.4.3.2.1
Service brake
|
Stopping distance
|
Change of stopping distance of more than ± 10%
|
N/A
|
|
|
Maximum deceleration for the load condition ‘maximum speed under normal payload at the maximum design speed
|
Change of more than ± 10% on the maximum average brake deceleration
|
N/A
|
|
4.2.4.3.2.2
Parking brake
|
Parking brake
|
Parking brake function installed/removed
|
N/A
|
|
4.2.4.3.3
Thermal capacity
|
Thermal capacity expressed in terms of
Speed
Gradient
Brake distance
|
N/A
|
New reference case declared
|
|
4.2.4.3.4
Wheel slide protection (WSP)
|
Wheel slide protection
|
N/A
|
Fitting/removal of WSP function
|
|
4.2.5
Environmental conditions
|
Temperature range
|
Change of temperature range (T1, T2, T3)
|
N/A
|
|
|
Snow, ice and hail conditions
|
Change of the selected range ‘snow, ice and hail’ (nominal or severe)
|
N/A
|
In order to establish the EC type or design examination certificate, the notified body selected by the entity managing the change is permitted to refer to:
The original EC type or design examination certificate for parts of the design that are unchanged or those that are changed but do not affect the conformity of the subsystem, as far as it is still valid (during 10 years phase B period).
Additional EC type or design examination certificate (amending the original certificate) for modified parts of the design that affect the conformity of the subsystem with the latest revision of this TSI in force at that time.
In any case, the entity managing the change shall ensure that the technical documentation which is relating to the EC type or design examination certificate is updated accordingly.
The updated technical documentation, related to the EC type or design examination certificate is referred to in the technical file accompanying the EC declaration of verification issued by the entity managing the change for rolling stock declared as conformant to the modified type.
7.2.2.3 Particular rules for existing units not covered by an EC declaration of verification authorised for placing in service before 1 January 2015
The following rules apply to existing units authorised for placing in service before 1 January 2015, where the scope of the change has an impact on basic parameters not covered by the EC declaration
The compliance with technical requirements of this TSI is deemed established when a basic parameter is improved in the direction of the TSI defined performance and the entity managing the change demonstrates that the corresponding essential requirements are met and the safety level is maintained or improved. The entity managing the change shall in this case justify the reasons for which the TSI defined performance was not met, taking into account migration strategies of other TSIs as stated in section 7.2.2.2. This justification shall be in the technical file, if any, or in the original technical documentation of the unit.
The particular rule set out in paragraph (13) above is not applicable in changes impacting the basic design characteristics and classified as 21(12)a set out in table 11b.
Table 11b: Basic design characteristics related to basic parameters set out in the WAG TSI for rolling stock not holding an EC type or design examination certificate
|
TSI clause
|
Related basic design characteristic(s)
|
Changes impacting the basic design characteristic and classified as 21(12)(a) of Directive (EU) 2016/797
|
|
4.2.3.1 Gauging
|
Reference profile
|
Change of reference profile the unit is conform to
|
|
4.2.3.3 Compatibility with train detection systems
|
Compatibility with train detection systems
|
Change of declared compatibility with one or more of the three train detection systems:
Track circuits
Axle counters
Loop equipment
|
|
4.2.3.4 Axle bearing condition monitoring
|
On-board detection system
|
Fitting/Removal of on-board detection system
|
|
4.2.3.6.2 Characteristics of wheelsets
|
Wheelset gauge
|
Change of track gauge the wheelset is compatible with
|
|
4.2.3.6.6 Automatic variable gauge systems
|
Wheelset gauge changeover facility
|
Change of track gauge(s) the wheelset is compatible with
|
7.2.3 Rules related to the EC type or design examination certificates
7.2.3.1 Rolling stock subsystem
This point concerns a rolling stock type (unit type in the context of this TSI), as defined in Article 2(26) of Directive (EU) 2016/797, which is subject to an EC type or design verification procedure in accordance with section 6.2 of this TSI. It also applies to the EC type or design verification procedure in accordance with the TSI Noise, which refers to this TSI for its scope of application to freight units.
The TSI assessment basis for an EC type or design examination is defined in columns ‘Design review’ and ‘Type test’ of Appendix F of this TSI and of Appendix C of the TSI Noise.
7.2.3.1.1 Phase A
Phase A starts once a notified body, which is responsible for EC verification, is appointed by the applicant and ends when the EC type or design examination certificate is issued.
The TSI assessment basis for a type is defined for a phase A period, with a duration of maximum four years. During the phase A period the assessment basis for EC verification to be used by the notified body will not change.
When a revision of this TSI or of the TSI Noise comes into force during the phase A period, it is permissible (but not mandatory) to use the revised version(s), either totally or for particular sections, unless explicitly otherwise specified in the revision of these TSIs. In case of application limited to particular sections, the applicant has to justify and document that applicable requirements remain consistent, and this has to be approved by the notified body.
7.2.3.1.2 Phase B
The phase B period defines the period of validity of the EC type or design examination certificate once it is issued by the notified body. During this time, units may be EC certified on the basis of conformity to type.
The EC type or design examination certificate of EC verification for the subsystem is valid for a ten-year phase B period after its issue date, even if a revision of this TSI or of the TSI Noise come into force, unless explicitly otherwise specified in the revision of these TSIs. During this period of validity, new rolling stock of the same type is permitted to be placed on the market on the basis of an EC declaration of verification referring to the type certificate of verification.
The updated technical documentation related to the EC type or design examination certificate is referred to in the technical file accompanying the EC declaration of verification issued by the applicant for rolling stock declared as conformant to the modified type.
7.2.3.2 Interoperability constituents
This point concerns interoperability constituents which are subject to EC type examination (module CB), design examination (module CH1) or to suitability for use (module CV) in accordance with section 6.1 of this TSI.
The EC type or design examination or suitability for use certificate is valid for a ten-year period. During this time, new constituents of the same type are permitted to be placed into service without a new type assessment, unless explicitly otherwise specified in the revision of this TSI. Before the end of the ten-year period, the constituent shall be assessed according to the latest revision of this TSI in force at that time, for those requirements that have changed or are new in comparison to the certification basis.’;
(53)in section 7.2.2.2,a new footnote ‘(1) OJ L 356, 12.12.2014, p. 421.’ is added in the same page as text ‘Commission Regulation (EU) No 1304/2014 (1)’
(54)in section 7.2.2.3, a new footnote ‘(1) OJ L 356, 12.12.2014, p. 421.’ is added in the same page as text ‘Commission Regulation (EU) No 1304/2014 (1)’;
(55)in section 7.2.3.1, a new footnote ‘(1) OJ L 356, 12.12.2014, p. 421.’ is added in the same page as text ‘Commission Regulation (EU) No 1304/2014 (1)’;
(56)in section 7.3.1, the following text is added below the text:
‘In case of a specific case applicable to a component defined as interoperability constituent in section 5.3 of this TSI, the conformity assessment has to be performed according to point 6.1.2.’;
(57)in section 7.3.2.3, the text ‘EN 14363:2005 point 4.1.3.4.1’ is replaced by ‘EN 14363:2016 clause 6.1.5.3.1’;
(58)in section 7.3.2.3, the following text is added below the text:
(59)This specific case does not prevent the access of TSI compliant rolling stock to the national network.
(60)section 7.3.2.4, ‘Running dynamic behaviour (point 4.2.3.5.2)‘ is replaced by:
‘Specific case UK for Great Britain
(‘P’) Base condition for use of simplified measuring method specified in EN 14363:2016 clause 7.2.2 should be extended to nominal static vertical wheelset forces (PF0) up to 250 kN. For technical compatibility with the existing network it is permissible to use national technical rules amending EN 14363:2016 and notified for the purpose of running dynamic behaviour.
This specific case does not prevent the access of TSI compliant rolling stock to the national network.’;
(61)section 7.3.2.5, ‘Characteristics of wheelsets (points 4.2.3.6.2) ‘ is replaced by:
‘7.3.2.5, ‘Characteristics of wheelsets, wheels and axles (points 4.2.3.6.2 and 4.3.2.6.3)
Specific case UK for Great Britain
(‘P’) For units intended to operate solely on the railway network of Great Britain the characteristics of the wheelsets, wheels and axles may be in accordance with the national technical rules notified for this purpose.
This specific case does not prevent the access of TSI compliant rolling stock to the national network.’;
(62)section 7.3.2.6, ‘Characteristics of wheels (point 4.2.3.6.3) ‘ is deleted.
(63)Section 7.3.2.7 is added:
‘7.3.2.8. Rules to manage changes in both rolling stock and rolling stock type (7.2.2.2)
Specific case the United Kingdom (Great Britain)
(‘P’) Any change to a vehicle swept envelope as defined in the national technical rules notified for the gauging process (for example as described in RIS-2773-RST) will result in a new version.’
(64)In Appendix A, the complete text is replaced by ‘Not used’;
(65)In Appendix C, condition C.1 ‘Manual coupling system’, the text ‘The clearance for the draw hook shall be in accordance with chapter 2 of ERA technical document ERA/TD/2012-04/INT version 1.2 of 18.1.2013 published on the Agency website (http://www.era.europa.eu).’ is replaced by ‘The clearance for the draw hook shall be in accordance with clause 6.3.2 of EN 16116-2:2013.’;
(66)In Appendix C, condition C.1 ‘Manual coupling system’, the text ‘The space for shunting staff operation shall be in accordance with chapter 3 of ERA technical document ERA/TD/2012-04/INT version 1.2 of 18.1.2013 published on the Agency website (http://www.era.europa.eu).’ is replaced by ‘The space for shunting staff operation shall be in accordance with clause 6.2.1 of EN 16116- 2:2013. For manual coupling systems equipped with 550 mm wide buffers the calculation of the free space may be done considering that the coupling gear components are lateral centrally positioned (D = 0 mm as defined in Annex A of EN 16116-2:2013).’;
(67)In Appendix C, condition C.2 ‘UIC footsteps and handrails’ is replaced as follows:
‘2. UIC footsteps and handrails
The unit shall be equipped with footsteps and handrails in accordance with chapters 4 and 5 of EN 16116-2:2013 and with clearances in accordance with clause 6.2.2 of EN 16116-2:2013.’;
(68)In Appendix C, condition C.5 ‘Marking of units’, the following text is deleted:
‘Markings of EN 15877-1:2012 are required where applicable. The following are always applicable:
–4.5.2 Gauge marking
–4.5.3 Vehicle Tare Weight
–4.5.4 Vehicle load table
–4.5.5 Sign for length over buffers
–4.5.12 Table of Maintenance dates
–4.5.14 Lifting and re-railing signs
–4.5.23 Distances between end axles and bogie centres
–4.5.29 Brake weight.’;
(69)In Appendix C, condition C.6 ‘G1 gauge’, the text ‘GIC1’ is replaced by ‘GI1’;
(70)In Appendix C, condition C.8 ‘Tests concerning longitudinal compressive forces’, the text ‘EN 15839:2012’ is replaced by ‘EN 15839:2012+A1:2015’;
(71)In Appendix C, condition C.9 ‘UIC brake’, the text ‘(i) The pneumatic half coupling’ is replaced by ‘(i) The pneumatic half coupling and its hose’;
(72)In Appendix C, condition C.9 ‘UIC brake’, the text ‘(k) Brake block holders shall be in accordance with UIC leaflet 542:2010’ is replaced by ‘(k) Brake block holders shall be in accordance with UIC 542:2013.’;
(73)In Appendix C, condition C.9 ‘UIC brake’, the point (m) is replaced as follows:
‘(m) Slack adjusters shall be in accordance with chapters 4 and 5 of EN 16241:2014. The assessment of conformity shall be carried out in accordance with clauses 6.3.2 to 6.3.5 of EN 16241:2014. Additionnally, a life test shall be performed to demonstrate the suitability of the slack adjuster for service on the unit and to verify the maintenance requirements for the operational design life. This shall be carried out at the maximum rated load cycling through the full range of adjustment.’;
(74)In Appendix C, condition C.9 ‘UIC brake’, the text ‘UIC 544-1:2013’ in row ‘Braking mode ‘G’’ of Table C.3 is replaced by the text ‘UIC 544-1:2014’;
(75)In Appendix C, condition C.9 ‘UIC brake’, the text ‘EN 14531-1:2005 section 5.11’ of the footnote (1) of Table C.3 is replaced by the text ‘EN 14531-1:2015 section 4’;
(76)In Appendix C, condition C.11 ‘Temperature ranges for air reservoirs, hoses and grease’ is replaced as follows condition:
’11. Temperature ranges for air reservoirs, hoses and grease
The following requirements are deemed to comply with any temperature range indicated in point 4.2.5:
–Air reservoirs shall be designed for the temperature range of – 40 °C to + 70 C.
–Brake cylinders and brake couplings shall be designed for the temperature range of – 40 °C to + 70 °C.
–Hoses for air brakes and air supply shall be specified for the temperature range of – 40 °C to + 70 °C.
The following requirement is deemed to comply with the range T1 indicated in point 4.2.5:
–The grease for the lubrication of roller bearing shall be specified for ambient temperatures down to – 20 °C.’;
(77)In Appendix C, condition C.12 ‘Welding’ is replaced as follows condition:
‘Welding shall be carried out in accordance with EN 15085-1:2007+A1:2013, EN 15085-2:2007, EN 15085- 3:2007, EN 15085-4:2007 and EN 15085-5:2007.’;
(78)In Appendix C, the following text is added below the text in condition C.16 ‘Tow hooks’:
‘Alternative technical solutions are allowed as far as conditions 1.4.2 to 1.4.9 of UIC 535-2:2006 are respected. If the alternative solution is a cable eye bracket, it shall in addition have a minimum diameter of 85 mm.’;
(79)In Appendix C, the following condition C.19 is added: ‘19. Axle bearing condition monitoring
It shall be possible to monitor the axle bearing condition of the unit by means of line side detection equipment.’;
(80)Appendix D is replaced as follows:
Appendix D
Mandatory standards or normative documents referred to in this TSI
|
TSI
|
Standard/document
|
|
Characteristics to be assessed
|
References to Standard or document
|
Clauses
|
|
Structure and mechanical part
|
4.2.2
|
|
|
Strength of unit
|
4.2.2.2
|
EN 12663-2:2010
|
5
|
|
|
|
EN 15877-1:2012
|
4.5.14
|
|
|
6.2.2.1
|
EN 12663-1:2010+A1:2014
|
9.2
|
|
|
|
EN 12663-2:2010
|
6, 7
|
|
Gauging and track interaction
|
4.2.3
|
|
|
Gauging
|
4.2.3.1
|
EN 15273-2:2013
|
all
|
|
Compatibility with load carrying capacity of lines
|
4.2.3.2
|
EN 15528:2015
|
6.1, 6.2
|
|
Compatibility with train detection systems
|
4.2.3.3
|
ERA/ERTMS/033281 rev. 4.0
|
See table 7 of this TSI
|
|
Axle bearing condition monitoring
|
4.2.3.4
|
EN 15437-1:2009
|
5.1, 5.2
|
|
Safety against derailment running on twisted track
|
4.2.3.5.1
|
—
|
—
|
|
|
6.2.2.2
|
EN 14363:2016
|
4, 5, 6.1
|
|
Running dynamic behaviour
|
4.2.3.5.2
|
EN 14363:2016
|
4, 5, 7
|
|
|
6.1.2.1
6.2.2.3
|
EN 14363:2016
|
4, 5, 7
|
|
|
|
EN 16235:2013
|
all
|
|
|
6.1.2.1
|
EN 13749:2011
|
6.2
|
|
Structural design of bogie frame
|
4.2.3.6.1
|
EN 13749:2011
|
6.2
|
|
|
6.1.2.1
|
EN 13749:2011
|
6.2
|
|
Characteristics of wheelsets
|
4.2.3.6.2
|
—
|
—
|
|
|
6.1.2.2
|
EN 13260:2009+A1:2010
|
3.2.1
|
|
Characteristics of wheels
|
4.2.3.6.3
|
—
|
—
|
|
|
6.1.2.3
|
EN 13979-1:2003+A1:2009
+A2:2011
|
7, 6.2
|
|
Characteristics of axles
|
4.2.3.6.4
|
—
|
—
|
|
|
6.1.2.4
|
EN 13103:2009 + A2:2012
|
4, 5, 6, 7
|
|
Axle boxes/bearings
|
4.2.3.6.5
|
—
|
—
|
|
|
6.2.2.4
|
EN 12082:2007+A1:2010
|
6
|
|
Running gear for manual change of wheelsets
|
4.2.3.6.7
|
—
|
—
|
|
|
6.2.2.5
|
UIC leaflet 430-1:2012
|
Annexes B, H, I
|
|
|
|
UIC 430-3:1995
|
Annex 7
|
|
Brake
|
4.2.4
|
|
|
Service brake
|
4.2.4.3.2.1
|
EN 14531-6:2009
|
all
|
|
|
|
UIC 544-1:2014
|
all
|
|
Parking brake
|
4.2.4.3.2.2
|
EN 14531-6:2009
|
6
|
|
Friction element for wheel tread brakes
|
4.2.4.3.5
|
–
|
–
|
|
|
6.1.2.5
|
ERA technical document ERA/TD/2013-02/INT
Version 3.0 of 27.11.2015
|
All
|
|
Environmental conditions
|
4.2.5
|
|
|
Environmental conditions
|
4.2.5
|
EN 50125-1:2014
|
4.7
|
|
|
6.2.2.7
|
—
|
—
|
|
System protection
|
4.2.6
|
|
|
Barriers
|
4.2.6.1.2.1
|
—
|
—
|
|
|
6.2.2.8.1
|
EN 1363-1:2012
|
all
|
|
Materials
|
4.2.6.1.2.2
|
—
|
—
|
|
|
6.2.2.8.2
|
ISO 5658- 2:2006/Am1:2011
|
all
|
|
|
|
EN 13501-1:2007+A1:2009
|
all
|
|
|
|
EN 45545-2:2013+A1:2015
|
Table 6
|
|
|
|
ISO 5660-1:2015
|
all
|
|
Cables
|
6.2.2.8.3
|
EN 50355:2013
|
all
|
|
|
|
EN 50343:2014
|
all
|
|
Flammable liquids
|
6.2.2.8.4
|
EN 45545-7:2013
|
all
|
|
Protective measures against indirect contact (protective bonding)
|
4.2.6.2.2.1
|
EN 50153:2014
|
6.4
|
|
Protective measures against direct contact
|
4.2.6.2.2.2
|
EN 50153:2014
|
5
|
|
Attachment devices for rear-end signal
|
4.2.6.3
|
EN 16116-2:2013
|
Figure 11
|
Standards or documents referred to in the additional optional conditions set out in Appendix C
|
Additional optional conditions for units
|
App. C
|
Standard / UIC leaflet / document
|
|
Manual coupling system
|
C.1
|
EN 15566:2009+A1:2010
|
all (except 4.4)
|
|
|
|
EN 15551:2009+A1:2010
|
all
|
|
|
|
EN 16116-2:2013
|
6.2.1, 6.3.2
|
|
|
|
EN 15877-1:2012
|
Figure 75
|
|
UIC footsteps and handrails
|
C.2
|
EN 16116-2:2013
|
4, 5, 6.2.2
|
|
Ability to be hump shunted
|
C.3
|
EN 12663-2:2010
|
5, 8
|
|
Tests concerning longitudinal compressive forces
|
C.8
|
EN 15839:2012+A1:2015
|
all
|
|
UIC brake
|
C.9
|
EN 15355:2008+A1:2010
|
all
|
|
|
|
EN 15611:2008+A1:2010
|
all
|
|
|
|
UIC 540:2006
|
all
|
|
|
|
EN 14531-1:2015
|
4
|
|
|
|
EN 15624:2008+A1:2010
|
all
|
|
|
|
EN 15625:2008+A1:2010
|
all
|
|
|
|
EN 286-3:1994
|
all
|
|
|
|
EN 286-4:1994
|
all
|
|
|
|
EN 15807:2011
|
all
|
|
|
|
EN 14601:2005+A1:2010
|
all
|
|
|
|
UIC 544-1:2014
|
all
|
|
|
|
UIC 542:2013
|
all
|
|
|
|
UIC 541-4:2010
|
all
|
|
|
|
EN 16241:2014
|
4, 5, 6.3.2 to
6.3.5
|
|
|
|
EN 15595:2009+A1:2011
|
all
|
|
Welding
|
C.12
|
EN 15085-1:2007+A1:2013 EN 15085-2:2007
EN 15085-3:2007
EN 15085-4:2007
EN 15085-5:2007
|
all
|
|
Specific product properties concerning the wheel
|
C.15
|
EN 13262:2004
+A1:2008+A2:2011
|
all
|
|
|
|
EN 13979-1:2003
+A1:2009+A2:2011
|
all
|
|
Tow hooks
|
C.16
|
UIC 535-2:2006
|
1.4
|
|
Protective devices on protruding parts
|
C.17
|
UIC 535-2:2006
|
1.3
|
|
Label holders and attachment devices for rear end signal
|
C.18
|
UIC 575:1995
|
1
|
(81)In Appendix E, the text ‘The lamp shall display a luminous area of at least 170 mm diameter.’ is deleted;
(82)In Appendix F, the row ‘Variable gauge wheelsets’ of Table F.1 is replaced by:
|
Automatic variable gauge system
|
4.2.3.6.6
|
X
|
X
|
X
|
6.1.2.6/6.2.2.4a
|
’.
ANNEX II
The Annex to Commission Regulation (EU) No 1299/2014 is amended as follows:
(1)section 1.1 is replaced by the following:
‘1.1. Technical Scope
This TSI concerns the infrastructure subsystem and part of the maintenance subsystem of the Union rail system in accordance with Article 1 of Directive (EU) 2016/797.
The infrastructure and the maintenance subsystems are defined respectively in points 2.1 and 2.8 of Annex II to Directive (EU) 2016/797.
The technical scope of this TSI is further defined in Article 2(1), 2(5) and 2(6) of this Regulation. ’;
(2)point (1) of section 1.3 is replaced by the following:
‘(1)
In accordance with Article 4(3) of Directive (EU) 2016/797, this TSI:
(a)indicates its intended scope (section 2);
(b)lays down essential requirements for the infrastructure and part of the maintenance subsystems (section 3);
(c)establishes the functional and technical specifications to be met by the infrastructure and part of the maintenance subsystems and its interfaces vis-à-vis other subsystems (section 4);
(d)specifies the interoperability constituents and interfaces which must be covered by European specifications, including European standards, which are necessary to achieve interoperability within the Union rail system (section 5);
(e)states, in each case under consideration, which procedures are to be used in order to assess the conformity or the suitability for use of the interoperability constituents, on the one hand, or the EC verification of the subsystems, on the other hand (section 6);
(f)indicates the strategy for implementing this TSI (section 7);
(g)indicates, for the staff concerned, the professional qualifications and health and safety conditions at work required for the operation and maintenance of the infrastructure subsystem, as well as for the implementation of this TSI (section 4);
(h)indicates the provisions applicable to the existing infrastructure subsystem, in particular in the event of upgrading and renewal and, in such cases, the modification work which requires an application for a new authorisation;
(i)indicates the parameters of infrastructure subsystem to be checked by the railway undertaking and the procedures to be applied to check those parameters after the delivery of the vehicle authorisation for placing on the market and before the first use of the vehicle to ensure compatibility between vehicles and the routes on which they are to be operated.
In accordance with Article 4(5) of the Directive (EU) 2016/797, provisions for specific cases are indicated in section 7. ’;
(3)section 2.1 is replaced by the following:
‘2.1. Definition of the infrastructure subsystem
This TSI covers:
(a)the infrastructure structural subsystem
(b)the part of the maintenance functional subsystem relating to the infrastructure subsystem (that is: washing plants for external cleaning of trains, water restocking, refuelling, fixed installations for toilet discharge and electrical shore supplies).
The elements of the infrastructure subsystem are described in point 2.1 of Annex II to Directive (EU) 2016/797.
The elements of the maintenance subsystem are described in point 2.8 of Annex II to Directive (EU) 2016/797.
The scope of this TSI therefore includes the following aspects of the infrastructure subsystem:
(a)Line layout,
(b)Track parameters,
(c)Switches and crossings,
(d)Track resistance to applied loads,
(e)Structures resistance to traffic loads,
(f)Immediate action limits on track geometry defects,
(g)Platforms,
(h)Health, safety and environment,
(i)Provision for operation,
(j)Fixed installations for servicing trains.
Further details are set out in point 4.2.2 of this TSI. ’;
(4)in section 2.5, the reference to ‘Directive 2004/49/EC’ is replaced by the reference to ‘Directive (EU) 2016/798’;
(5)in section 3, the reference to ‘Directive 2008/57/EC’ is replaced by the reference to ‘Directive (EU) 2016/797’;
(6)Table 1 in section 3 is replaced by the following:
‘
|
Table 1: Basic Parameters of the infrastructure subsystem corresponding to the essential requirements
|
|
TSI point
|
Title of TSI point
|
Safety
|
Reliability Availabi-lity
|
Health
|
Environ-mental protection
|
Technical compati-bility
|
Accessi-bility
|
|
4.2.3.1
|
Structure gauge
|
1.1.1, 2.1.1
|
|
|
|
1.5
|
|
|
4.2.3.2
|
Distance between track centres
|
1.1.1, 2.1.1
|
|
|
|
1.5
|
|
|
4.2.3.3
|
Maximum gradients
|
1.1.1
|
|
|
|
1.5
|
|
|
4.2.3.4
|
Minimum radius of horizontal curve
|
1.1.3
|
|
|
|
1.5
|
|
|
4.2.3.5
|
Minimum radius of vertical curve
|
1.1.3
|
|
|
|
1.5
|
|
|
4.2.4.1
|
Nominal track gauge
|
|
|
|
|
1.5
|
|
|
4.2.4.2
|
Cant
|
1.1.1, 2.1.1
|
|
|
|
1.5
|
1.6.1
|
|
4.2.4.3
|
Cant deficiency
|
1.1.1
|
|
|
|
1.5
|
|
|
4.2.4.4
|
Abrupt change of cant deficiency
|
2.1.1
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
4.2.4.5
|
Equivalent conicity
|
1.1.1, 1.1.2
|
|
|
|
1.5
|
|
|
4.2.4.6
|
Railhead profile for plain line
|
1.1.1, 1.1.2
|
|
|
|
1.5
|
|
|
4.2.4.7
|
Rail inclination
|
1.1.1, 1.1.2
|
|
|
|
1.5
|
|
|
4.2.5.1
|
Design geometry of switches and crossings
|
1.1.1, 1.1.2
1.1.3
|
|
|
|
1.5
|
|
|
4.2.5.2
|
Use of swing nose crossings
|
1.1.2, 1.1.3
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
4.2.5.3
|
Maximum unguided length of fixed obtuse crossings
|
1.1.1, 1.1.2
|
|
|
|
1.5
|
|
|
4.2.6.1
|
Track resistance to vertical loads
|
1.1.1, 1.1.2, 1.1.3
|
|
|
|
1.5
|
|
|
4.2.6.2
|
Longitudinal track resistance
|
1.1.1, 1.1.2, 1.1.3
|
|
|
|
1.5
|
|
|
4.2.6.3
|
Lateral track resistance
|
1.1.1, 1.1.2, 1.1.3
|
|
|
|
1.5
|
|
|
4.2.7.1
|
Resistance of new bridges to traffic loads
|
1.1.1, 1.1.3
|
|
|
|
1.5
|
|
|
4.2.7.2
|
Equivalent vertical loading for new earthworks and earth pressure effects imposed on new structures
|
1.1.1, 1.1.3
|
|
|
|
1.5
|
|
|
4.2.7.3
|
Resistance of new structures over or adjacent to tracks
|
1.1.1, 1.1.3
|
|
|
|
1.5
|
|
|
4.2.7.4
|
Resistance of existing bridges and earthworks to traffic loads
|
1.1.1, 1.1.3
|
|
|
|
1.5
|
|
|
4.2.8.1
|
The immediate action limit for alignment
|
1.1.1, 1.1.2
|
1.2
|
|
|
|
|
|
4.2.8.2
|
The immediate action limit for longitudinal level
|
1.1.1, 1.1.2
|
1.2
|
|
|
|
|
|
4.2.8.3
|
The immediate action limit for track twist
|
1.1.1, 1.1.2
|
1.2
|
|
|
|
|
|
4.2.8.4
|
The immediate action limit of track gauge as isolated defect
|
1.1.1, 1.1.2
|
1.2
|
|
|
|
|
|
4.2.8.5
|
The immediate action limit for cant
|
1.1.1, 1.1.2
|
1.2
|
|
|
|
|
|
4.2.8.6
|
The immediate action limit for switches and crossings
|
1.1.1, 1.1.2
|
1.2
|
|
|
1.5
|
|
|
4.2.9.1
|
Usable length of platforms
|
1.1.1, 2.1.1
|
|
|
|
1.5
|
|
|
4.2.9.2
|
Platform height
|
1.1.1, 2.1.1
|
|
|
|
1.5
|
1.6.1
|
|
4.2.9.3
|
Platform offset
|
1.1.1, 2.1.1
|
|
|
|
1.5
|
1.6.1
|
|
4.2.9.4
|
Track layout alongside platforms
|
1.1.1, 2.1.1
|
|
|
|
1.5
|
1.6.1
|
|
4.2.10.1
|
Maximum pressure variations in tunnels
|
1.1.1, 2.1.1
|
|
|
|
1.5
|
|
|
4.2.10.2
|
Effect of cross winds
|
1.1.1, 2.1.1
|
1.2
|
|
|
1.5
|
|
|
4.2.10.3
|
Aerodynamic effect on ballasted track
|
1.1.1
|
1.2
|
|
|
1.5
|
|
|
4.2.11.1
|
Location markers
|
1.1.1
|
1.2
|
|
|
|
|
|
4.2.11.2
|
Equivalent conicity in service
|
1.1.1, 1.1.2
|
|
|
|
1.5
|
|
|
4.2.12.2
|
Toilet discharge
|
1.1.5
|
1.2
|
1.3.1
|
|
1.5
|
|
|
4.2.12.3
|
Train external cleaning facilities
|
|
1.2
|
|
|
1.5
|
|
|
4.2.12.4
|
Water restocking
|
1.1.5
|
1.2
|
1.3.1
|
|
1.5
|
|
|
4.2.12.5
|
Refuelling
|
1.1.5
|
1.2
|
1.3.1
|
|
1.5
|
|
|
4.2.12.6
|
Electric shore supply
|
1.1.5
|
1.2
|
|
|
1.5
|
|
|
4.4
|
Operating rules
|
|
1.2
|
|
|
|
|
|
4.5
|
Maintenance rules
|
|
1.2
|
|
|
|
|
|
4.6
|
Professional qualifications
|
1.1.5
|
1.2
|
|
|
|
|
|
4.7
|
Health and safety conditions
|
1.1.5
|
1.2
|
1.3
|
1.4.1
|
|
|
’;
(7)in point (1) of section 4.1, the reference to ‘Directive 2008/57/EC’ is replaced by the reference to ‘Directive (EU) 2016/797’;
(8)point (3) of section 4.1 is replaced by the following:
‘(3) The functional and technical specifications of the infrastructure and part of the maintenance subsystems and their interfaces, as described in points 4.2 and 4.3, do not impose the use of specific technologies or technical solutions, except where this is strictly necessary for the interoperability of the Union rail system. ’;
(9)the title of section 4.2 is replaced by the following ‘4.2.
Functional and technical specifications of the infrastructure subsystem’;
(10)points (1) to (3) of section 4.2.1 are replaced by the following:
‘(1) The elements of the Union’s rail network are set out in point 1 of Annex I to Directive (EU) 2016/797. In order to deliver interoperability cost-effectively, each element of the Union’s rail network shall be assigned a ‘TSI category of line’.
(2) The TSI category of line shall be a combination of traffic codes. For lines where only one type of traffic is carried (for example, a freight only line), a single code may be used to describe the performances; where mixed traffic runs the category will be described by one or more codes for passenger and freight. The combined traffic codes describe the envelope within which the desired mix of traffic can be accommodated.
(3) These TSI categories of line shall be used for the classification of existing lines to define a target system so that the relevant performance parameters will be met. ’;
(11)in point (7) of section 4.2.1, note (*) of Table 3 is replaced by the following:
‘(*) Axle load is based on design mass in working order for power heads and locomotives as defined in point 2.1 of EN 15663:2009+AC:2010 and design mass under normal payload for other vehicles in accordance with point 6.3 of EN15663:2009+AC:2010.’;
(12)point (10) of section 4.2.1 is replaced by the following:
‘(10) In accordance with Article 4(7) of Directive (EU) 2016/797 which provides that TSIs shall not prevent the Member States from deciding on the use of infrastructures for the movement of vehicles not covered by the TSIs, it is allowed to design new and upgraded lines able to accommodate:
·gauges larger,
·axle loads higher,
·speeds greater,
·usable length of platform greater,
·trains longer
than those specified in Table 2 and Table 3.’;
(13)point (c) of point H in section 4.2.2.1 is replaced by the following:
‘(c) Aerodynamic effect on ballasted track (4.2.10.3) ’;
(14)in point K of section 4.2.2.1 the following point is added:
‘(b) Maintenance plan (4.5.2). ’;
(15)point (5) in section 4.2.4.2 is replaced by the following:
‘(5) Instead of point (1), for the 1668 mm track gauge system, the design cant shall not exceed 180 mm. ’;
(16)point (4) in section 4.2.4.4 is replaced by the following:
‘(4) Instead of point (1), for the 1 668 mm track gauge system, the maximum design values of abrupt change of cant deficiency shall be:
(a)150 mm for V ≤ 45 km/h
(b)115 mm for 45 km/h <V ≤ 100 km/h,
(c)(399-V)/2.6 [mm] for 100 km/h < V ≤ 220 km/h,
(d)70 mm for 220 km/h < V ≤ 230 km/h,
(e)Abrupt change of cant deficiency is not allowed for speeds of more than 230 km/h. ’;
(17)point (3) in section 4.2.4.5 is replaced by the following:
‘(3) Design track gauge, rail head profile and rail inclination for plain line shall be selected to ensure that the equivalent conicity limits set out in Table 10 are not exceeded. ’;
(18)figure 1 in section 4.2.4.6 is replaced by the following:
(19)point (2) in section 4.2.4.7.1 is replaced by the following:
‘(2) For tracks intended to be operated at speeds greater than 60 km/h, the rail inclination for a given route shall be selected from the range 1/20 to 1/40.’;
(20)point (2) in section 4.2.6.2.2 is replaced by the following:
‘(2) Provisions for the use of eddy current braking systems on track shall be defined at operational level by the infrastructure manager on the basis of the specific characteristics of the track, including switches and crossings. The conditions of use of this braking system are registered in accordance with Regulation (EU) 2018/XXX (RINF). ’;
(21)Table 11 in section 4.2.7.1.1 is replaced by the following:
‘
|
Table 11: Factor alpha (α ) for the design of new structures
|
|
Type of traffic
|
Minimum factor alpha (α)
|
|
P1, P2, P3, P4
|
1,0
|
|
P5
|
0,91
|
|
P6
|
0,83
|
|
P1520
|
1
|
|
P1600
|
1,1
|
|
F1, F2, F3
|
1,0
|
|
F4
|
0,91
|
|
F1520
|
1,46
|
|
F1600
|
1,1
|
’;
(22)section 4.2.10.3 is replaced by the following:
‘4.2.10.3 Aerodynamic effect on ballasted track
(1)The aerodynamic interaction between rolling stock and infrastructure may cause the lifting and further blowing away of ballast stones from the track bed in plain line and switches and crossings (Ballast pick up). This risk shall be mitigated.
(2)The requirements for the infrastructure subsystem aimed at mitigating the risk for ‘ballast pick up’ apply only to lines intended to be operated at speed greater than 250 km/h.
(3)For lines as defined in point (2) above with intended operating speed lower than or equal to 300 km/h and equipped with mono-block sleepers and bearers, the level of the ballast between the rails shall be lower than the upper surface of the sleepers and the bearers.
Without prejudice to point 4.2.6, the distance between the upper surface of the sleepers and the bearers, and the level of the ballast between rails shall be at least 3 cm.
(4)For speed greater than 300 km/h, the requirements of point (1) above are an open point. ’;
(23)section 4.2.12.2 is replaced by the following:
‘Fixed installations for toilet discharge shall be compatible with the characteristics of the retention toilet system specified in the LOC & PAS TSI. ’;
(24)point (1) in section 4.2.12.4 is replaced by the following:
‘(1) Fixed equipment for water restocking shall be compatible with the characteristics of the water system specified in the LOC & PAS TSI. ’;
(25)section 4.2.12.5 is replaced by the following:
‘Refuelling equipment shall be compatible with the characteristics of the fuel system specified in the LOC & PAS TSI. ’;
(26)section 4.2.12.6 is replaced by the following:
‘Where provided, electrical shore supply shall be by means of one or more of the power supply systems specified in the LOC & PAS TSI. ’;
(27)Table 15 in section 4.3.1 is replaced by the following:
‘
Table 15: Interfaces with the rolling stock subsystem, ‘Locomotives and Passenger Rolling Stock TSI’
|
Interface
|
Reference Infrastructure TSI
|
Reference Locomotives and Passenger Rolling Stock TSI
|
|
Track gauge
|
4.2.4.1 Nominal track gauge
4.2.5.1 Design geometry of switches and crossings
4.2.8.6 The immediate action limits for switches and crossings
|
4.2.3.5.2.1 Mechanical and geometrical characteristics of wheelset
4.2.3.5.2.3 Variable gauge wheelsets
|
|
Gauge
|
4.2.3.1 Structure gauge
4.2.3.2 Distance between track centres
4.2.3.5 Minimum radius of vertical curve
4.2.9.3 Platform offset
|
4.2.3.1. Gauging
|
|
Axle load and axle spacing
|
4.2.6.1 Track resistance to vertical loads
4.2.6.3 Lateral track resistance 4.2.7.1 Resistance of new bridges to traffic loads
4.2.7.2 Equivalent vertical loading for new earthworks and earth pressure effects imposed on new structures
4.2.7.4 Resistance of existing bridges and earthworks to traffic loads
|
4.2.2.10 Load conditions and weighed mass
4.2.3.2.1 Axle load parameter
|
|
Running characteristics
|
4.2.6.1 Track resistance to vertical loads
4.2.6.3 Lateral track resistance
4.2.7.1.4 Nosing forces
|
4.2.3.4.2.1 Limit values for running safely
4.2.3.4.2.2 Track loading limit values
|
|
Ride stability
|
4.2.4.4 Equivalent conicity
4.2.4.6 Railhead profile for plain line
4.2.11.2 Equivalent conicity in service
|
4.2.3.4.3 Equivalent conicity
4.2.3.5.2.2 Mechanical and geometrical characteristics of wheels
|
|
Longitudinal actions
|
4.2.6.2 Longitudinal track resistance
4.2.7.1.5 Actions due to traction and braking (longitudinal loads)
|
4.2.4.5 Braking performance
|
|
Minimum horizontal curve radius
|
4.2.3.4 Minimum radius of horizontal curve
|
4.2.3.6 Minimum curve radius
Annex A, A.1 Buffers
|
|
Running dynamic behaviour
|
4.2.4.3 Cant deficiency
|
4.2.3.4.2. Running dynamic behaviour
|
|
Maximum deceleration
|
4.2.6.2 Longitudinal track resistance
4.2.7.1.5 Actions due to traction and braking
|
4.2.4.5 Braking performance
|
|
Aerodynamic effect
|
4.2.3.2 Distance between track centres
4.2.7.3 Resistance of new structures over or adjacent to tracks
4.2.10.1 Maximum pressure variations in tunnels
4.2.10.3 Aerodynamic effect on ballasted track
|
4.2.6.2.1 Slipstream effects on passengers on platforms and on trackside workers
4.2.6.2.2 Head pressure pulse
4.2.6.2.3 Maximum pressure variations in tunnels
4.2.6.2.5 Aerodynamic effect on ballasted tracks
|
|
Crosswind
|
4.2.10.2 Effect of crosswinds
|
4.2.6.2.4 Crosswind
|
|
Installations for servicing trains
|
4.2.12.2 Toilet discharge
4.2.12.3 Train external cleaning facilities
4.2.12.4 Water restocking
4.2.12.5 Refuelling
4.2.12.6 Electric shore supply
|
4.2.11.3 Toilet discharge system
4.2.11.2.2 Exterior cleaning through a washing plant 4.2.11.4 Water refilling equipment
4.2.11.5 Interface for water refilling
4.2.11.7 Refuelling equipment 4.2.11.6 Special requirements for stabling of trains
|
’;
(28)Table 16 in section 4.3.1 is replaced by the following:
‘
Table 16: Interfaces with the rolling stock subsystem, ‘Freight Wagons TSI’
|
Interface
|
Reference Infrastructure TSI
|
Reference Freight wagons TSI
|
|
Track gauge
|
4.2.4.1 Nominal track gauge
4.2.4.6 Railhead profile for plain line
4.2.5.1 Design geometry of switches and crossings
4.2.8.6 The immediate action limits for switches and crossings
|
4.2.3.6.2 Characteristics of wheelsets
4.2.3.6.3 Characteristics of wheels
|
|
Gauge
|
4.2.3.1 Structure gauge
4.2.3.2 Distance between track centres
4.2.3.5 Minimum radius of vertical curve
4.2.9.3 Platform offset
|
4.2.3.1 Gauging
|
|
Axle load and axle spacing
|
4.2.6.1 Track resistance to vertical loads
4.2.6.3 Lateral track resistance
4.2.7.1 Resistance of new bridges to traffic loads
4.2.7.2 Equivalent vertical loading for new earthworks and earth pressure effects imposed on new structures
4.2.7.4 Resistance of existing bridges and earthworks to traffic loads
|
4.2.3.2 Compatibility with load carrying capacity of lines
|
|
Running dynamic behaviour
|
4.2.8 Immediate action limits on track geometry defects
|
4.2.3.5.2 Running dynamic behaviour
|
|
Longitudinal actions
|
4.2.6.2 Longitudinal track resistance
4.2.7.1.5 Actions due to traction and braking (longitudinal loads)
|
4.2.4.3.2 Brake performance
|
|
Minimum curve radius
|
4.2.3.4 Minimum radius of horizontal curve
|
4.2.2.1. Mechanical interface
|
|
Vertical curve
|
4.2.3.5 Minimum radius of vertical curve
|
4.2.3.1 Gauging
|
’;
(29)Table 19 in section 4.3.4 is replaced by the following:
‘
Table 19 “Interfaces with the operation and traffic management subsystem”
|
Interface
|
Reference Infrastructure TSI
|
Reference Operation and Traffic Management TSI
|
|
Ride stability
|
4.2.11.2 Equivalent conicity in service
|
4.2.3.4.4Operational quality
|
|
Use of eddy current brakes
|
4.2.6.2 Longitudinal track resistance
|
4.2.2.6.2 Braking performance
|
|
Crosswinds
|
4.2.10.2 Effect of crosswinds
|
4.2.3.6.3 Contingency arrangements
|
|
Operating rules
|
4.4 Operating rules
|
4.2.1.2.2.2 Modifications to information contained in the route book
4.2.3.6 Degraded operation
|
|
Staff competences
|
4.6 Professional competences
|
2.2.1 Staff and trains
|
’;
(30)in point (1) of section 4.4, the terms ‘Article 18(3) and set out in Annex VI (point I.2.4) of Directive 2008/57/EC’ are replaced by the terms ‘Article 15(4) and set out in Annex IV (point 2.4) of Directive (EU) 2016/797’;
(31)section 4.5.2 is replaced by the following:
‘4.5.2. Maintenance plan
The infrastructure manager shall have a maintenance plan containing the items listed in point 4.5.1 together with at least the following:
(a)a set of values for intervention limits and alert limits,
(b)a statement about the methods, professional competences of staff and personal protective safety equipment necessary to be used,
(c)the rules to be applied for the protection of people working on or near the track,
(d)the means used to check that in-service values are respected,
(e)the measures taken, for speed greater than 250 km/h, to mitigate the risk of ballast pick up. ’;
(32)point (1) in section 4.7 is replaced by the following:
‘(1) the health and safety conditions of staff required for the operation and maintenance of the infrastructure subsystem shall be compliant with the relevant European and national legislation. ’;
(33)point (b) of point (2) in section 5.3.2 is replaced by the following:
‘(b) the rail fastening shall resist application of 3 000 000 cycles of the typical load applied in a sharp curve, such that the change in performance of the fastening system shall not exceed:
·20 % in terms of clamping force,
·25 % in terms of vertical stiffness,
·a reduction of more than 20% in terms of longitudinal restraint.
The typical load shall be appropriate to:
–the maximum axle load the rail fastening system is designed to accommodate,
–the combination of rail, rail inclination, rail pad and type of sleepers with which the fastening system may be used. ’;
(34)section 6.1.4.1 is replaced by the following:
‘6.1.4.1. Interoperability constituents subject to other European Union Directives
(1) in accordance with Article 10(3) of Directive (EU) 2016/797, for interoperability constituents that are the subject of other legal acts of the Union covering other matters, the EC declaration of conformity or suitability for use shall state that the interoperability constituents also meet the requirements of those other legal acts;
(2) in accordance with Annex I to Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) No XXXX/2018, the EC declaration of conformity or suitability for use shall include a list of restrictions or conditions of use’;
(35)in point (1) of section 6.2.1, the reference to ‘Article 18 of Directive 2008/57/EC’ is replaced by the reference to ‘Article 15 of Directive (EU) 2016/797’;
(36)point (6) of section 6.2.1 is replaced by the following:
‘(6) The applicant shall draw up the EC declaration of verification for the infrastructure subsystem in accordance with Article 15 of Directive (EU) 2016/797’;
(37)in section 6.2.4 the following point is added after point 6.2.4.14:
‘6.2.4.15. Assessment of compatibility with braking systems
The assessment of the requirements laid down in point 4.2.6.2.2(2) is not required. ’;
(38)in section 6.2.5 the following point is added after point 6.2.5.2:
‘6.2.5.3 Assessment of aerodynamic effect on ballasted track
(1)The demonstration of conformity of the track with the requirements to mitigate the risk of ballast pick-up as laid down in point 4.2.10.3(1) may be done, alternatively to point 4.2.10.3(3), by referring to an existing track design, including switches and crossings, on which rolling stock compliant with point 7.1.1.8 of the LOC&PAS TSI has been in normal operation with the same or higher speed;
(2)Points 6.2.5.1(2), (3), (4), (5) and (6) shall apply. For switches and crossings, technical characteristics as set out in Appendix C.2 and conditions of use as set out in Appendix D.2 shall apply;
(3)When reference is made to Appendix D.1 and Appendix D.2, the only conditions of use to be assessed are the maximum line speed on plain track and the maximum line speed on through route on switches.
(4)The assessment of the requirements of point 6.2.5.3(1) shall be based on a written declaration of the infrastructure manager. ’;
(39)point (3) of section 6.4 is replaced by the following:
‘(3) The notified body shall include a reference to the maintenance file required by point 4.5.1 of this TSI in the technical file referred to in Article 15(4) of Directive (EU) 2016/797.’;
(40)in point (2) of section 6.5.2, the reference to ‘Article 17 of Directive 2008/57/EC’ is replaced by the reference to ‘Article 14 of Directive (EU) 2016/797’;
(41)the first paragraph in section 7 above section 7.1 is replaced by the following:
‘Member States shall develop a national plan for the implementation of this TSI, considering the coherence of the entire rail system of the European Union. This plan shall include all projects regarding new, renewal and upgrading of infrastructure subsystem, in line with the details mentioned in points 7.1 to 7.7 here below.’;
(42)section 7.3.1 is replaced by the following:
‘7.3.1.
Upgrading or renewal of a line
(1)In accordance with Article 2(14) of Directive (EU) 2016/797, "upgrading" means any major modification work on a subsystem or part of it which results in a change in the technical file accompanying the ‘EC’ declaration of verification, if that technical file exists, and which improves the overall performance of the subsystem.
(2)The infrastructure subsystem of a line is considered to be upgraded in the context of this TSI when at least the performance parameters axle load or gauge, as defined in point 4.2.1 are improved in order to meet the requirements of another traffic code.
(3)In accordance with Article 2(15) of Directive (EU) 2016/797, "renewal" means any major substitution work on a subsystem or part of it which does not change the overall performance of the subsystem.
(4)For this purpose, major substitution should be interpreted as a project undertaken to systematically replace elements of a line or a section of a line. Renewal differs from a substitution in the framework of maintenance, referred to in point 7.3.3 below, since it gives the opportunity to achieve a TSI compliant line. A renewal is the same case as upgrading, but without a change in performance parameters.
(5)The scope of the upgrading or renewal of the infrastructure subsystem may cover the entire subsystem on a given line or only certain parts of the subsystem. According to Article 18(6) of Directive (EU) 2016/797, the national safety authority shall examine the project and decide whether a new authorisation for placing in service is needed.
(6)Where a new authorisation is required, parts of the infrastructure subsystem falling under the scope of the upgrading or renewal shall comply with this TSI and shall be subject to the procedure established in Article 15 of Directive (EU) 2016/797, unless a permission for non-application of TSI is granted according to Article 7 of Directive (EU) 2016/797.
(7)Where a new authorisation for placing in service is not required, compliance with this TSI is recommended. Where compliance is not possible, the contracting entity shall inform the Member State of the reasons thereof. ’;
(43)section 7.3.2 is deleted;
(44)point (4) in section 7.3.3 is replaced by the following:
‘(4) In such cases, it is noted that each of the above elements taken separately cannot ensure compliance of the whole subsystem. The conformity of a subsystem can only be stated when all the elements are compliant with the TSI. ’;
(45)section 7.7.13.5.is replaced by the following:
‘7.7.13.5. Platform height (4.2.9.2)
P cases
For the nominal track gauge of 1 668 mm, for upgraded or renewed platforms the nominal platform height of 685 mm (general use) or 900 mm (urban and suburban traffic) above the running surface for radii of more than 300 m or 350 m respectively shall be allowed. ’;
(46)section 7.6 is replaced by the following:
‘7.6.
Route compatibility checks before the use of authorised vehicles
The procedure to be applied and the parameters of the infrastructure subsystem to be used by the railway undertaking, for the purpose of route compatibility check are described in point 4.2.2.5 and appendix D1 of the Annex to Regulation XXX/2018 (OPE TSI). ’;
(47)in section 7.7.2.1 the second paragraph is replaced by the following:
‘For platform heights of 550 mm and 760 mm, the conventional value bq0 of platform offset shall be calculated according to the following formulas: ’;
(48)in section 7.7.8.1 the title ‘Platform height (4.2.9.3)’ is replaced by ‘Platform height (4.2.9.2)’;
(49)point (2) of section 7.7.11.1 is deleted;
(50)Table 36 in Appendix A is replaced by the following:
‘
|
Table 36 Assessment of interoperability constituents for the EC declaration of conformity
|
|
Characteristics to be assessed
|
Assessment in the following phase
|
|
|
Design and development phase
|
Production phase
Manufacturing process + product test
|
|
|
Design review
|
Review of manufacturing process
|
Type test
|
Product quality
(series)
|
|
5.3.1 The rail
|
|
|
|
|
|
5.3.1.1 Railhead profile
|
X
|
n.a.
|
X
|
X
|
|
5.3.1.2 Rail steel
|
X
|
X
|
X
|
X
|
|
5.3.2 The rail fastening systems
|
n.a.
|
n.a.
|
X
|
X
|
|
5.3.3 Track sleepers
|
X
|
X
|
n.a.
|
X
|
(51)in Table 37 in Appendix B, the row concerning ‘Longitudinal track resistance’ is replaced by the following:
|
Characteristics to be assessed
|
Design review
|
Assembly before putting into service
|
Particular assessment procedures
|
|
Longitudinal track resistance (4.2.6.2)
|
X
|
n.a
|
6.2.5
6.2.4.15
|
(52)in Table 37 in Appendix B, the following line is added:
|
Characteristics to be assessed
|
Design review
|
Assembly before putting into service
|
Particular assessment procedures
|
|
Aerodynamic effect on ballasted track (4.2.10.3)
|
X
|
n.a
|
6.2.5.3
|
(53)point (c) in Appendix C2 is replaced by the following:
‘(c) Bearer ’;
(54)Appendix E is amended as follows:
(a)the second paragraph is replaced by the following:
‘EN line category is a function of axle load and geometrical aspects relating to the spacing of axles. EN line categories are set out in Annex A of EN 15528:2015. ’;
(b)Table 38 is replaced by the following:
Table 38: EN Line Category –Associated Speed (1)(6) [km/h] – Passenger traffic
|
Traffic code
|
Passenger Carriages (including Coaches, Vans and Car
Carriers) and Light Freight Wagons (2) (3)
|
Locomotives and
Power Heads (2) (4)
|
Electric or Diesel Multiple Units, Power Units and Railcars (2) (3)
|
|
P1
|
n.a. (11)
|
n.a. (11)
|
Open Point
|
|
P2
|
n.a. (11)
|
n.a. (11)
|
Open Point
|
|
P3a (> 160 km/h)
|
A – 200
B1 - 160
|
D2 – 200 (10)
|
Open point
|
|
P3b (≤ 160 km/h)
|
B1 – 160
|
D2 – 160
|
C2 (8) – 160
D2 (9) - 120
|
|
P4a (> 160 km/h)
|
A – 200
B1 - 160
|
D2 – 200 (10)
|
Open point
|
|
P4b (≤ 160 km/h)
|
A – 160
B1 - 140
|
D2 - 160
|
B1(7) – 160
C2 (8) – 140
D2 (9) - 120
|
|
P5
|
B1 - 120
|
C2 - 120 (5)
|
B1(7) - 120
|
|
P6
|
a12
|
|
P1520
|
Open point
|
|
P1600
|
Open point
|
(c)note (1) is replaced by the following:
‘(1) The indicated speed value in the table represents the maximum requirement for the line and may be lower in accordance with the requirements in point 4.2.1(12). When checking individual structures on the line, it is acceptable to take account of the type of vehicle and local allowed speed. ’;
(d)note (2) is replaced by the following:
‘(2) Passenger Carriages (including Coaches, Vans, Car Carriers), Other Vehicles, Locomotives, Power Heads, Diesel and Electric Multiple Units, Power Units and Railcars are defined in the LOC & PAS TSI. Light Freight Wagons are defined as vans except that they are allowed to be conveyed in formations which are not intended to convey passengers.’;
(e)note (10) is deleted;
(f)the following note (11) is added:
‘(11) Taking into account the state of art of operation there is no need to define harmonized requirements to deliver an adequate level of interoperability for this type of vehicles for P1 and P2 traffic codes. ’;
(55)Appendix F is amended as follows:
(a)Table 40 is replaced by the following:
Table 40: Route Availability number –Associated Speed (1) (5) [miles per hour] – Passenger traffic
|
Traffic code
|
Passenger Carriages (including Coaches, Vans and Car
Carriers) and Light Freight Wagons
(2) (3) (6)
|
Locomotives and
Power Heads (2) (4)
|
Electric or Diesel Multiple Units, Power Units and Railcars
(2) (3) (6)
|
|
P1
|
n.a. (11)
|
n.a. (11)
|
Open Point
|
|
P2
|
n.a. (11)
|
n.a. (11)
|
Open Point
|
|
P3a (> 160 km/h)
|
RA1 – 125
RA2 – 90
|
RA7 – 125 (7)
RA8 – 110 (7)
RA8 – 100 (8)
RA5 – 125 (9)
|
Open point
|
|
P3b (≤ 160 km/h)
|
RA1 – 100
RA2 – 90
|
RA8 – 100 (8)
RA5 – 100 (9)
|
RA3 – 100
|
|
P4a (> 160 km/h)
|
RA1 – 125
RA2 – 90
|
RA7 – 125 (7)
RA7 – 100 (8)
RA4 – 125 (9)
|
Open point
|
|
P4b (≤ 160 km/h)
|
RA1 – 100
RA2 – 90
|
RA7 – 100 (8)
RA4 – 100 (9)
|
RA3 – 100
|
|
P5
|
RA1 – 75
|
RA5 – 75 (8) (10)
RA4 – 75 (9) (10)
|
RA3 – 75
|
|
P6
|
RA1
|
|
P1600
|
Open point
|
(b)note (1) is replaced by the following:
‘(1) The indicated speed value in the table represents the maximum requirement for the line and may be lower in accordance with the requirements in point 4.2.1(12). When checking individual structures on the line, it is acceptable to take account of the type of vehicle and local allowed speed. ’;
(c)note (2) is replaced by the following;
‘(2) Passenger Carriages (including Coaches, Vans, Car Carriers), Other Vehicles, Locomotives, Power Heads, Diesel and Electric Multiple Units, Power Units and Railcars are defined in the LOC & PAS TSI. Light Freight Wagons are defined as vans except that they are allowed to be conveyed in formations which are not intended to convey passengers. ’;
(d)Note (11) shall be added by the following:
‘(11) Taking into account the state of art of operation there is no need to define harmonized requirements to deliver an adequate level of interoperability for this type of vehicles for P1 and P2 traffic codes. ’;
(56)the fourth paragraph in Appendix K, immediately above Table 45, is deleted;
(57)Appendix L is deleted;
(58)the second paragraph of point P3 in Appendix P is modified by the following (normal font):
‘The vertical curve radius Rv is limited to 500m. Heights not exceeding 80 mm shall be considered as zero within a radius Rv between 500 m and 625 m. ’;
(59)Table 47 in Appendix Q is replaced by the following:
‘Table 47: Notified national technical rules for UK-GB Specific Cases
|
Specific Case
|
TSI Point
|
Requirement
|
NTR Ref
|
NTR Title
|
|
7.7.17.1
|
4.2.1: Table 2 & Table 3
|
Categories of line: Gauge
|
GI/RT7073
|
Requirements for the Position of Infrastructure and for Defining and Maintaining Clearances
|
|
|
|
|
GE/RT8073
|
Requirements for the Application of Standard Vehicle Gauges
|
|
|
|
|
GI/RT7020
|
GB Requirements for Platform Height, Platform Offset and Platform Width
|
|
7.7.17.2 &
7.7.17.9
|
4.2.3.1 & 6.2.4.1
|
Structure gauge
|
GI/RT7073
|
Requirements for the Position of Infrastructure and for Defining and Maintaining Clearances
|
|
|
|
|
GE/RT8073
|
Requirements for the Application of Standard Vehicle Gauges
|
|
|
|
|
GI/RT7020
|
GB Requirements for Platform Height, Platform Offset and Platform Width
|
|
7.7.17.3 &
7.7.17.10
|
4.2.3.2: Table 4
& 6.2.4.2
|
Distance between track centres
|
GI/RT7073
|
Requirements for the Position of Infrastructure and for Defining and Maintaining Clearances
|
|
7.7.17.4
|
4.2.5.3 & Appendix J
|
Maximum unguided length of fixed obtuse crossings
|
GC/RT5021
|
Track System Requirements
|
|
|
|
|
GM/RT2466
|
Railway Wheelsets
|
|
7.7. 17.6
|
4.2.9.2
|
Platform height
|
GI/RT7020
|
GB Requirements for Platform Height, Platform Offset and Platform Width
|
|
7.7. 17.7 &
7.7. 17.11
|
4.2.9.3 & 6.2.4.11
|
Platform offset
|
GI/RT7020
|
GB Requirements for Platform Height, Platform Offset and Platform Width
|
|
|
|
|
GI/RT7073
|
Requirements for the Position of Infrastructure and for Defining and Maintaining Clearances
|
’;
(60)Appendix R is replaced by the following:
‘List of open points
(1)Immediate action limits for isolated defects in alignment for speeds of more than 300 km/h (4.2.8.1).
(2)Immediate action limits for isolated defects in longitudinal level for speeds of more than 300 km/h (4.2.8.2).
(3)The minimum allowed value of distance between track centres for the uniform structure gauge IRL3 is an open point (7.7.18.2).
(4)EN Line Category –Associated Speed [km/h] for Traffic codes P1 (multiple units), P2 (multiple units), P3a (multiple units), P4a (multiple units), P1520 (all vehicles), P1600 (all vehicles), F1520 (all vehicles) and F1600 (all vehicles) in Appendix E, Tables 38 and 39.
(5)Route Availability Number –Associated Speed [miles/h] for Traffic codes P1 (multiple units), P2 (multiple units), P3a (multiple units), P4a (multiple units), P1600 (all vehicles) and F1600 (all vehicles) in Appendix F, Tables 40 and 41.
(6)Rules and drawings related to gauges IRL1, IRL2 and IRL3 are an open point (Appendix O).
(7)The requirements for mitigating the risk for ballast pick up for speed greater than 300 km/h. ’;
(61)Table 48 in Appendix S is replaced by the following:
‘
Table 48: Terms
|
Defined term
|
TSI point
|
Definition
|
|
Actual point (RP) /
Praktischer Herzpunkt /
Pointe de coeur
|
4.2.8.6
|
Physical end of a crossing vee. See Figure 2, which shows the relationship between the actual point (RP) and the intersection point (IP).
|
|
Alert limit /
Auslösewert /
Limite d’alerte
|
4.5.2
|
Refers to the value which, if exceeded, requires that the track geometry condition is analysed and considered in the regularly planned maintenance operations.
|
|
Axle load/
Achsfahrmasse/
Charge à l’essieu
|
4.2.1, 4.2.6.1
|
Sum of the static vertical wheel forces exerted on the track through a wheelset or a pair of independent wheels divided by acceleration of gravity.
|
|
Braking systems independent of wheel-rail adhesion conditions”
|
4.2.6.2.2
|
“Braking systems independent of wheel – rail adhesion conditions” refers to all brake systems of the rolling stock capable to develop a brake force applied to the rails independently of the wheel – rail adhesion conditions (e.g. magnetic braking systems and eddy current braking systems)
|
|
Cant /
Überhöhung /
Dévers de la voie
|
4.2.4.2
4.2.8.5
|
Difference in height, relative to the horizontal, of the two rails of one track at a particular location, measured at the
centrelines of the heads of the rails.
|
|
Cant deficiency / Überhöhungsfehlbetrag / Insuffisance de devers
|
4.2.4.3
|
Difference between the applied cant and a higher equilibrium cant.
|
|
Common crossing /
Starres Herzstück /
Coeur de croisement
|
4.2.8.6
|
Arrangement ensuring intersection of two opposite running edges of turnouts or diamond crossings and having one crossing vee and two wing rails.
|
|
Crosswind /
Seitenwind /
Vents traversiers
|
4.2.10.2
|
Strong wind blowing laterally to a line which may adversely affect the safety of trains running.
|
|
Design value /
Planungswert /
Valeur de conception
|
4.2.3.4, 4.2.4.2, 4.2.4.5, 4.2.5.1, 4.2.5.3
|
Theoretical value without manufacturing, construction or maintenance tolerances.
|
|
Design track gauge /
Konstruktionsspurweite /
Ecartement de conception de la voie
|
5.3.3
|
A single value which is obtained when all the components of the track conform precisely to their design dimensions or their median design dimension when there is a range.
|
|
Distance between track centres /
Gleisabstand /
Entraxe de voies
|
4.2.3.2
|
The distance between points of the centre lines of the two tracks under consideration, measured parallel to the running surface of the reference track namely the less canted track.
|
|
Dynamic lateral force / Dynamische Querkraft /
Effort dynamique transversal
|
4.2.6.3
|
The sum of dynamic forces exerted by a wheelset on the track in lateral direction.
|
|
Earthworks/
Erdbauwerke/
Ouvrages en terre
|
4.2.7.2, 4.2.7.4
|
Soil structures and soil-retaining structures that are subject to railway traffic loading.
|
|
EN Line Category /
EN Streckenklasse /
EN Catégorie de ligne
|
4.2.7.4, Appendix E
|
The result of the classification process set out in EN 15528:2015 Annex A and referred to in that standard as ‘Line Category’. It represents the ability of the infrastructure to withstand the vertical loads imposed by vehicles on the line or section of line for regular (“normal”) service.
|
|
Equivalent conicity /
Äquivalente Konizität /
Conicité équivalente
|
4.2.4.5, 4.2.11.2
|
The tangent of the cone angle of a wheelset with coned wheels whose lateral movement has the same kinematic wavelength as the given wheelset on straight track and large-radius curves. !!
|
|
Fixed nose protection /
Leitweite /
Cote de protection de pointe
|
4.2.5.3, Appendix J
|
Dimension between the crossing nose and check rail (see dimension No. 2 on Figure 10 below).
|
|
Flangeway depth /
Rillentiefe /
Profondeur d’ornière
|
4.2.8.6.
|
Dimension between the running surface and the bottom of flangeway (see dimension No. 6 on Figure 10 below).
|
|
Flangeway width /
Rillenweite /
Largeur d’ornière
|
4.2.8.6.
|
Dimension between a running rail and an adjacent check or wing rail (see dimension No. 5 on Figure 10 below).
|
|
Free wheel passage at check rail/wing rail entry/
Freier Raddurchlauf im Radlenker-Einlauf /Flügelschienen-Einlauf/ Côte d’équilibrage du contre-rail
|
4.2.8.6.
|
Dimension between the working face of the crossing check rail or wing rail and the gauge face of the running rail opposite across the gauge measured at entry to check rail or wing rail respectively.
(see dimensions No.4 on Figure 10 below). The entry to the check rail or wing rail is the point at which the wheel is allowed to contact the check rail or wing rail.
|
|
Free wheel passage at crossing nose/
Freier Raddurchlauf im Bereich der Herzspitze/
Cote de libre passage dans le croisement
|
4.2.8.6.
|
Dimension between the working face of the crossing wing rail and check rail opposite across the gauge (see dimension No.3 on Figure 10 below).
|
|
Free wheel passage in switches/ Freier Raddurchlauf im Bereich der Zungen-vorrichtung / Côte de libre passage de l’aiguillage
|
4.2.8.6.
|
Dimension from the gauge face of one switch rail to the back edge of the opposite switch rail (see dimension No.1 on Figure 10 below).
|
|
Gauge /
Begrenzungslinie /
Gabarit
|
4.2.1,
4.2.3.1
|
Set of rules including a reference contour and its associated calculation rules allowing definition of the outer dimensions of the vehicle and the space to be cleared by the infrastructure.
|
|
HBW/HBW/HBW
|
5.3.1.2
|
The non SI unit for steel hardness defined in EN ISO 6506-1:2005 Metallic materials – Brinell hardness test. Test method.
|
|
Height of check rail /
Radlenkerüberhöhung /
Surélévation du contre rail
|
4.2.8.6,
Appendix J
|
Height of the check rail above the running surface (see dimension 7 on Figure 14 below).
|
|
Immediate Action Limit / Soforteingriffsschwelle /
Limite d’intervention immédiate
|
4.2.8, 4.5
|
The value which, if exceeded, requires taking measures to reduce the risk of derailment to an acceptable level.
|
|
Infrastructure Manager/
Betreiber der Infrastruktur/
Gestionnaire de l‘Infrastructure
|
4.2.5.1, 4.2.8.3, 4.2.8.6, 4.2.11.2 4.4, 4.5.2, 4.6, 4.7, 6.2.2.1, 6.2.4, 6.4
|
As defined in Article 2h) of Directive 2001/14/EC of 26 February 2001 on the allocation of railway infrastructure capacity and the levying of charges for the use of railway infrastructure and safety certification (OJ L 75, 15.3.2001, p.29)
|
|
In service value /
Wert im Betriebszustand /
Valeur en exploitation
|
4.2.8.5, 4.2.11.2
|
Value measured at any time after the infrastructure has been placed into service.
|
|
Intersection point (IP) /
Theoretischer Herzpunkt /
Point d’intersection théorique
|
4.2.8.6
|
Theoretical intersection point of the running edges at the centre of the crossing (see figure 2).
|
|
Intervention Limit / Eingriffsschwelle /
Valeur d’intervention
|
4.5.2
|
The value, which, if exceeded, requires corrective maintenance in order that the immediate action limit shall not be reached before the next inspection;
|
|
Isolated defect /
Einzelfehler /
Défaut isolé
|
4.2.8
|
A discrete track geometry fault.
|
|
Line speed /
Streckengeschwindigkeit /
Vitesse de la ligne
|
4.2.1
|
Maximum speed for which a line has been designed.
|
|
Maintenance file /
Instandhaltungsdossier /
Dossier de maintenance
|
4.5.1
|
Elements of the technical file relating to conditions and limits of use and instructions for maintenance.
|
|
Maintenance plan /
Instandhaltungsplan /
Plan de maintenance
|
4.5.2
|
A series of documents setting out the infrastructure maintenance procedures adopted by an Infrastructure Manager.
|
|
Multi-rail track/
Mehrschienengleis/
Voie à multi écartement
|
4.2.2.2
|
Track with more than two rails, where at least two pairs of respective rails are designed to be operated as separate single tracks, with or without different track gauges.
|
|
Nominal track gauge / Nennspurweite /
Ecartement nominal de la voie
|
4.2.4.1
|
A single value which identifies the track gauge but may differ from the design track gauge.
|
|
Normal service /
Regelbetrieb /
Service régulier
|
4.2.2.2
4.2.9
|
The railway operating to a planned timetable service.
|
|
Passive provision /
Vorsorge für künftige Erweiterungen / Réservation pour extension future
|
4.2.9
|
Provision for the future construction of a physical extension to a structure (for example: increased platform length).
|
|
Performance Parameter/
Leistungskennwert/
Paramètre de performance
|
4.2.1
|
Parameter describing a TSI Category of Line used as the basis for the design of infrastructure subsystem elements and as the indication of the performance level of a line.
|
|
Plain line /
Freie Strecke /
Voie courante
|
4.2.4.5
4.2.4.6
4.2.4.7
|
Section of track without switches and crossings.
|
|
Point retraction /
Spitzenbeihobelung /
Dénivelation de la pointe de cœur
|
4.2.8.6
|
The reference line in a fixed common crossing can deviate from the theoretical reference line. From a certain distance to the crossing point, the reference line of the vee can, depending on the design, be retracted from this theoretical line away from the wheel flange in order to avoid contact between both elements. This situation is described in Figure 2.
|
|
Rail inclination / Schienenneigung /
Inclinaison du rail
|
4.2.4.5
4.2.4.7
|
An angle defining the inclination of the head of a rail when installed in the track relative to the plane of the rails (running surface), equal to the angle between the axis of symmetry of the rail (or of an equivalent symmetrical rail having the same rail head profile) and the perpendicular to the plane of the rails.
|
|
Rail pad /
Schienenzwischenlage /
Semelle sous rail
|
5.3.2
|
A resilient layer fitted between a rail and the supporting sleeper or baseplate.
|
|
Reverse curve /
Gegenbogen /
Courbes et contre-courbes
|
4.2.3.4
|
Two abutting curves of opposite flexure or hand
|
|
Structure gauge /
Lichtraum /
Gabarit des obstacles
|
4.2.3.1
|
Defines the space in relation to the reference track that shall be cleared of all objects or structures and of the traffic on the adjacent tracks, in order to allow safe operation on the reference track. It is defined on the basis of the reference contour by application of the associated rules.
|
|
Swing nose
|
4.2.5.2
|
Within the domain of “common crossing with movable point”, the term “swing nose” identifies the part of the crossing which forms the vee and that it is moved to form a continuous running edge for either the main or the branch line.
|
|
Switch /
Zungenvorrichtung /
Aiguillage
|
4.2.8.6
|
A unit of track comprising two fixed rails (stock rails) and two movable rails (switch rails) used to direct vehicles from one track to another track.
|
|
Switches and crossings /
Weichen und Kreuzungen /
Appareil de voie
|
4.2.4.5, 4.2.4.7,
4.2.5, 4.2.6, 4.2.8.6, 5.2, 6.2.4.4, 6.2.4.8, 6.2.5.2, 7.3.3, Appendix C and D,
|
Track constructed from sets of switches and individual crossings and the rails connecting them.
|
|
Through route /
Stammgleis /
Voie directe
|
Appendix D
|
In the context of switches and crossings a route which perpetuate the general alignment of the track.
|
|
Track design
|
4.2.6, 6.2.5,
Appendix C and D
|
The track design consists of cross-section defining basic dimensions and track components (for example rail, rail fastenings, sleepers, ballast) used together with operating conditions with an impact on forces related to 4.2.6., such as axle load, speed and radius of horizontal curvature.
|
|
Track gauge /
Spurweite /
Ecartement de la voie
|
4.2.4.1, 4.2.4.5, 4.2.8.4, 5.3.3, 6.1.5.2, 6.2.4.3, Appendix H
|
The smallest distance between lines perpendicular to the running surface intersecting each rail head profile in a range from 0 to 14 mm below the running surface.
|
|
Track twist /
Gleisverwindung /
Gauche
|
4.2.7.1.6 4.2.8.3, 6.2.4.9,
|
Track twist is defined as the algebraic difference between two cross levels taken at a defined distance apart, usually expressed as a gradient between the two points at which the cross level is measured.
|
|
Train length/
Zuglänge/
Longueur du train
|
4.2.1
|
The length of a train, which can run on a certain line in normal operation.
|
|
Unguided length of an obtuse crossing /
Führungslose Stelle /
Lacune dans la traversée
|
4.2.5.3, Appendix J
|
Portion of obtuse crossing where there is no guidance of the wheel described as “unguided distance” in EN 13232-3:2003.
|
|
Usable length of a platform / Bahnsteignutzlänge /
Longueur utile de quai
|
4.2.1, 4.2.9.1
|
The maximum continuous length of that part of platform in front of which a train is intended to remain stationary in normal operating conditions for passengers to board and alight from the train, making appropriate allowance for stopping tolerances.
Normal operating conditions means that railway is operating in a non-degraded mode (e.g. rail adhesion is normal, signals are working, everything is working as planned).
|
’;
(62)index number 4 of Table 49 in Appendix T is replaced by the following:
‘
|
4
|
EN 13848-1
|
Track geometry quality – Part 1: Characterisation of track geometry
(with Amendment A1:2008)
|
2003
|
The immediate action limit for track twist (4.2.8.3)
|
’;
(63)index number 9 of Table 49 in Appendix T is replaced by the following:
‘
|
9
|
EN 15528
|
Railway applications – Line categories for managing the interface between load limits of vehicles and infrastructure
|
2015
|
Capability requirements for structures according to traffic code (Appendix E),
|
’.
ANNEX IV
The Annex to Regulation (EU) 1302/2014 is amended as follows:
(1)section 1.1 is amended as follows:
(a)the reference to ‘Article 1 of Directive 2008/57/EC’ is replaced by the reference to ‘Article 1 of Directive (EU) 2016/797’;
(b)the reference to ‘Annex II section 2.7 of Directive 2008/57/EC’ is replaced by the reference to ‘section 2.7 of Annex II to Directive (EU) 2016/797’;
(c)the text ‘Annex I sections 1.2 and 2.2 of Directive 2008/57/EC’ is replaced by the text ‘section 2 of Annex I to Directive (EU) 2016/797’;
(d)the text ‘Article 1(3) of Directive 2008/57/EC’ is replaced by the text ‘Articles 1(3) and (4) of Directive (EU) 2016/797’;
(2)sections 1.2 to 1.3 are replaced by the following:
‘1.2.
Geographical Scope
The geographical scope of this TSI is the Union rail system as set out in Annex I to Directive (EU) 2016/797 and excludes the cases referred to in Articles 1(3) and (4) of Directive (EU) 2016/797. ’;
1.3.
Content of this TSI
In accordance with Article 4(3) of Directive (EU) 2016/797, this TSI:
(a)indicates its intended scope (Chapter 2);
(b)lays down essential requirements for the subsystem rolling stock 'Locomotives and passenger rolling stock' and its interfaces vis-à-vis other subsystems (Chapter 3);
(c)establishes the functional and technical specifications to be met by the subsystem and its interfaces vis-à-vis other subsystems (Chapter 4);
(d)determines the interoperability constituents and interfaces which must be covered by European specifications, including European standards, which are necessary to achieve interoperability within the European Union's rail system (Chapter 5);
(e)states, in each case under consideration, which procedures are to be used in order to assess the conformity or the suitability for use of the interoperability constituents, on the one hand, or the “EC” verification of the subsystems, on the other hand (Chapter 6);
(f)indicates the strategy for implementing this TSI (Chapter 7);
(g)indicates for the staff concerned, the professional qualifications and health and safety conditions at work required for the operation and maintenance of the subsystem, as well as for the implementation of this TSI (Chapter 4);
(h)indicates the provisions applicable to the existing ‘rolling stock’ subsystem, in particular in the event of upgrading and renewal and, in such cases, the modification work which requires an application for a new authorisation;
(i)indicates the parameters of ‘rolling stock’ subsystem to be checked by the railway undertaking and the procedures to be applied to check those parameters after the delivery of the vehicle authorisation for placing on the market and before the first use of the vehicle to ensure compatibility between vehicles and the routes on which they are to be operated.
In accordance with Article 4(5) of the Directive (EU) 2016/797, provisions for specific cases are indicated in Chapter 7. ’;
(3)in section 2.1, the reference to ‘Directive 2008/57/EC’ is replaced by the reference to ‘Directive (EU) 2016/797’;
(4)in section 2.2, the text ‘Directive 2008/57/EC, Article 2(c)’ is replaced by the text ‘point (3) of Article 2 of Directive (EU) 2016/797’;
(5)in section 2.2.2, the text is replaced by the following:
‘2.2.2. Rolling stock:
Definitions below are classified in three groups as defined in the section 2 of Annex I to Directive (EU) 2016/797.
(A)Locomotives and passenger rolling stock, including thermal or electric traction units, self-propelling thermal or electric passenger trains, and passenger coaches;:
(1)Thermal or electric traction units
A Locomotive is a traction vehicle (or combination of several vehicles) that is not intended to carry a payload and has the ability to be uncoupled in normal operation from a train and to operate independently.
A Shunter is a traction unit designed for use only on shunting yards, stations and depots.
Traction in a train can also be provided by a powered vehicle with or without driving cab, which is not intended to be uncoupled during normal operation. Such a vehicle is called a Power Unit (or power car) in general or a Power Head when located at one end of the trainset and fitted with a driving cab.
(2)Self-propelling thermal or electric passenger trains
A Trainset is a fixed formation that can operate as a train; it is by definition not intended to be reconfigured, except within a workshop environment. It is composed of only motored or of motored and non-motored vehicles.
An Electric and/or Diesel Multiple Unit is a trainset in which all vehicles are capable of carrying a payload (passengers or luggage / mail or freight).
A Railcar is a vehicle that can operate autonomously and is capable of carrying a payload (passengers or luggage/mail or freight).
A tram – train is a vehicle designed for combined use on both a light-rail infrastructure and a heavy-rail infrastructure;
(3)Passenger coaches and other related cars
A Coach is a vehicle without traction in a fixed or variable formation capable of carrying passengers (by extension, requirements specified to apply to coaches in this TSI are deemed to apply also to restaurant cars, sleeping cars, couchettes cars, etc.).
A Van is a vehicle without traction capable of carrying payload other than passengers, e.g. luggage or mail, intended to be integrated into a fixed or variable formation which is intended to transport passengers.
A Driving Trailer is a vehicle without traction equipped with a driving cab.
A coach may be equipped with a driver's cab; such a coach is then named a Driving Coach.
A van may be fitted with a driver's cab and as such is known as a Driving Van.
A Car carrier is a vehicle without traction capable of carrying passenger motor cars without their passengers and which is intended to be integrated in a passenger train.
A Fixed Rake of Coaches is a formation of several coaches “semi-permanently” coupled together, or which can be reconfigured only when it is out of service.
(B)Freight wagons, including low-deck vehicles designed for the entire network and vehicles designed to carry lorries
These vehicles are out of the scope of this TSI. . They are covered by Regulation (EU) No 321/2013 (the “freight wagons” TSI).
(C)Special vehicles, such as on-track machines.
On track Machines (OTMs) are vehicles specially designed for construction and maintenance of the track and infrastructure. OTMs are used in different modes: working mode, transport mode as self-propelling vehicle, transport mode as a hauled vehicle.
Infrastructure inspection vehicles are utilised to monitor the condition of the infrastructure. They are operated in the same way as freight or passenger trains, with no distinction between transport and working modes.’;
(6)sections 2.3.1 is replaced by the following:
‘2.3.1 Types of rolling stock
The scope of this TSI concerning rolling stock, classified in three groups as defined in the Annex I section 1.2 of (EU) 2016/797, is detailed as follows:
(A)Locomotives and passenger rolling stock, including thermal or electric traction units, self-propelling thermal or electric passenger trains, and passenger coaches
(1)Thermal or electric traction units
This type includes traction vehicles that are not capable of carrying a payload, such as thermal or electric locomotives or power units.
The concerned traction vehicles are intended for freight or/and passenger transport.
Exclusion from the scope:
Shunters (as defined in Section 2.2) are not in the scope of this TSI. When they are intended to operate on the Union railway network (movement between shunting yards, stations and depots), article 1.4(b) of Directive (EU) 2016/797 applies.
(2)Self-propelling thermal or electric passenger trains
This type includes any train in fixed or pre-defined formation, composed of vehicles passenger carrying and/or vehicles not carrying passengers.
Thermal or electric traction equipment is installed in some vehicles of the train, and the train is fitted with a driver’s cab.
Exclusion from the scope:
In accordance with Articles 1.3, 1.4(d) and 1.5 of Directive (EU) 2016/797, the following rolling stock is excluded from the scope of the TSI:
–Rolling stock intended to operate on local, urban or suburban networks functionally separate from the rest of the railway system.
–Rolling stock primarily used on light rail infrastructure but equipped with some heavy rail components necessary to enable transit to be effected on a confined and limited section of heavy rail infrastructure for connectivity purposes only.
–Tram – trains.
(3)Passenger coaches and other related cars
Passenger carriages
This type includes vehicles without traction carrying passengers (coaches, as defined in Section 2.2), and operated in a variable formation with vehicles from the category “thermal or electric traction units” defined above to provide the traction function.
Non-passenger carrying vehicles included in a passenger train:
This type includes vehicles without traction included in passenger trains (e.g. luggage or postal vans, car carriers, vehicles for service...); they are in the scope of this TSI, as vehicles related to transport of passengers.
(B)Freight wagons, including low-deck vehicles designed for the entire network and vehicles designed to carry lorries
Freight wagons are not in the scope of this TSI; they are covered by the “freight wagons” TSI even when they are included in a passenger train (the train composition is in this case an operational issue).
Vehicles intended to carry road motor vehicles (with persons on-board these road motor vehicles) are not in the scope of this TSI.
(C) Special vehicles, such as on-track machines
This type of rolling stock is in the scope of the TSI only when:
(1)It is running on its own rail wheels and
(2)It is designed and intended to be detected by a track based train detection system for traffic management and
(3)In case of OTMs, it is in transport (running) configuration, self-propelled or hauled.
Exclusion from the scope of this TSI:
In case of OTMs, working configuration is outside the scope of this TSI. ’;
(7)in chapter 3, the references to ‘Annex III to Directive 2008/57/EC’ are replaced by the reference to ‘Annex III to Directive (EU) 2016/797’;
(8)section 3.1 is replaced as follows :
‘3.1 Elements of the rolling stock subsystem corresponding to the essential requirements
The following table indicates the essential requirements, as set out and numbered in Annex III of Directive (EU) 2016/797, taken into account by the specifications set out in Chapter 4 of this TSI.
Rolling stock elements corresponding to essential requirements
Note: only points in section 4.2 which contain requirements are listed.
|
Ref. Point
|
Element of the rolling stock sub-system
|
Safety
|
Reliability-Availability
|
Health
|
Environmental protection
|
Technical compatibility
|
|
4.2.2.2.2
|
Inner coupling
|
1.1.3
2.4.1
|
|
|
|
|
|
4.2.2.2.3
|
End coupling
|
1.1.3
2.4.1
|
|
|
|
|
|
4.2.2.2.4
|
Rescue coupling
|
|
2.4.2
|
|
|
2.5.3
|
|
4.2.2.2.5
|
Staff access for coupling and uncoupling
|
1.1.5
|
|
2.5.1
|
|
2.5.3
|
|
4.2.2.3
|
Gangways
|
1.1.5
|
|
|
|
|
|
4.2.2.4
|
Strength of vehicle structure
|
1.1.3
2.4.1
|
|
|
|
|
|
4.2.2.5
|
Passive safety
|
2.4.1
|
|
|
|
|
|
4.2.2.6
|
Lifting and jacking
|
|
|
|
|
2.5.3
|
|
4.2.2.7
|
Fixing of devices to carbody structure
|
1.1.3
|
|
|
|
|
|
4.2.2.8
|
Staff and freight access doors
|
1.1.5
2.4.1
|
|
|
|
|
|
4.2.2.9
|
Mechanical characteristics of glass
|
2.4.1
|
|
|
|
|
|
4.2.2.10
|
Load conditions and weighted mass
|
1.1.3
|
|
|
|
|
|
4.2.3.1
|
Gauging
|
|
|
|
|
2.4.3
|
|
4.2.3.2.1
|
Axle load parameter
|
|
|
|
|
2.4.3
|
|
4.2.3.2.2
|
Wheel load
|
1.1.3
|
|
|
|
|
|
4.2.3.3.1
|
Rolling stock characteristics for compatibility with train detection systems
|
1.1.1
|
|
|
|
2.4.32.3.2
|
|
4.2.3.3.2
|
Axle bearing condition monitoring
|
1.1.1
|
1.2
|
|
|
|
|
4.2.3.4.1
|
Safety against derailment running on twisted track
|
1.1.1
1.1.2
|
|
|
|
2.4.3
|
|
4.2.3.4.2
|
Running dynamic behaviour
|
1.1.1
1.1.2
|
|
|
|
2.4.3
|
|
4.2.3.4.2.1
|
Limit values for running safety
|
1.1.1
1.1.2
|
|
|
|
2.4.3
|
|
4.2.3.4.2.2
|
Track loading limit values
|
|
|
|
|
2.4.3
|
|
4.2.3.4.3
|
Equivalent conicity
|
1.1.1
1.1.2
|
|
|
|
2.4.3
|
|
4.2.3.4.3.1
|
Design values for new wheel profiles
|
1.1.1
1.1.2
|
|
|
|
2.4.3
|
|
4.2.3.4.3.2
|
In-service values of wheelset equivalent conicity
|
1.1.2
|
1.2
|
|
|
2.4.3
|
|
4.2.3.5.1
|
Structural design of bogie frame
|
1.1.1
1.1.2
|
|
|
|
|
|
4.2.3.5.2.1
|
Mechanical and geometrical characteristics of wheelsets
|
1.1.1
1.1.2
|
|
|
|
2.4.3
|
|
4.2.3.5.2.2
|
Mechanical and geometrical characteristics of wheels
|
1.1.1
1.1.2
|
|
|
|
|
|
4.2.3.5.3
|
Automatic variable gauge systems
|
1.1.11.1.2, 1.1.3
|
1.2
|
|
|
1.5
|
|
4.2.3.6
|
Minimum curve radius
|
1.1.1
1.1.2
|
|
|
|
2.4.3
|
|
4.2.3.7
|
Life guards
|
1.1.1
|
|
|
|
|
|
4.2.4.2.1
|
Braking - Functional requirements
|
1.1.1
2.4.1
|
2.4.2
|
|
|
1.5
|
|
4.2.4.2.2
|
Braking - Safety requirements
|
1.1.1
|
1.2
2.4.2
|
|
|
|
|
4.2.4.3
|
Type of brake system
|
|
|
|
|
2.4.3
|
|
4.2.4.4.1
|
Emergency braking command
|
2.4.1
|
|
|
|
2.4.3
|
|
4.2.4.4.2
|
Service braking command
|
|
|
|
|
2.4.3
|
|
4.2.4.4.3
|
Direct braking command
|
|
|
|
|
2.4.3
|
|
4.2.4.4.4
|
Dynamic braking command
|
1.1.3
|
|
|
|
|
|
4.2.4.4.5
|
Parking braking command
|
|
|
|
|
2.4.3
|
|
4.2.4.5.1
|
Braking performance -General requirements
|
1.1.1
2.4.1
|
2.4.2
|
|
|
1.5
|
|
4.2.4.5.2
|
Emergency braking
|
1.1.22.4.1
|
|
|
|
2.4.3
|
|
4.2.4.5.3
|
Service braking
|
|
|
|
|
2.4.3
|
|
4.2.4.5.4
|
Calculations related to thermal capacity
|
2.4.1
|
|
|
|
2.4.3
|
|
4.2.4.5.5
|
Parking brake
|
2.4.1
|
|
|
|
2.4.3
|
|
4.2.4.6.1
|
Limit of wheel rail adhesion profile
|
2.4.1
|
1.2
2.4.2
|
|
|
|
|
4.2.4.6.2
|
Wheel slide protection system
|
2.4.1
|
1.2
2.4.2
|
|
|
|
|
4.2.4.7
|
Dynamic brake - Braking systems linked to traction system
|
2.4.1
|
1.2
2.4.2
|
|
|
|
|
4.2.4.8.1.
|
Braking system independent of adhesion conditions – General
|
2.4.1
|
1.2
2.4.2
|
|
|
|
|
4.2.4.8.2.
|
Magnetic track brake
|
|
|
|
|
2.4.3
|
|
4.2.4.8.3
|
Eddy current track brake
|
|
|
|
|
2.4.3
|
|
4.2.4.9
|
Brake state and fault indication
|
1.1.1
|
1.2
2.4.2
|
|
|
|
|
4.2.4.10
|
Brake requirements for rescue purposes
|
|
2.4.2
|
|
|
|
|
4.2.5.1
|
Sanitary systems
|
|
|
|
1.4.1
|
|
|
4.2.5.2
|
Audible communication system
|
2.4.1
|
|
|
|
|
|
4.2.5.3
|
Passenger alarm
|
2.4.1
|
|
|
|
|
|
4.2.5.4
|
Communication devices for passengers
|
2.4.1
|
|
|
|
|
|
4.2.5.5
|
Exterior doors: access to and egress from Rolling stock
|
2.4.1
|
|
|
|
|
|
4.2.5.6
|
Exterior doors: system construction
|
1.1.3
2.4.1
|
|
|
|
|
|
4.2.5.7
|
inter-unit doors
|
1.1.5
|
|
|
|
|
|
4.2.5.8
|
Internal air quality
|
|
|
1.3.2
|
|
|
|
4.2.5.9
|
body side windows
|
1.1.5
|
|
|
|
|
|
4.2.6.1
|
Environmental conditions
|
|
2.4.2
|
|
|
|
|
4.2.6.2.1
|
Slipstream effects on passengers on platform and on workers at track side
|
1.1.1
|
|
1.3.1
|
|
|
|
4.2.6.2.2
|
Head pressure pulse
|
|
|
|
|
2.4.3
|
|
4.2.6.2.3
|
Maximum pressure variations in tunnels
|
|
|
|
|
2.4.3
|
|
4.2.6.2.4
|
Cross wind
|
1.1.1
|
|
|
|
|
|
4.2.6.2.5
|
Aerodynamic effect on ballasted track
|
1.1.1
|
|
|
|
2.4.3
|
|
4.2.7.1.1
|
Head lights
|
|
|
|
|
2.4.3
|
|
4.2.7.1.2
|
Marker lights
|
1.1.1
|
|
|
|
2.4.3
|
|
4.2.7.1.3
|
Tail lights
|
1.1.1
|
|
|
|
2.4.3
|
|
4.2.7.1.4
|
Lamp controls
|
|
|
|
|
2.4.3
|
|
4.2.7.2.1
|
Horn – General
|
1.1.1
|
|
|
|
2.4.32.6.3
|
|
4.2.7.2.2
|
Warning horn sound pressure levels
|
1.1.1
|
|
1.3.1
|
|
|
|
4.2.7.2.3
|
Protection
|
|
|
|
|
2.4.3
|
|
4.2.7.2.4
|
Horn control
|
1.1.1
|
|
|
|
2.4.3
|
|
4.2.8.1
|
Traction performance
|
|
|
|
|
2.4.32.6.3
|
|
4.2.8.24.2.8.2.1 to 4.2.8.2.9
|
Power supply
|
|
|
|
|
1.52.4.3
2.2.3
|
|
4.2.8.2.10
|
Electrical protection of the train
|
2.4.1
|
|
|
|
|
|
4.2.8.3
|
Diesel and other thermal traction system
|
2.4.1
|
|
|
|
1.4.1
|
|
4.2.8.4
|
Protection against electrical hazards
|
2.4.1
|
|
|
|
|
|
4.2.9.1.1
|
Driver’s cab – General
|
-
|
-
|
-
|
-
|
-
|
|
4.2.9.1.2
|
Access and egress
|
1.1.5
|
|
|
|
2.4.3
|
|
4.2.9.1.3
|
External visibility
|
1.1.1
|
|
|
|
2.4.3
|
|
4.2.9.1.4
|
Interior layout
|
1.1.5
|
|
|
|
|
|
4.2.9.1.5
|
Driver's seat
|
|
|
1.3.1
|
|
|
|
4.2.9.1.6
|
Driver's desk- Ergonomics
|
1.1.5
|
|
1.3.1
|
|
|
|
4.2.9.1.7
|
Climate control and air quality
|
|
|
1.3.1
|
|
|
|
4.2.9.1.8
|
Internal lighting
|
|
|
|
|
2.6.3
|
|
4.2.9.2.1
|
Windscreen - Mechanical characteristics
|
2.4.1
|
|
|
|
|
|
4.2.9.2.2
|
Windscreen - Optical characteristics
|
|
|
|
|
2.4.3
|
|
4.2.9.2.3
|
Windscreen – Equipment
|
|
|
|
|
2.4.3
|
|
4.2.9.3.1
|
Driver´s activity control function
|
1.1.1
|
|
|
|
2.6.3
|
|
4.2.9.3.2
|
Speed indication
|
1.1.5
|
|
|
|
|
|
4.2.9.3.3
|
Driver display unit and screens
|
1.1.5
|
|
|
|
|
|
4.2.9.3.4
|
Controls and indicators
|
1.1.5
|
|
|
|
|
|
4.2.9.3.5
|
Labelling
|
|
|
|
|
2.6.3
|
|
4.2.9.3.6
|
Radio remote control function by staff for shunting operation
|
1.1.1
|
|
|
|
|
|
4.2.9.4
|
Onboard tools and portable equipment
|
2.4.1
|
|
|
|
2.4.32.6.3
|
|
4.2.9.5
|
Storage facility for staff personal effects
|
-
|
-
|
-
|
-
|
-
|
|
4.2.9.6
|
Recording device
|
|
|
|
|
2.4.4
|
|
4.2.10.2
|
Fire safety – Measures to prevent fire
|
1.1.4
|
|
1.3.2
|
1.4.2
|
|
|
4.2.10.3
|
Measures to detect/control fire
|
1.1.4
|
|
|
|
|
|
4.2.10.4
|
Requirements related to emergency situations
|
2.4.1
|
|
|
|
|
|
4.2.10.5
|
Requirements related to evacuation
|
2.4.1
|
|
|
|
|
|
4.2.11.2
|
Train exterior cleaning
|
|
|
|
|
1.5
|
|
4.2.11.3
|
Connection to toilet discharge system
|
|
|
|
|
1.5
|
|
4.2.11.4
|
Water refilling equipment
|
|
|
1.3.1
|
|
|
|
4.2.11.5
|
Interface for water refilling
|
|
|
|
|
1.5
|
|
4.2.11.6
|
Special requirements for stabling of trains
|
|
|
|
|
1.5
|
|
4.2.11.7
|
Refuelling equipment
|
|
|
|
|
1.5
|
|
4.2.11.8
|
Train interior cleaning – power supply
|
|
|
|
|
2.5.3
|
|
4.2.12.2
|
General documentation
|
|
|
|
|
1.5
|
|
4.2.12.3
|
Documentation related to maintenance
|
1.1.1
|
|
|
|
2.5.12.5.22.6.1
2.6.2
|
|
4.2.12.4
|
Operating documentation
|
1.1.1
|
|
|
|
2.4.22.6.1
2.6.2
|
|
4.2.12.5
|
Lifting diagram and instructions
|
|
|
|
|
2.5.3
|
|
4.2.12.6
|
Rescue related descriptions
|
|
2.4.2
|
|
|
2.5.3
|
’;
(9)in section 4.1, the text ‘Directive 2008/57/EC’ is replaced by the text ‘Directive (EU) 2016/797’;
(10)in section 4.2.1.1, the text ‘Article 5(8) of Directive 2008/57/EC’ is replaced by the text ‘Article 4(8) of Directive (EU) 2016/797’;
(11)section 4.2.1.2 is amended as follows:
(a)the text ‘Article 5(6) of Directive 2008/57/EC’ is replaced by the text ‘Article 4(6) of Directive (EU) 2016/797’;
(b)the text ‘Articles 5(6) and 17(3) of Directive 2008/57/EC’ is replaced by the text ‘Articles 4(6) and 13(2) of Directive (EU) 2016/797’;
(12)point b-2) of section 4.2.2.2.3 is replaced as follows:
‘b-2) Compatibility between units
On units equipped with manual coupling system of UIC type (as described in clause 5.3.2) and pneumatic brake system compatible with UIC type (as described in clause 4.2.4.3), the following requirements apply:
(1)The buffers and the screw coupling shall be installed according to clauses 5 and 6 of the specification referenced in Appendix J-1, index 110.
(2)The dimensions and layout of brake pipes and hoses, couplings and cocks shall meet the requirements set out in clauses 7 and 8 of the specification referenced in Appendix J-1, index 110. ’;
(13)points (5) to (9) of section 4.2.2.5 are replaced by the following:
‘(5)
Passive safety is aimed at complementing active safety when all other measures have failed. For this purpose, the mechanical structure of vehicles shall provide protection of the occupants in the event of a collision by providing means of:
–limiting deceleration
–maintaining survival space and structural integrity of the occupied areas
–reducing the risk of overriding
–reducing the risk of derailment
–limiting the consequences of hitting a track obstruction.
To meet these functional requirements, units shall comply with the detailed requirements specified in the specification referenced in Appendix J-1, index 8 related to crashworthiness design category C-I (as per the specification referenced in Appendix J-1, index 8,Table 1 section 5), unless specified otherwise below.
The following four reference collision scenarios shall be considered:
–scenario 1: A front end impact between two identical units,
–scenario 2: A front end impact with a freight wagon,
–scenario 3: An impact of the unit with a large road vehicle on a level crossing;,
–scenario 4: An impact of the unit into a low obstacle (e.g. car on a level crossing, animal, rock, etc.).
(6) These scenarios are described in the specification referenced in Appendix J-1, index 8, Table 3 of Section 5.
(7)
The present TSI specifies crashworthiness requirements applicable within its scope; therefore, the Annex A of the specification referenced in Appendix J-1, index 8 shall not apply. The requirements of the specification referenced in Appendix J-1, index 8 Section 6 shall be applied in relation to the above given reference collision scenarios.
(8)
To limit the consequences of hitting a track obstruction, the leading ends of locomotives, power heads, driving coaches and trainsets shall be equipped with an obstacle deflector. The requirements with which obstacle deflectors shall comply are defined in the specification referenced in Appendix J-1, index 8, Section 6.5. ’;
(14)in point (1) of section 4.2.2.10, the reference to ‘clause 2.1’ is replaced by ‘clause 4.5’;
(15)point (3) of section 4.2.3.4.2 is replaced by the following:
‘(3)
The unit shall run safely and produce an acceptable level of track loading when operated within the limits defined by the combination(s) of speed and cant deficiency under the conditions set out in the specification referenced in Appendix J-1, index 16.
This shall be assessed by verifying that limit values specified below in clauses 4.2.3.4.2.1 and 4.2.3.4.2.2 of this TSI are respected; the conformity assessment procedure is described in clause 6.2.3.4 of this TSI. ’;
(16)point (5) of section 4.2.3.4.2 is replaced by the following:
‘(5) The running dynamic behaviour test report (including limits of use and track loading parameters) shall be stated in the technical documentation described in clause 4.2.12 of this TSI.
Track loading parameters (including the additional ones Ymax, Bmax and the Bqst where relevant) to be recorded are defined in the specification referenced in Appendix J-1, index 16. ’;
(17)point (1) of section 4.2.3.4.2.1 is replaced by the following:
‘(1)
The limit values for running safety which the unit shall meet are specified in the specification referenced in Appendix J-1, index 17. ’;
(18)point (1) of section 4.2.3.4.2.2 is replaced by the following:
‘(1)
The limit values for track loading which the unit shall meet (when assessing with the normal method) are specified in the specification referenced in Appendix J1, index 19. ’;
(19)section 4.2.3.5.2.3 is deleted;
(20)section 4.2.3.5.3 is added after section 4.2.3.5.2.2 as follows:
‘4.2.3.5.3
Automatic variable gauge systems
(1)This requirement is applicable to units equipped with an automatic variable gauge system with changeover mechanism of the axial position of the wheels allowing the unit to be compatible with 1435 mm track gauge and other track gauge(s) within the scope of this TSI by means of passage through a track gauge changeover facility.
(2)The changeover mechanism shall ensure the locking in the correct intended axial position of the wheel.
(3)After passage through the track gauge changeover facility, the verification of the state of the locking system (locked or unlocked) and of the position of the wheels shall be performed by one or more of the following means: visual control, on-board control system or infrastructure/facility control system. In case of on-board control system, a continuous monitoring shall be possible.
(4)If a running gear is equipped with brake equipment subject to a change in position during the gauge change operation, the automatic variable gauge system shall ensure the position and safe locking in the correct position of this equipment simultaneously to those of the wheels.
(5)The failure of the locking of the position of the wheels and braking equipment (if relevant) during operation has typical credible potential to lead directly to a catastrophic accident (resulting in multiple fatalities); considering this severity of the failure consequence, it shall be demonstrated that the risk is controlled to an acceptable level.
(6)The automatic variable gauge system is defined as an interoperable constituent (clause 5.3.4b). The conformity assessment procedure is specified in clause 6.1.3.1a (IC level), in clause 6.2.3.5 (safety requirement) and in clause 6.2.3.7b (subsystem level) of this TSI.
(7)The track gauges the unit is compatible with shall be recorded in the technical documentation. A description of the changeover operation in normal mode, including the type(s) of track gauge changeover facility(ies) the unit is compatible with, shall be part of the technical documentation (see also clause 4.2.12.4 (1) of this TSI).
(8)The requirements and conformity assessments required in other sections of this TSI apply independently for each wheel position corresponding to one track gauge, and have to be documented accordingly. ’;
(21)section 4.2.4.8.2 is replaced by the following:
‘4.2.4.8.2
Magnetic track brake
(1)Requirements on magnetic brakes specified for compatibility with train detection system based on axle counters are referenced in point 4.2.3.3.1.2 (10) of this TSI.
(2)A magnetic track brake is allowed to be used as an emergency brake, as mentioned in the TSI INF, clause 4.2.6.2.2.
(3)The geometrical characteristics of the end elements of the magnet in contact with the rail shall be as specified for one of the types described in the specification referenced in Appendix J-1, index 31.
(4)Magnetic track brake shall not be used at speed higher than 280 km/h.
(5)The braking performance of the unit specified in clauses 4.2.4.5.2 of this TSI shall be determined with and without the use of magnetic track brakes. ’;
(22)section 4.2.4.8.3 is replaced by the following:
‘4.2.4.8.3
Eddy current track brake
(1)This clause covers only eddy current track brake developing a brake force between the unit and the rail.
(2)Requirements on eddy current track brakes specified for compatibility with train detection system based on axle counters, track circuits, wheel detectors and vehicle detectors based on inductive loops are referenced in point 4.2.3.3.1.2 (10) of this TSI.
(3)If the eddy current track brake requires a displacement of its magnets when the brake is applied, the unobstructed movement of such magnets between the ‘brake released’ and ‘brake applied’ positions shall be demonstrated by calculation in accordance with the specification referenced in Appendix J-1, index 14.
(4)The maximum distance between the eddy current track brake and the track corresponding to ‘brake released’ position will be recorded in the technical documentation described in clause 4.2.12 of this TSI.
(5)The eddy current track brake shall not operate below a fixed speed threshold.
(6)The conditions for use of eddy current track brake for technical compatibility with the track are not harmonised (regarding in particular their effect on rail heating and vertical force) and are an open point.
(7)The Register of Infrastructure indicates per track section if their use is allowed, and provides in such case their conditions for use.
·The maximum distance between the eddy current track brake and the track corresponding to ‘brake released’ referred to in point (4),
·Fixed speed threshold referred to in point (5),
·Vertical force as a function of the train speed, for the case of full application of eddy current track brake (emergency braking) and limited application of eddy current brake (service braking),
·Braking force as a function of the train speed, for the case of full application of eddy current track brake (emergency braking) and limited application of eddy current brake (service braking),
(8)The braking performance of the unit specified in clauses 4.2.4.5.2 and 4.2.4.5.3 of this TSI shall be determined with and without the use of eddy current track brakes.’;
(23)point (1) of section 4.2.6.2 is replaced by the following:
‘(1)
The requirements in this clause apply to all rolling stock. For rolling stock operated on the 1520 mm and 1600 mm track gauge systems, in case of a maximum speed higher than the limits specified in the clauses 4.2.6.2.1 to 4.2.6.2.5, the procedure for innovative solution shall apply. ’;
(24)section 4.2.6.2.1 is replaced by the following:
‘4.2.6.2.1
Slipstream effects on passengers on platform and on workers trackside
(1)Units of maximum design speed vtr, max > 160 km/h, running in the open air at a reference speed vtr,ref shall not cause the air speed to exceed, at each measurement point defined in clause 4.2.2.1 and Table 5 of the specification referenced in Appendix J-1 index 108, the value u95%,max as indicated in Table 5 of the specification referenced in Appendix J-1, index 108.
(2)For units intended to be operated on the networks with track gauges of 1524 mm and 1668 mm, the corresponding values in Table 4 referring to the parameters of the specification referenced in Appendix J-1, index 108 shall be applied:
Table 4: Limit criteria
|
Track gauge
(mm)
|
Maximum design speed vtr,max (km/h)
|
Measurement point
|
Trackside maximum permissible air speed, (limit values for u95%,max (m/s))
|
Reference speed vtr,ref (km/h)
|
|
|
|
Measurement performed at height above the top of rail
|
Measurement performed at a distance from the track centre
|
|
|
|
1524
|
160 < vtr,max < 250
|
0.2 m
|
3.0 m
|
22,5
|
Maximum design speed
|
|
|
|
1.4 m
|
3.0 m
|
18
|
200 km/h or the maximum design speed, whichever is lower
|
|
1668
|
160 < vtr,max < 250
|
0.2 m
|
3.1 m
|
20
|
Maximum design speed
|
|
|
|
1.4 m
|
3.1 m
|
15.5
|
200 km/h or the maximum design speed, whichever is lower
|
|
|
250 ≤ vtr,max
|
0.2 m
|
3.1 m
|
22
|
300 km/h or the maximum design speed, whichever is lower
|
|
|
|
1.4 m
|
3.1 m
|
15.5
|
200 km/h
|
(3)The train formation to be tested is specified for fixed/predefined formations and units assessed for use in general operation respectively in clauses 4.2.2.2 and 4.2.2.4 of the specification referenced in Appendix J-1, index 108. Single units fitted with a drivers cab shall be tested within a formation complying with the requirements set out in clause 4.2.2.3 of specification referenced in Appendix J-1, index 108.
(4)The conformity assessment procedure is described in clause 6.2.3.13 of this TSI. ’;
(25)section 4.2.6.2.2 is amended as follows:
(a)point (1) is replaced by the following:
‘(1)
The passing of two trains generates an aerodynamic load on each of the two trains. The requirement on head pressure pulse in open air allows a limit aerodynamic load induced by the rolling stock in open air to be defined assuming a a distance between track centres for the track where the train is intended to be operated.
The distance between track centres depends on the speed and the gauge of the line. Minimum values of a distance between track centres depending on speed and gauge are defined in the INF TSI. ’;
(b)point (2) is replaced by the following:
‘(2)
Units with a maximum design speed higher than 160 km/h running in the open air at their reference speed vtr,ref on 1435 mm track gauge shall not cause the maximum peak-to-peak pressure to exceed the maximum permissible pressure change defined in Table 2 of the specification referenced in Appendix J-1, index 109 assessed over the measurement positions defined in point 4.1.2 of the specification referenced in Appendix J-1, index 109. ’;
(c)point (3) is replaced by the following:
‘(3)
For units intended to be operated on the networks with track gauges of 1524 mm and 1668 mm, the corresponding values in Table 4b referring to the parameters of the specification referenced in Appendix J-1, index 109 shall be applied:
Table 4b: Limit criteria
|
Track gauge
|
Maximum design speed vtr,max (km/h)
|
Measurement point
|
Permissible pressure change, (Δp95%,max)
|
Reference speed vtr,ref (km/h)
|
|
|
|
Measurement performed at height above the top of rail
|
Measurement performed at a distance from the track centre
|
|
|
|
1524 mm
|
160 < vtr,max < 250
|
between 1,5 m and 3,0 m
|
2.5 m
|
1600 Pa
|
Maximum design speed
|
|
1668 mm
|
160 < vtr,max < 250
|
between 1,5 m and 3,0 m
|
2.6 m
|
800 Pa
|
Maximum design speed
|
|
|
250 ≤ vtr,max
|
between 1,5 m and 3,0 m
|
2.6 m
|
800 Pa
|
250 km/h
|
’;
(26)section 4.2.6.2.5 is replaced by the following:
‘4.2.6.2.5
Aerodynamic effect on ballasted tracks
(1)
This requirement applies to units of maximum design speed higher than 250 km/h.
(2)
The requirement addresses the aerodynamic effect of trains on ballasted tracks, in order to limit risks induced by the projection of ballast (ballast pick up).
(3)
For units of maximum design speed lower or equal to 300 km/h, this requirement is fulfilled if it is proven that the underside geometry and relevant equipment are the same as those of a train already operated on ballasted tracks of the European network at the same or higher speed before 31st December 2017.
(4)
For units with a maximum design speed lower or equal to 300 km/h which do not fulfil the point (3) above, the procedure set out in point 6.2.5 shall apply.
(5)
For units of maximum design speed higher than 300 km/h, the criteria to be fulfilled regarding aerodynamic effects are an open point. ’;
(27)point (2) of section 4.2.7.1 is replaced by the following:
‘(2) This requirement is not applicable to lights which luminous intensity is not higher than 100 cd that are included in push buttons for the command of passenger doors (not continuously lit). ’;
(28)point (4) of section 4.2.11.6 is replaced by the following:
‘(4)
Single pole’ power supply line (AC 1 kV, AC/DC 1.5 kV, DC 3 kV), in accordance with the specification referenced in Appendix J-1, index 111. ’;
(29)in section 4.2.12.1, the reference to ‘clause 2.4 of Annex VI of Directive 2008/57/EC’ is replaced by the reference to ‘clause 2.4 of Annex IV of Directive (EU) 2016/797’;
(30)in section 4.2.12.1, points (2) and (3) are replaced by:
(31)‘(2)
This documentation, being part of the technical file, is compiled by the applicant and has to accompany the EC declaration of verification. It is kept by the applicant throughout the service life of the subsystem. ’;
(32)a new point (2a) is added below point (2) of section 4.2.12.1 as follows:
‘(2a)
This documentation is provided immediately to the entity in charge of maintenance assigned for the maintenance of the unit by the applicant or by any entity authorised by the applicant (e.g. a keeper). ’;
(33)a new point (3a) is added below point (3) of section 4.2.12.2 as follows:
‘(3a)
For units designed and assessed for general operation, this shall include a description of the electric interfaces between units and of communication protocols, with the reference to the standards or other normative documents that have been applied. Communication protocols (if used) shall comply with the specification referenced in Appendix J-1, index 112. ’;
(34)a new point (9a) is added below point (9) of section 4.2.12.2 as follows:
‘(9a)
Maximum distance between the eddy current track brake and the track corresponding to ‘brake released’, fixed speed threshold referred to in point, vertical force and braking force as a function of the train speed, for the case of full application of eddy current track brake (emergency braking) and limited application of eddy current brake (service braking), as required in clause 4.2.4.8.3. ’;
(35)point (2) of section 4.2.12.3 is replaced by the following:
‘(2)
The maintenance design justification file: explains how maintenance activities are defined and designed in order to ensure that the rolling stock characteristics will be kept within acceptable limits of use during its lifetime.
The maintenance design justification file shall give input data in order to determine the criteria for inspection and the periodicity of maintenance activities. ’;
(36)point (3) of section 4.2.12.3 is replaced by the following:
‘(3)
The maintenance description file: explains how maintenance activities is recommended to be performed. ’;
(37)a new point (1a) is added below point (1) of section 4.2.12.3.1 as follows:
‘(1a)
Precedents, principles and methods used to identify the safety critical components and their specific operational, servicing, maintenance and traceability requirements. The principles and methods used shall be consistent with the requirements set out in Articles 2(g) and 4(4) of [ECM Regulation]. ’;
(38)a new point (6a) is added below point (6) of section 4.2.12.3.2 as follows:
‘(6a)
Safety critical components list: The safety critical components list shall contain the specific servicing, maintenance and servicing/maintenance traceability requirements. ’;
(39)point (1) of section 4.2.12.4 is replaced by the following:
‘(1)
A description of operation in normal mode, including the operational characteristics and limitations of the unit (e.g. vehicle gauge, maximum design speed, axle loads, brake performance, type(s) and operation of track gauge changeover facility(ies) the unit is compatible with...). ’;
(40)a new point (3a) is added below point (3) of section 4.2.12.4 as follows:
‘(3a)
Safety critical components list: The safety critical components list shall contain the specific operational and traceability requirements. ’;
(41)Table 7 in section 4.3.3 is replaced by the following:
‘
|
Table 7 : Interface with the Infrastructure subsystem
|
|
Reference LOC & PAS TSI
|
|
Reference Infrastructure TSI
|
|
|
Parameter
|
Point
|
Parameter
|
Point
|
|
Rolling stock kinematic gauge
|
4.2.3.1.
|
Structure gauge
Distance between track centres
Minimum radius of vertical curve
|
4.2.3.1
4.2.3.2
4.2.3.5
|
|
Axle load parameter
|
4.2.3.2.1
|
Track resistance to vertical loads
Lateral track resistance
Resistance of new bridges to traffic loads
Equivalent vertical loading for new earthworks and earth pressure effects
Resistance of existing bridges and earthworks to traffic loads
|
4.2.6.1
4.2.6.3
4.2.7.1
4.2.7.2
4.2.7.4
|
|
Running dynamic behaviour
|
4.2.3.4.2.
|
Cant deficiency
|
4.2.4.3
|
|
Running dynamic limit values for track loading
|
4.2.3.4.2.2
|
Track resistance to vertical loads
Lateral track resistance
|
4.2.6.1
4.2.6.3
|
|
Equivalent conicity
|
4.2.3.4.3
|
Equivalent conicity
|
4.2.4.5
|
|
Geometrical characteristics of wheelset
Geometrical characteristics of wheels
Automatic variable gauge systems
|
4.2.3.5.2.1
4.2.3.5.2.2
4.2.3.5.3
|
Nominal track gauge
Rail head profile for plain line
In service geometry of switches and crossings
|
4.2.4.1
4.2.4.6
4.2.5.3
|
|
Minimum curve radius
|
4.2.3.6
|
Minimum radius of horizontal curve
|
4.2.3.4
|
|
Maximum average deceleration
|
4.2.4.5.1
|
Longitudinal track resistance
Actions due to traction and braking
|
4.2.6.2
4.2.7.1.5
|
|
Slipstream effects
Head pressure pulse
Maximum pressure variations in tunnels
|
4.2.6.2.1
4.2.6.2.2
4.2.6.2.3
|
Resistance of new structures over or adjacent to tracks
Maximum pressure variations in tunnels
Distance between track centres
|
4.2.7.3
4.2.10.1
4.2.3.2
|
|
Crosswind
|
4.2.6.2.4
|
Effect of crosswinds
|
4.2.10.2
|
|
Aerodynamic effect on ballasted track
|
4.2.6.2.5
|
Ballast pick-up
|
4.2.10.3
|
|
Toilet discharge system
Exterior cleaning through a washing plant
Water refilling equipment:
Interface for water refilling
Refuelling equipment
Special requirements for stabling of trains
|
4.2.11.3
4.2.11.2.2
4.2.11.4
4.2.11.5
4.2.11.7
4.2.11.6
|
Toilet discharge
Train external cleaning facilities,
Water restocking,
Refuelling
Electric shore supply
|
4.2.12.2
4.2.12.3
4.2.12.4
4.2.12.5
4.2.12.6
|
’;
(42)a new point (3a) is added below point (3) of section 4.4 as follows:
‘(3a)
For the safety critical components, the specific operational and operational traceability requirements are developed by the designers/manufacturers at design phase and through a collaboration between designers/manufacturers and the concerned railway undertakings after vehicles have entered into operation. ’;
(43)section 4.5 is replaced by the following:
‘4.5.
Maintenance rules
(1)In light of the essential requirements mentioned in Section 3, the provisions for maintenance of the rolling stock in the scope of this TSI:
·Clause 4.2.11 “Servicing”
·Clause 4.2.12 “Documentation for Operation and Maintenance”.
(2)Other provisions in the section 4.2 (clauses 4.2.3.4 and 4.2.3.5) specify for particular characteristics the limit values that have to be verified during maintenance activities.
(2a)The safety critical components and their specific servicing, maintenance and maintenance traceability requirements are identified by the designers/manufacturers at design phase and through a collaboration between designers/manufacturers and the concerned entities in charge of maintenance after vehicles have entered into operation.
(3)From the information mentioned above and provided in the clause 4.2, the appropriate tolerances and intervals to ensure compliance with the essential requirements throughout the lifetime of the rolling stock are defined at maintenance operational level by and under the sole responsibility of entities in charge of maintenance (not in the scope of the assessment against this TSI); this activity includes:
·The definition of the in-service values where they are not specified in this TSI, or where operating conditions allow the use of different in-service limit values than those specified in this TSI.
·The justification of the in-service values, by providing the equivalent information to those required in clause 4.2.12.3.1 “The maintenance design justification file”.
(4)On the basis of the information mentioned above in this clause, a maintenance plan is defined at maintenance operational level by and under the sole responsibility of the entities in charge of maintenance (not in the scope of the assessment against this TSI), consisting in a structured set of maintenance tasks that include the activities, tests and procedures, means, maintenance criteria, periodicity, working time required to carry out the maintenance tasks.
(5)For on-board software, the designer/manufacturer shall specify, for any on-board software modification, all maintenance requirements and procedures (including health monitoring, diagnosis of events, test methods and tools and also the required professional competence) necessary for achieving essential requirements and values quoted in the mandatory requirements of this TSI throughout the life-cycle (Installation, normal operation, failures, repair work, checking and maintenance, decommissioning, etc.). ’;
(44)in section 4.7, the reference to ‘Directive 2008/57/EC’ is replaced by the reference to ‘Directive (EU) 2016/797’;
(45)in section 4.8, the reference to ‘Article 34(2a) of Directive 2008/57/EC’ is replaced by the reference to ‘point (a) of Article 48(3) of Directive (EU) 2016/797’;
(46)a new section 4.9 is added below point (5) of section 4.8 as follows:
‘4.9.
Route compatibility checks before the use of authorised vehicles
The parameters of the rolling stock subsystem to be used by the railway undertaking, for the purpose of route compatibility check, are described in Appendix D1 of Regulation XXX (OPE TSI). ’;
(47)in section 5.1, the reference to ‘Article 2(f) of Directive 2008/57/EC’ is replaced by the reference to ‘Article 2(7) of Directive (EU) 2016/797’;
(48)a new section 5.3.4a is added below section 5.3.4 as follows:
‘5.3.4a
Automatic variable gauge systems
(1)An IC “automatic variable gauge system” shall be designed and assessed for an area of use defined by:
·The track gauges the system is designed for.
·The range of maximum static axle loads (corresponding to design mass under normal payload as defined in clause 4.2.2.10 of this TSI).
·The range of nominal wheel tread diameters.
·The maximum design speed of the unit.
·The type(s) of track gauge changeover facility(ies) the system is designed for, including the nominal speed through the track changeover facility(ies) and the maximum axial forces during the automatic gauge changeover process.
(2)An automatic variable gauge system shall comply with the requirements set out in clause 4.2.3.5.2.3; these requirements shall be assessed at IC level as set out in clause 6.1.3.1a.’;
(49)in section 6.1.1, the text ‘Article 13(1) and Annex IV of Directive 2008/57/EC’ is replaced by the reference to ‘Article 10 of Directive (EU) 2016/797’;
(50)a new point (3) is added below point (2) of section 6.1.1 as follows:
‘(3)
In case of a specific case applicable to a component defined as interoperability constituent in section 5.3 of this TSI, the corresponding requirement can be part of the verification at interoperability constituent level only in the case where the component remains compliant to the chapters 4 and 5 of this TSI, and where the specific case does not refer to a national rule (i.e. additional requirement compatible with the core TSI and fully specified in the TSI).
In other cases, the verification shall be made at subsystem level; when a national rule applies to a component, the concerned Member State may define relevant applicable conformity assessment procedures. ’;
(51)in the second table of section 6.1.2, a new row is added below the row ‘5.3.4 wheel’ as follows:
‘
|
5.3.4a
|
Automatic variable gauge systems
|
|
X(*)
|
|
X
|
X
|
X(*)
|
X
|
’;
(52)a new section 6.1.3.1a is added below point (8) of section 6.1.3.1 as follows:
‘6.1.3.1a. Automatic variable gauge system (clause 5.3.4a)
(1)The assessment procedure shall be based on a validation plan covering all aspects mentioned in clauses 4.2.3.5.3 and 5.3.4a.
(2)The validation plan shall be consistent with the safety analysis required in clause 4.2.3.5.3 and shall define the assessment needed in all the following different phases:
·Design review.
·Static tests (bench tests and integration in the running gear/unit tests).
·Test on track gauge changeover facility(ies), representative of in-service conditions.
·On-track tests, representative of in-service conditions
(3)Regarding the demonstration of compliance to points (5) of clause 4.2.3.5.3, the assumptions considered for the safety analysis related to the vehicle the system is intended to be integrated in, and related to the mission profile of that vehicle, shall be clearly documented.
(4)The automatic variable gauge system may be subject to an assessment of suitability for use (module CV; see also clause 6.1.6)
(5)The certificate delivered by the Notified Body in charge of the conformity assessment shall include both the conditions for use as per clause 5.3.4a (1) and the type(s) and operating conditions of the track gauge changeover facility(ies) the automatic variable gauge system has been assessed for.’;
(53)point (1) of section 6.1.6 is replaced by the following:
‘(1)
Assessment of suitability for use according to the type validation of in service experience procedure (module CV) may be part of the assessment procedure for the following interoperability constituents:
·Wheels (see clause 6.1.3.1).
·Automatic variable gauge system (see clause 6.1.3.1a).
·Wheel slide protection system (see clause 6.1.3.2).
·Contact strips (see clause 6.1.3.8). ’;
(54)in section 6.2.1, the text ‘Article 18 and Annex VI of Directive 2008/57/EC’ is replaced by the reference to ‘Article 15 and Annex IV of Directive (EU) 2016/797’;
(55)point (1) of section 6.2.3.3 is replaced by the following:
(1) The demonstration of conformity shall be carried out in accordance with one of the methods specified in the specification referenced in Appendix J-1, index 83.
(56)section 6.2.3.4 is replaced by the following:
‘6.2.3.4.
Running dynamic behaviour – technical requirements (Clause 4.2.3.4.2 a)
(1)
For units designed to be operated on 1435 mm or 1524 mm or 1668 mm system, the demonstration of conformity shall be carried out in accordance with the specification referenced in Appendix J-1, index 84, clause 7.
The parameters described in clauses 4.2.3.4.2.1 and 4.2.3.4.2.2 shall be assessed using criteria defined in the specification referenced in Appendix J-1, index 84. ’;
(57)point (3) of section 6.2.3.5 is replaced by the following:
‘(3)
The compliance with the safety requirements that are specified in clauses 4.2.3.4.2, 4.2.3.5.3, 4.2.4.2.2, 4.2.5.3.5, 4.2.5.5.8 and 4.2.5.5.9 in terms of level of severity/consequences associated to hazardous failure scenarios shall be demonstrated by one of the two following methods:
1. Application of a harmonised risk acceptance criterion associated to the severity specified in the clause 4.2 (e.g “fatalities” for emergency braking.).
The applicant may choose to use this method, provided that there is an available harmonized risk acceptance criterion defined in the CSM on Risk Assessment and its amendments (Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) No 402/2013).
The applicant shall demonstrate compliance with the harmonised criterion by applying Annex I-3 of the CSM on RA. The following principles (and their combinations) may be used for the demonstration: similarity with reference system(s); application of codes of practice; application of explicit risk estimation (e.g. probabilistic approach).
The applicant shall designate the body for the assessment of the demonstration he will provide: the notified body selected for the RST sub-system or an assessment body as defined in the CSM on RA.
The demonstration shall be recognized in all Member States; or
2. Application of a risk evaluation and assessment in accordance with the CSM on RA, in order to define the risk acceptance criterion to be used, and demonstrate compliance to this criterion.
The applicant may choose to use this method in any case.
The applicant shall designate the assessment body for the assessment of the demonstration he will provide, as defined in the CSM on RA.
A safety assessment report shall be provided in compliance with the requirements defined in the CSM on RA and its amendments.
The safety assessment report shall be taken into account by the Authorising Entity, in accordance with Section 2.5.6 of Annex I and Article 15(2) of the CSM on RA.’;
(58)the second paragraph in point (1) of section 6.2.3.6 is replaced by the following:
‘The evaluation of the equivalent conicity is set out in the specification referenced in Appendix J-1, index 107. ’;
(59)point (2) of section 6.2.3.7 is replaced by the following:
‘(2)
The demonstration of compliance for mechanical resistance and fatigue characteristics of the axle shall be in accordance with the specification referenced in Appendix J-1, index 88, clauses 5, 6 and 7.
The decision criteria for the permissible stress is specified in the specification referenced in Appendix J-1, index 88, clause 8.’;
(60)a new section 6.2.3.7a is added after section 6.2.3.7 as follows:
‘6.2.3.7a Automatic variable gauge system
(1)The safety analysis required in clause 4.2.3.5.3 point (5), and performed at IC level, shall be consolidated at the level of the unit (vehicle); in particular, the assumptions made according to clause 6.1.3.1a point (3) may need to be reviewed to take into account the vehicle and its mission profile.
(2)The assessment of the integration of the IC within the running gear/unit and the technical compatibility with the track gauge changeover facility shall consist of:
·The compliance with the area of use defined in clause 5.3.4.a (1) shall be verified.
·Verification of the correct integration of the IC within the running gear/unit, including the correct performance of its on-board control / monitoring system (when applicable), and
·On-track tests including tests on the track gauge changeover facility(ies), representative of in-service conditions. ’;
(61)section 6.2.3.13 is replaced by the following:
‘6.2.3.13.
Slipstream effects on passengers on platform and on workers trackside (clause 4.2.6.2.1)
(1)Demonstration of conformity with the limit value of trackside maximum permissible air speed set out in clause 4.2.6.2.1 of this TSI shall be demonstrated on the basis of full-scale tests on straight track performed in accordance with clause 6.2.2.1 of specification referenced in Appendix J-1, index 94.
(2)Instead of the full assessment described above, it is permitted to carry out a simplified assessment for rolling stock of a similar design to rolling stock for which the full assessment defined in this TSI has been carried out. In such cases, the simplified conformity assessment defined in clause 4.2.4 of the specification referenced in Appendix J-1, index 94, can be applied as long as the differences in the design remain within the limits of table 7 of the specification referenced in Appendix J-1, index 94. ’;
(62)section 6.2.3.14 is replaced by the following:
‘6.2.3.14.
Head pressure pulse (clause 4.2.6.2.2)
(1)Conformity shall be assessed on the basis of full-scale tests under conditions specified in the specification referenced in Appendix J-1, index 95, clause 6.1.2.1. Alternatively conformity may be assessed by means of either validated Computational Fluid Dynamics (CFD) simulations as described in the specification referenced in Appendix J-1, index 95, clause 6.1.2.4 or as an additional alternative conformity is permitted to be assessed by moving model tests as specified in the specification referenced in Appendix J-1, index 95, clause 6.1.2.2.
(2)Instead of the full assessment described above, it is permitted to carry out a simplified assessment for rolling stock of a similar design to rolling stock for which the full assessment defined in this TSI has been carried out. In such cases, the simplified conformity assessment defined in clause 4.1.4 of the specification referenced in Appendix J-1, index 95, can be applied as long as the differences in the design remain within the limits of table 4 of the specification referenced in Appendix J-1, index 95. ’;
(63)in section 6.2.6, the text ‘Article 18(3) of Directive 2008/57/EC’ is replaced by the reference to ‘Article 15(4) of Directive (EU) 2016/797’;
(64)a new section 6.2.7a is added after section 6.2.7 as follows:
‘6.2.7a Additional optional requirements for units intended to be used in general operation
(1)The compliance with the following set of conditions (2) to (9) is optional. If the applicant selects this option, a notified body has to assess the compliance within the EC verification procedure. This shall be reported in the certificate and in the technical documentation.
(2)The unit shall be fitted with a manual coupling system as defined in clauses 4.2.2.2.3 b) and 5.3.2
(3)The unit shall be fitted with an EN-UIC braking system as defined in the specification referenced in Appendix J-1, index 22.
(4) The unit shall meet the requirements of this TSI at least within the temperature range T1 (– 25 °C to + 40 °C; nominal) as defined in clause 4.2.6.1 of this TSI and in the specification referenced in Appendix J-1, index 34.
(5)The tail lights requested in clause 4.2.7.1 shall be provided by fixed tail lamps.
(6)If the unit is fitted with a gangway, the gangway shall fulfil the specification referenced in Appendix J-1, index 113.
(7)Power supply shall be compliant to point 4 of clause 4.2.11.6
(8)The physical interface between units for the signal transmission shall ensure that the cable and plug of at least one line is compatible with the 18-conductor cable defined in the plate 2 of the specification referenced in Appendix J-1, index 114.
(9)The unit shall be marked at least with the following markings in accordance with the specification referenced in Appendix J-1, index 115:
·Length over buffers
·Electric power supply.’;
(65)in section 6.3.2, the text ‘Article 17 of Directive 2008/57/EC’ is replaced by the reference to ‘Article 14 of Directive (EU) 2016/797’;
(66)in point (1) of section 7.1.1.2.1, the text ‘in accordance with point (f) of Article 5(3) of Directive 2008/57/EC’ is replaced by the text ‘in accordance with point (f) of Article 4(3) of Directive (EU) 2016/797’;
(67)in point (4) of section 7.1.1.2.1, the text ‘in service in accordance with Articles 22 to 25 of Directive 2008/57/EC’ is replaced by the text ‘ on the market in accordance with Article 21 of Directive (EU) 2016/797’;
(68)in point (1) of section 7.1.1.2.2, the text ‘Article 2(t) of the Directive 2008/57/EC’ is replaced by the text ‘point (23) of Article 2 of Directive (EU) 2016/797’;
(69)in point (3) of section 7.1.1.3, the text ‘in accordance with Article 24 or 25 of Directive 2008/57/EC’ is replaced by the text ‘in accordance with Article 20 of Directive (EU) 2016/797’;
(70)in point (3) of section 7.1.1.4, the text ‘in accordance with Article 24 or 25 of Directive 2008/57/EC’ is replaced by the text ‘in accordance with Article 20 of Directive (EU) 2016/797’;
(71)in section 7.1.1.4a, the reference to section ‘4.2.8.2.8’ is replaced by the reference to ‘4.2.8.2.8.4’;
(72)in section 7.1.1, a new section 7.1.1.8 is added below section 7.1.1.7 as follows:
‘7.1.1.8 Transitional measure for passive safety requirement
Requirements set out in 4.2.2.5(6) shall not be mandatory during a transition period ending on 1 January 2022 for locomotives with a single ‘central cab’ which, on XXXX [at the date of publication of this Regulation], are projects at an advanced stage of development, contracts in course of performance and rolling stock of an existing design as set out in point 7.1.1.2 of this TSI.
When the requirements set out in 4.2.2.5(6) are not applied, it is permitted as an alternative method, to demonstrate compliance against the requirement of scenario 3 of 4.2.2.5(5) by demonstrating compliance with following criteria:
–the frame of the locomotive is designed according to the specification referenced in Appendix J-1, index 7 cat L (as already specified in clause 4.2.2.4 of this TSI),
–the distance between the buffers and the cab windscreen is at least 2,5 m.’;
(73)section 7.1.2 is replaced by the following:
‘7.1.2 Changes to an existing rolling stock or rolling stock type
7.1.2.1 Introduction
(1)This clause 7.1.2 defines the principles to be applied by the entities managing the change and authorising entities in line with the EC verification procedure described in Article 15(9), Article 21(12) and Annex IV of Directive (EU) 2016/797. This procedure is further developed in Article 13, 15 and 16 of Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) 2018/545 and in Decision 2010/713/EC.
(2)This clause 7.1.2 applies in case of any change(s) to an existing rolling stock or rolling stock type, including renewal or upgrade. It does not apply in case of changes that do not introduce a deviation from the technical files accompanying the EC declarations for verification for the subsystems.
7.1.2.2 Rules to manage changes in both rolling stock and rolling stock type
(1)Parts and basic parameters of the rolling stock that are not affected by the change(s) are exempt from conformity assessment against the provisions in this TSI.
(2)A new assessment against the requirements of this TSI, the TSI Noise (Commission Regulation No 1304/2014, see clause 7.2 of that TSI) and the TSI PRM (Commission Regulation No 1300/2014, see clause 7.2.3 of that TSI) shall only be needed for the basic parameters in this TSI which may be affected by the change(s).
(3)In accordance with Articles 15 and 16 of Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) 2018/545 and Decision 2010/713/EU and by application of modules SB, SD/SF or SH1 for the EC verification, and if relevant Article 15(5) of Directive (EU) 2016/797, the entity managing the change shall inform a notified body of all changes affecting the conformity of the subsystem with requirements of the relevant TSI(s) requiring new checks by a notified body. This information shall be provided by the entity managing the change with corresponding references to the technical documentation relating to the existing EC type or design examination certificate.
(4)In accordance with article 21.12(b), in case of changes requiring reassessment of the safety requirements set out in clauses 4.2.3.4.2, 4.2.3.5.3, 4.2.4.2.2, 4.2.5.3.5, 4.2.5.5.8 and 4.2.5.5.9 in accordance with the clause 6.2.3.5, the possible permutations are defined in table 17.
Table 17
|
Vehicle originally assessed against…
|
|
|
First method of clause 6.2.3.5(3)
|
Second method of clause 6.2.3.5(3)
|
No CSM on RA applied
|
|
Change assessed against…
|
First method of clause 6.2.3.5(3)
|
No new authorisation required
|
Check*
|
No new authorisation required
|
|
|
Second method of clause 6.2.3.5(3)
|
Check*
|
Check*
|
Check*
|
|
|
No CSM on RA applied
|
Not possible
|
Not possible
|
Not possible
|
* The word ‘Check’ in Table xx means that the applicant will request from the body for the assessment of the safety requirements a safety judgement on which safety requirement and corresponding assessment grants a lower level of severity/consequences associated to the analysed hazardous failure scenarios. If the body concludes that the original safety assessment grants a lower level or the result is unclear, the applicant shall request an authorization for placing on the market.
(5)National migration strategies related to the implementation of other TSIs (e.g. TSIs covering fixed installations) shall be taken into account when defining to what extent the TSIs covering rolling stock needs to be applied.
(6)The basic design characteristics of the rolling stock are defined in Table 17a and Table 17b. Based on these tables and on the safety judgement mandated in Article 21(12)(b) of Directive (EU) 2016/797, the changes shall be categorised as follows:
·15(1)(c) of Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) 2018/545 if they are above the thresholds set out in column 3 and below thresholds set out in column 4, or
·15(1)(d) of Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) 2018/545 if they are above the thresholds set out in column 4 or if the safety judgement mandated in Article 21(12)(b) of Directive (EU) 2016/797 requires to classify them as 15(1)(d).
(7)Changes not covered by point 7.1.2.2(5) above are deemed not to have any impact on the basic design characteristics and may be categorised as 15(1)(a) or 15(1)(b) of Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) 2018/545, unless the safety judgement mandated in Article 21(12)(b) of Directive (EU) 2016/797 requires to categorise them as 15(1)(d).
(8)All changes shall remain compliant with the applicable TSIs regardless their classification.
(9)The replacement of one or more vehicle(s) within a fixed formation after a severe damage (see also clause 6.2.9) does not require a conformity assessment against this TSI, as long as the unit or the vehicle(s) are unchanged in technical parameters and function to the ones they replace. Such units must be traceable and certified in accordance with any national or international rule, or any code of practice widely acknowledged in the railway domain.
Table 17a: Basic design characteristics related to basic parameters set out in the LOC&PAS TSI
|
1. TSI clause
|
2. Related basic design characteristic(s)
|
3. Changes impacting the basic design characteristic and not classified as 21(12)(a) of Directive (EU) 2016/797
|
4. Changes impacting the basic design characteristic and classified as 21(12)(a) of Directive (EU) 2016/797
|
|
4.2.2.2.3 End coupling
|
Type of end coupling
|
Change of end coupler type
|
N/A
|
|
4.2.2.10 Load conditions and weighed mass
4.2.3.2.1 Axle load parameter
|
Design mass in working order
|
Change in any of the corresponding basic design characteristics resulting in a change of the line category(ies) the vehicle is compatible with
|
N/A
|
|
|
Design mass under normal payload
|
|
|
|
|
Design mass under exceptional payload
|
|
|
|
|
Maximum design speed (km/h)
|
|
|
|
|
Static axle load in working order
|
|
|
|
|
Static axle load under exceptional payload
|
|
|
|
|
Vehicle length
|
|
|
|
|
Static axle load under normal payload
|
|
|
|
|
Position of the axles along the unit (axle spacing)
|
|
|
|
4.2.3.1 Gauging
|
Reference profile
|
N/A
|
Change of reference profile the vehicle is conform to
|
|
|
Minimum vertical convex curve radius capability
|
Change in minimum vertical convex curve radius capability the vehicle is compatible with of more than 10%
|
N/A
|
|
|
Minimum vertical concave curve radius capability
|
Change in minimum vertical concave curve radius capability the vehicle is compatible with of more than 10%
|
N/A
|
|
4.2.3.3.1 Rolling stock characteristics for the compatibility with train detection systems
|
Compatibility with train detection systems
|
N/A
|
Change of declared compatibility with one or more of the three following train detection systems:
·Track circuits
·Axle counters
·Loop equipment
|
|
4.2.3.3.2 Axle bearing condition monitoring
|
On-board detection system
|
N/A
|
Fitting/Removal of declared on-board detection system
|
|
4.2.3.4. Rolling stock dynamic behaviour
|
Combination of maximum speed and maximum cant deficiency for which the vehicle was assessed
|
N/A
|
Increase in maximum speed of more than 15 km/h or change of more than ± 10% in maximum admissible cant deficiency
|
|
|
Rail inclination
|
N/A
|
Change of rail inclination the vehicle is conform to
|
|
4.2.3.5.2.1. Mechanical and geometric characteristics of wheelsets
|
Wheelset gauge
|
N/A
|
Change of track gauge the wheelset is compatible with
|
|
4.2.3.5.2.2 Characteristics of wheels
|
Minimum required in-service wheel diameter
|
Change of minimum required in-service diameter of more than ±10 mm
|
N/A
|
|
4.2.3.5.2.3 Automatic variable gauge systems
|
Wheelset gauge changeover facility
|
Change in the vehicle leading to a change in the changeover facility(ies) the wheelset is compatible with
|
Change of track gauge(s) the wheelset is compatible with
|
|
4.2.3.6. Minimum curve radius
|
Minimum horizontal curve radius capability
|
Increase of minimum horizontal curve radius of more than 5 m
|
N/A
|
|
4.2.4.5.1 Braking performance - General requirements
|
Maximum average deceleration
|
Change of more than ± 10% on the maximum average brake deceleration
|
N/A
|
|
4.2.4.5.2 Braking performance – Emergency braking
|
Stopping distance and deceleration profile for each load condition per design maximum speed.
|
Change of stopping distance of more than ± 10%
|
N/A
|
|
|
For vehicles intended for general operation only:
Brake weight percentage (lambda)
|
Change of lambda of more than ± 10%
|
N/A
|
|
|
For vehicles intended for general operation only:
Braked mass
|
Change of braked mass of more than ± 10%
|
N/A
|
|
4.2.4.5.3 Braking performance – Service braking
|
Stopping distance and maximum deceleration for the load condition ‘design mass under normal payload’ at the design maximum speed
|
Change of stopping distance of more than ± 10%
|
N/A
|
|
4.2.4.5.4 Braking performance – Thermal capacity
|
Thermal capacity expressed in terms of:
·Speed
·Gradient
·Brake distance
|
N/A
|
New reference case declared
|
|
4.2.4.5.5 Braking performance – Parking brake
|
Maximum gradient on which the unit is kept immobilized by the parking brake alone (if the vehicle is fitted with it)
|
Change of declared maximum gradient of more than ± 10%
|
N/A
|
|
4.2.4.6.2. Wheel slide protection system
|
Wheel slide protection system
|
N/A
|
Fitting/removal of WSP function
|
|
4.2.4.8.2 Magnetic track brake
|
Magnetic track brake
|
N/A
|
Fitting/removal of magnetic track brake function
|
|
|
Possibility of preventing the use of the magnetic track brake
|
N/A
|
Fitting/removal of the brake control allowing the activation/deactivation of magnetic track brake
|
|
4.2.4.8.3 Eddy current track brake
|
Eddy current track brake
|
N/A
|
Fitting/removal of the eddy current track brake function
|
|
|
Possibility of preventing the use of the eddy current track brake
|
N/A
|
Fitting/removal of the brake control allowing the activation/deactivation of eddy current track brake
|
|
4.2.6.1.1 Temperature
|
Temperature range
|
Change of temperature range (T1, T2, T3)
|
N/A
|
|
4.2.6.1.2 Snow, ice and hail
|
Snow, ice and hail conditions
|
Change of the selected range ‘snow, ice and hail’ (nominal or severe)
|
N/A
|
|
4.2.8.2.2 Operation within range of voltages and frequencies
|
Energy supply system (voltage and frequency)
|
N/A
|
Change of voltage(s)/frequency(ies) of the energy supply system
(AC 25kV-50Hz, AC 15kV-16.7Hz, DC 3kV, DC 1.5kV, DC 750V, third rail, others)
|
|
4.2.8.2.3 Regenerative brake with energy to the overhead contact line
|
Regenerative brake
|
N/A
|
Fitting/removal of regenerative brake function
|
|
|
Possibility of preventing the use of the regenerative brake when fitted
|
Fitting/removing the possibility of preventing the use of regenerative brake
|
N/A
|
|
4.2.8.2.4 Maximum power and current from the overhead contact line
|
Applicable to Electric units with power higher than 2 MW only:
Power or current limitation function
|
Power or current limitation function fitted/removed
|
N/A
|
|
4.2.8.2.5 Maximum current at standstill for DC systems
|
Maximum current at standstill per pantograph for each DC system the vehicle is equipped for
|
Change of the maximum current value by 50 A without exceeding the limit set in the TSI
|
N/A
|
|
4.2.8.9.1.1 Height of interaction with contact wires (RST level)
|
Height of interaction of pantograph with contact wires (over top of rail)
|
Change of height of interaction allowing/no longer allowing mechanical contact with one of the contact wires at heights above rail level between:
4 800 mm and 6 500 mm
4 500 mm and 6 500 mm
5 550 mm and 6 800 mm
5 600 mm and 6 600 mm
|
N/A
|
|
4.2.8.2.9.2 Pantograph head geometry (IC level)
|
Pantograph head geometry
|
N/A
|
Change of pantograph head geometry to or from one of the types defined in clauses 4.2.8.2.9.2.1, 4.2.8.2.9.2.2 or 4.2.8.2.9.2.3
|
|
4.2.8.2.9.4.2 Contact strip material
|
Contact strip material
|
New contact strip as per 4.2.8.2.9.4.2(3)
|
N/A
|
|
4.2.8.2.9.6 Pantograph contact force and dynamic behaviour
|
Mean contact force curve
|
Change requiring a new assessment of pantograph dynamic behaviour.
|
N/A
|
|
4.2.8.2.9.7 Arrangement of pantographs (RST level)
|
Number of pantograph and shortest distance between two pantographs
|
N/A
|
Where the spacing of 2 consecutive pantographs in fixed or predefined formations of the assessed unit is reduced by means of removing a vehicle
|
|
4.2.8.2.9.10 Pantograph lowering (RST level)
|
Automatic dropping device (ADD)
|
Automatic dropping device (ADD) function fitted/removed
|
N/A
|
|
4.2.10.1. General and categorisation
|
Fire safety category
|
N/A
|
Change of fire safety category
|
|
4.2.12.2. General documentation
|
Maximum number of trainsets or locomotives coupled together in multiple operation.
|
N/A
|
Change of maximum allowed number of trainsets or locomotives coupled together in multiple operation
|
Table 17b
Basic design characteristics related to basic parameters set out in the PRM TSI
|
1. TSI clause
|
2. Related basic design characteristic(s)
|
3. Changes impacting the basic design characteristic and not classified as 21(12)(a) of Directive (EU) 2016/797
|
4. Changes impacting the basic design characteristic and classified as 21(12)(a) of Directive (EU) 2016/797
|
|
4.2.2.11. Step position for vehicle access and egress
|
Platform heights for which the vehicle is designed
|
N/A
|
Change of platform height the vehicle is compatible with
|
(10)In order to establish the EC type or design examination certificate, the notified body selected by the entity managing the change is permitted to refer to:
–The original EC type or design examination certificate for parts of the design that are unchanged or those that are changed but do not affect the conformity of the subsystem, as far as it is still valid (during 7 years phase B period).
–Additional EC type or design examination certificate (amending the original certificate) for modified parts of the design that affect the conformity of the subsystem with the latest revision of this TSI in force at that time.
(11)In any case, the entity managing the change shall ensure that the technical documentation which is relating to the EC type or design examination certificate is updated accordingly.
(12)The updated technical documentation, related to the EC type or design examination certificate is referred to in the technical file accompanying the EC declaration of verification issued by the entity managing the change for rolling stock declared as conformant to the modified type.
Particular rules for existing rolling stock not covered by an EC declaration of verification authorised for placing in service before 1 January 2015
(13)The following rules apply to existing rolling stock authorised for placing in service before 1 January 2015, where the scope of the change has an impact on basic parameters not covered by the EC declaration (if any).
(14)The compliance with technical requirements of this TSI is deemed established when a basic parameter is improved in the direction of the TSI defined performance and the entity managing the change demonstrates that the corresponding essential requirements are met and the safety level is maintained or improved. The entity managing the change shall in this case justify the reasons for which the TSI defined performance was not met, taking into account paragraph 3 of section 7.1.2.2. This justification shall be included in the technical file, if any, or in the original technical documentation of the vehicle.
(15)The particular rule set out in paragraph (13) above is not applicable in changes impacting the basic design characteristics and classified as 21(12)(a) set out in table 17c and 17d.
Table 17c: Basic design characteristics related to basic parameters set out in the LOC&PAS TSI for rolling stock not holding an EC type or design examination certificate
|
TSI clause
|
Related basic design characteristic(s)
|
Changes impacting the basic design characteristic and classified as 21(12)(a) of Directive (EU) 2016/797
|
|
4.2.3.1 Gauging
|
Reference profile
|
Change of reference profile the vehicle is conform to
|
|
4.2.3.3.1 Rolling stock characteristics for the compatibility with train detection systems
|
Compatibility with train detection systems
|
Change of declared compatibility with one or more of the three following train detection systems:
·Track circuits
·Axle counters
·Loop equipment
|
|
4.2.3.3.2 Axle bearing condition monitoring
|
On-board detection system
|
Fitting/Removal of declared on-board detection system
|
|
4.2.3.5.2.1. Mechanical and geometric characteristics of wheelsets
|
Wheelset gauge
|
Change of track gauge the wheelset is compatible with
|
|
4.2.3.5.2.3 Automatic variable gauge systems
|
Wheelset gauge changeover facility
|
Change of track gauge(s) the wheelset is compatible with
|
|
4.2.8.2.3 Regenerative brake with energy to the overhead contact line
|
Regenerative brake
|
Fitting/removal of regenerative brake function
|
Table 17d
Basic design characteristics related to basic parameters set out in the PRM TSI for rolling stock not holding an EC type or design examination certificate
|
TSI clause
|
Related basic design characteristic(s)
|
Changes impacting the basic design characteristic and classified as 21(12)(a) of Directive (EU) 2016/797
|
|
4.2.2.11. Step position for vehicle access and egress
|
Platform heights for which the vehicle is designed
|
Change of platform height the vehicle is compatible with
|
’;
(74)the title of section 7.1.3 ‘Rules related to the type or design examination certificates’ is replaced by ‘Rules related to the EC type or design examination certificates’;
(75)section 7.1.3.1 is replaced by the following:
‘7.1.3.1.
Rolling stock subsystem
(1)This clause concerns a rolling stock type (unit type in the context of this TSI), as defined in Article 2(26) of Directive (EU) 2016/797, which is subject to a EC type or design verification procedure in accordance with the section 6.2 of this TSI. It also applies to the EC type or design verification procedure in accordance with the TSI Noise (Commission regulation N° 1304/2014), and the TSI PRM (Commission regulation N° 1300/2014) which refers to this TSI for its scope of application to Locomotives and Passenger rolling Stock.
(2)The TSI assessment basis for a ‘EC type or design examination’ is defined in columns 2 and 3 ‘Design review’ and ‘Type test’ of Appendix H of this TSI.
Phase A
(3)Phase A starts once a notified body, which is responsible for EC verification, is appointed by the applicant and ends when the EC type or design examination certificate is issued.
(4)The TSI assessment basis for a type is defined for a phase A period, with a duration of maximum seven years. During the phase A period the assessment basis for EC verification to be used by the notified body will not change.
(5)When a revision of this TSI or of the TSI Noise or the TSI PRM comes into force during the phase A period, it is permissible (but not mandatory) to use the revised version, either totally or for particular sections, unless explicitly otherwise specified in the revision of these TSIs; in case of application limited to particular sections, the applicant has to justify and document that applicable requirements remain consistent, and this has to be approved by the notified body.
Phase B
(6)The phase B period defines the period of validity of the EC type or design examination certificate once it is issued by the notified body. During this time, units may be EC certified on the basis of conformity to type.
(7)The EC type or design examination certificate of EC verification for the subsystem is valid for a seven year phase B period after its issue date, even if a revision of this TSI or of the TSI Noise or the TSI PRM comes into force , unless explicitly otherwise specified in the revision of these TSIs. During this period of validity, new rolling stock of the same type is permitted to be placed on the market on the basis of an EC declaration of verification referring to the type certificate of verification.
(76)a new section 7.1.4 is added after section 7.1.3.2 as follows:
‘7.1.4.
Conditions for having an authorisation for placing on the market not limited to particular national networks
7.1.4.1.
Introduction
This clause 7.1.4 applies to a vehicle composed of a rolling stock subsystem only, when the Applicant specifies an area of use not limited to particular national networks (i.e. EU network as area of use) in its application for an authorisation for placing on the market.
In accordance with Article 21(3) b) of Directive (EU) 2016/797 the authorisation for placing on the market of a vehicle composed of a rolling stock subsystem only and corresponding to a unit (as defined in this TSI) is granted on the basis of:
·according to point (a) of article 21(3): the ‘EC’ declaration of verification as provided for in Article 15 of the same directive, and
·according to point (d) of article 21(3): evidence of the technical compatibility of the vehicle with the network in the area of use covering the EU network.
For a vehicle composed of a rolling stock subsystem only, points (b) and (c) of article 21(3) of Directive (EU) 2016/797 do not represent any additional requirement. The technical compatibility of the vehicle with the network being covered by rules (TSIs or national rules), this aspect is also considered at the level of the ‘EC’ verification.
Therefore, the conditions for having an area of use not limited to particular national networks are specified in the clause 7.1.4.2 below as additional requirements to be covered in the EC verification of the subsystem rolling stock.
7.1.4.2.
Additional requirements to be applied in the EC verification of the rolling stock subsystem
(1)The following points (2) and (3) lay out the conditions under which an EC verification procedure including EC declaration of verification of a unit is not required to be complemented (under Annex IV, section 3 of the Directive (EU) 2016/797) for having its conditions of use and other restrictions not limited to one particular national network.
These conditions shall be seen as complementary to the requirements in sections 4, 5, 6 and 7 of this TSI. These conditions shall be fulfilled in their entirety;
(2)Conditions related to sections 4, 5 and 6 of this TSI:
(a)The unit is designed for operation on the 1435 mm track gauge (clauses 2.3.2 and 4.2.3.5.3 ); in case of Automatic variable gauge systems, the second track gauge position is not covered.
(b)The maximum speed of the unit is lower than 250 km/h (clauses 2.3.3, 4.2.3.3.2 and 4.2.6.2.5).
(c)The unit shall not be equipped with eddy current track brake.
The unit, if equipped with magnetic track brake, shall be fitted with a system allowing the possibility of preventing the use of such equipment; in addition to the requirements in clauses 4.2.4.5 and 4.2.4.8 of this TSI, a braking performance calculation performed without considering these brake systems shall be part of the technical documentation specified in clause 4.2.12.
(d)Where the unit is equipped with pantograph(s), pantograph head(s) shall be compliant to types 1600 mm or 1950 mm. (clause 4.2.8.2.9.2)
(e)The unit is declared as compatible with train detection systems based on track circuits, on axle counters (including mechanical wheel detectors) and on loop equipment on the basis of the TSI requirements in clause 4.2.3.3.1 and on the basis of the following requirements, in order to mitigate open points:
–The metal free space around wheels fulfils the conditions of the figure 3 of the specification referenced in Appendix J-2, index 1, clause 3.1.3.5.
–The use of sanding equipment may be subject to limitations, in case the sand characteristics, referenced in Appendix J-2, index 1, clause 3.1.4.2, are not suitable.
–The unit, if equipped with flange lubrication, shall be fitted with a system allowing the possibility of preventing the use of such equipment, according to the specification referenced in Appendix J-2, index 1, clause 3.1.5.
–Where the unit is equipped with composite brake blocks, these brake blocks shall be assessed for their suitability for train detection systems based on track circuits, in accordance with the procedure specified in Appendix J-2, index 2.
–Electromagnetic fields measured according to the specification referenced in Appendix J-2, index 1, clause 3.2.1, shall be part of the technical documentation specified in clause 4.2.12.
–Where the unit is equipped with a pantograph, the vehicle impedance between pantograph and wheel, as described in the specification referenced in Appendix J-2, index 1, clause 3.2.2.1 shall be evaluated and recorded in the technical documentation specified in clause 4.2.12.
–Where the unit is equipped with electric traction equipment, harmonics in traction current measured according to the specification referenced in Appendix J-2, index 1, clause 3.2.2, shall be part of the technical documentation specified in clause 4.2.12.
Note: Regarding compatibility with train detection systems, additional checks may be needed when justified, considering the specification referenced in Appendix J-2, index 1, clauses 3.1.10 and 3.2.2, information provided in the RINF for specific routes and the integration of the unit in the train composition. In case additional checks have been performed, these shall be identified for consideration in the ‘conditions for use and other restrictions’ of the unit.
(f)The unit is declared as compatible with track side axle bearing condition monitoring as specified in clause 4.2.3.3.2.2 (1).
(g)The unit is equipped with forged or rolled wheels (clauses 4.2.3.5.2.2 and 6.1.3.1).
(h)The unit, if of category B fire safety, is equipped with fire barriers of full cross section partition. (clauses 4.2.10.3.4 and 4.2.10.4.4).
The conditions (a) to (f) have to be taken into account in the ‘conditions of use and other restrictions’ of the unit; these condition and other information declared in the ERATV have to be considered for the definition of the “area of use” of the unit (i.e. national networks).
Note: Regarding the TSI PRM and the TSI Noise that are also applicable to the unit, there is no need for additional verification provided that specific cases meet the conditions of point (3) below. The TSI PRM requires that the characteristics of the platform(s) where the unit is intended to stop, that have been taken into account for the verification, are recorded as part of the technical documentation specified in clause 4.2.12.
(3)Conditions related to the section 7.3 of this TSI, ‘specific cases’:
The specific cases listed in the section 7.3 of the TSI have their application limited as follows:
(a)Those that do not preserve the compliance to chapters 4, 5 and 6 of the TSI and to the conditions (a) to (h) listed above in point (2) shall not be applied; they are listed below:
–Specific cases required by United Kingdom (Great Britain) and specifying a non-mandatory alternative;
–Specific case defined in clause 7.3.2.3 – Rolling stock requirements for compatibility with trackside equipment (4.2.3.3.2.2) for Sweden – (application limited to non-upgraded lines);
–Specific case defined in clause 7.3.2.8 – Aerodynamic effects (4.2.6.2) for United Kingdom (Great Britain);
–Specific case defined in clause 7.3.2.10 – Power supply – general (4.2.8.2) for United Kingdom (Great Britain);
–Specific case defined in clause 7.3.2.15 – Contact strip material (4.2.8.2.9.4.2) for France – (not specified as mandatory);
–Specific cases defined in TSI PRM (excepted specific case for Austria and Germany for all rolling Stock intended to stop, in normal operation, at platforms below 550 mm height).
As a consequence, depending on the exact impact of the specific case, the unit may be declared as not intended to operate in the related member state network or part of network (according to the related specific case).
(a)Those that represent additional requirements, complementary to requirements of chapters 4, 5 and 6 of the TSI, and to the conditions a) to h) listed above in point (2) shall be applied if relevant for the unit and if the unit is intended to operate (as identified by the Applicant) in the related member state network or part of network (according to the related specific case); they are listed below:
–Specific case defined in clause 7.3.2.8 – Aerodynamic effects (4.2.6.2) for Italy;
–Specific case defined in clause 7.3.2.11 – Operation within range of voltages and frequencies (4.2.8.2.2) for France;
–Specific case defined in clause 7.3.2.12 – Use of regenerative brakes (4.2.8.2.3) for Belgium, Czech Republic and Sweden;
–Specific case defined in clause 7.3.2.13 – Height of interaction with contact wires (RST level) (4.2.8.2.9.1.1) for United Kingdom (Great Britain);
–Specific case defined in clause 7.3.2.16 – Pantograph contact force and dynamic behaviour (4.2.8.2.9.6) for France, Sweden, United Kingdom (Great Britain) and Channel Tunnel;
–Specific case defined in clause 7.3.2.20 – Fire safety and evacuation (4.2.10) for Italy;
–Specific case defined in clause 7.3.2.21 – Running capability (4.2.10.4.4) and fire containment and control system (4.2.10.3.4) for Channel Tunnel.
–Specific case defined in TSI PRM in clause 7.3.2.6, for Austria and Germany for all rolling Stock intended to stop, in normal operation, at platforms below 550 mm height.
7.1.4.3.
Area of use and conditions of use and other restrictions of the vehicle
(1)The ‘area of use’ of the vehicle is declared as the EU network, but shall exclude the national networks identified in section 7.1.4.2 (3) above, if the unit is impacted by the concerned requirements and the requirement(s) is/ are not applied.
(2)The conditions of use and other restrictions attached to the authorisation for placing on the market of the vehicle shall be defined taking into account the clause 7.1.4.2 in addition to the section 4.2 of this TSI. ’;
(77)section 7.2 is amended as follows:
(a)the reference to ‘Article 34 of Directive 2008/57/EC’ is replaced by the reference to ‘Article 48 of Directive (EU) 2016/797’;
(b)the text ‘Article 35 of Directive 2008/57/EC and Commission Implementing Decision 2011/633/EU’ is replaced by the text ‘Article 48 of Directive (EU) 2016/797 and Commission Implementing Regulation XXX (RINF)’;
(78)Point (2) of section 7.3.1 is replaced by the following:
‘(2) These specific cases are classified as:
–‘P’ cases:‘permanent’ cases,
–‘T’ cases:‘temporary’ cases, where the target system shall be reached by 31 December 2025. ’;
(79)a new point (6) is added below point (5) of section 7.3.1 as follows:
‘(6)
In case of a specific case applicable to a component defined as interoperability constituent in section 5.3 of this TSI, the conformity assessment has to be made according to the clause 6.1.1 point (3). ’;
(80)section 7.3.2.4 is replaced by the following:
‘7.3.2.4.
Safety against derailment running on twisted track (4.2.3.4.1)
Specific case United Kingdom (Great Britain) (“P”)
It is permissible for all units and cases to use Method 3 set out in EN14363:2016 clause 6.1.5.3.1.
This specific case does not prevent the access of TSI compliant rolling stock to the national network. ’;
(81)section 7.3.2.5 is replaced by the following:
‘7.3.2.5.
Running dynamic behaviour (4.2.3.4.2, 6.2.3.4)
Specific case Finland (“P”)
The following modifications to the running dynamic behaviour clauses of the TSI applies to vehicle to be operated solely on Finnish 1524 mm network:
–Test zone 4 is not applicable for running dynamic testing.
–Mean value of curve radius of all track sections for test zone 3 shall be 550 ±50 metres for running dynamic testing.
–Track quality parameters in running dynamics testing shall be according to RATO 13 (Track inspection).
–Measuring methods are according to EN 13848:2003+A1.
Specific case Ireland and UK for Northern Ireland (“P”)
For technical compatibility with the existing network it is permissible to use notified national technical rules for the purpose of assessing running dynamic behaviour.
Specific case Spain (“P”)
For rolling stock intended to be used on 1668 mm track gauge, the quasi-static guiding force Yqst limit value shall be evaluated for curve radii
250 m ≤ Rm < 400 m.
The limit value shall be: (Yqst)lim = 66 kN.
For the normalisation of the estimated value to the radius Rm = 350 m according to clause 7.6.3.2.6 (2) of EN 14363:2016, the formula
‘Ya,nf,qst = Ya,f,qst – (10 500 m / Rm – 30) kN’ shall be replaced by
‘Ya,nf,qst = Ya,f,qst – (11 550 m / Rm – 33) kN.
Values of cant deficiency can be adapted to 1668 mm track gauge by multiplying the corresponding 1435 mm parameter values by the following conversion factor: 1733/1500.
Specific case the United Kingdom (Great Britain) (“P”)
For technical compatibility with the existing network it is permissible to use national technical rules amending EN 14363 requirements and notified for the purpose of running dynamic behaviour. This specific case does not prevent the access of TSI compliant rolling stock to the national network. ’;
(82)in section 7.3.2.6, below Table 22, the text ‘Specific case Spain (“P”)’ of clause 7.3.2.6 is replaced by ‘Specific case Spain for 1668 mm track gauge (“P”)’;
(83)in section 7.3.2.10, the text ‘clause 7.4.2.8.1’ is replaced by ‘clause 7.4.2.9.1’;
(84)in section 7.3.2.11, the text ‘clause 7.4.2.3.1’ is replaced by ‘clause 7.4.2.4.1’;
(85)a new section 7.3.2.27 is added below section 7.3.2.26 as follows:
‘7.3.2.27. Rules to manage changes in both rolling stock and rolling stock type (7.1.2.2)
Specific case the United Kingdom (Great Britain) (‘P’)
Any change to a vehicle swept envelope as defined in the national technical rules notified for the gauging process (for example as described in RIS-2773-RST) will result in a new version.’;
(86)section 7.5.3.1 is amended as follows:
(a) the reference to ‘Directive 2008/57/EC’ is replaced by the reference to ‘Directive (EU) 2016/797’;
(b)The text ‘in accordance with article 17 of Directive 2008/57/EC or through the Infrastructure Register referred to in article 35 of the same Directive’ is replaced by the text ‘in accordance with article 14 of Directive 2008/57/EC or through the Infrastructure Register referred to in article 49 of the same Directive’;
(87)in the list ‘APPENDICES’ following Chapter 7, the text ‘Appendix A: Buffer and draw gear’ is replaced by ‘Appendix A: Intentionally deleted’;
(88)the text of Appendix A is replaced by ‘Intentionally deleted’;
(89)section C.3 of Appendix C is replaced by the following:
‘C.3
Running dynamic behaviour
The running characteristics are permitted to be determined by running tests or by reference to a similar type approved machine as detailed in clause 4.2.3.4.2 of this TSI or by simulation.
The following additional deviations from the specification referenced in Annex J-1, index 16 apply:
·The test shall always be taken as the simplified method for this type of machines
·when running tests according to the specification referenced in Annex J-1, index 16 are done with wheel profile in new condition, these are valid for a maximum distance of 50 000 km. After 50 000 km it is necessary to:
–either re-profile the wheels;
–or calculate the equivalent conicity of the worn profile and check that it does not differ more than 50 % from the value of the test of the specification referenced in Annex J-1, index 16 (with a maximum difference of 0,05);
–or make a new test according to the specification referenced in Annex J-1, index 16 with worn wheel profile;
·in general, stationary tests to determine the parameters of characteristic running gear in accordance with to the specification referenced in Annex J-1, index 16, clause 5.3.1 are not necessary;
·if the required test speed cannot be obtained by the machine itself, the machine shall be hauled for the tests.
Running behaviour can be proven by simulation of the tests described in to the specification referenced in Annex J-1, index 16 (with the exceptions as specified above) when there is a validated model of representative track and operating conditions of the machine.
A model of a machine for simulation of running characteristics shall be validated by comparing the model results against the results of a running tests when the same input of track characteristic is used.
A validated model is a simulation model that has been verified by an actual running test that excites the suspension sufficiently and where there is a close correlation between the results of the running test and the predictions from the simulation model over the same test track.’;
(90)Appendix H is replaced by the following:
‘APPENDIX H - Assessment of the rolling stock subsystem
H.1
Scope
This Appendix indicates the assessment of conformity of the rolling stock subsystem.
H.2
Characteristics and modules
The sub-system characteristics to be assessed in the different phases of design, development and production are marked by X in Table H.1. A cross in column 4 of Table H.1 indicates that the relevant characteristics shall be verified by testing each single subsystem.
Table H.1 – Assessment of the rolling stock subsystem
|
1
|
2
|
3
|
4
|
5
|
|
Characteristics to be
assessed, as specified in clause 4.2 of this TSI
|
Design and development
phase
|
Production
phase
|
Particular assessment procedure
|
|
|
Design
review
|
Type Test
|
Routine
Test
|
|
|
Element of the Rolling Stock sub-system
|
Clause
|
|
|
|
Clause
|
|
Structure and mechanical parts
|
4.2.2
|
|
|
Inner coupling
|
4.2.2.2.2
|
X
|
n.a.
|
n.a.
|
-
|
|
End coupling
|
4.2.2.2.3
|
X
|
n.a.
|
n.a.
|
-
|
|
IC automatic centre buffer coupler
|
5.3.1
|
X
|
X
|
X
|
-
|
|
IC manual end coupling
|
5.3.2
|
X
|
X
|
X
|
-
|
|
Rescue coupling
|
4.2.2.2.4
|
X
|
X
|
n.a.
|
-
|
|
IC rescue coupling
|
5.3.3
|
X
|
X
|
X
|
|
|
Staff access for coupling and uncoupling
|
4.2.2.2.5
|
X
|
X
|
n.a.
|
-
|
|
Gangways
|
4.2.2.3
|
X
|
X
|
n.a.
|
-
|
|
Strength of vehicle structure
|
4.2.2.4
|
X
|
X
|
n.a.
|
-
|
|
Passive safety
|
4.2.2.5
|
X
|
X
|
n.a.
|
-
|
|
Lifting and jacking
|
4.2.2.6
|
X
|
X
|
n.a.
|
-
|
|
Fixing of devices to carbody structure
|
4.2.2.7
|
X
|
n.a.
|
n.a.
|
-
|
|
Staff and freight access doors
|
4.2.2.8
|
X
|
X
|
n.a.
|
-
|
|
Mechanical characteristics of glass
|
4.2.2.9
|
X
|
n.a.
|
n.a.
|
-
|
|
Load conditions and weighted mass
|
4.2.2.10
|
X
|
X
|
X
|
6.2.3.1
|
|
Track interaction and gauging
|
4.2.3
|
|
|
Gauging
|
4.2.3.1
|
X
|
n.a.
|
n.a.
|
-
|
|
Wheel load
|
4.2.3.2.2
|
X
|
X
|
n.a
|
6.2.3.2
|
|
Rolling Stock characteristics for compatibility with train detection systems
|
4.2.3.3.1
|
X
|
X
|
X
|
-
|
|
Axle bearing condition monitoring
|
4.2.3.3.2
|
X
|
X
|
n.a.
|
-
|
|
Safety against derailment running on twisted track
|
4.2.3.4.1
|
X
|
X
|
n.a.
|
6.2.3.3
|
|
Running dynamic behaviour requirements
|
4.2.3.4.2 a)
|
X
|
X
|
n.a.
|
6.2.3.4
|
|
Active systems – safety requirement
|
4.2.3.4.2 b)
|
X
|
n.a.
|
n.a.
|
6.2.3.5
|
|
Limit values for running safety
|
4.2.3.4.2.1
|
X
|
X
|
n.a.
|
6.2.3.4
|
|
Track loading limit values
|
4.2.3.4.2.2
|
X
|
X
|
n.a.
|
6.2.3.4
|
|
Equivalent conicity
|
4.2.3.4.3
|
X
|
n.a.
|
n.a.
|
-
|
|
Design values for new wheel profiles
|
4.2.3.4.3.1
|
X
|
n.a.
|
n.a.
|
6.2.3.6
|
|
In-service values of wheelset equivalent conicity
|
4.2.3.4.3.2
|
X
|
|
|
-
|
|
Structural design of bogie frame
|
4.2.3.5.1
|
X
|
X.
|
n.a.
|
-
|
|
Mechanical and geometrical characteristics of wheelsets
|
4.2.3.5.2.1
|
X
|
X
|
X
|
6.2.3.7
|
|
Mechanical and geometrical characteristics of wheels
|
4.2.3.5.2.2
|
X
|
X
|
X
|
-
|
|
Wheels (IC)
|
5.3.2
|
X
|
X
|
X
|
6.1.3.1
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Automatic variable gauge systems
|
4.2.3.5.3
|
X
|
X
|
X
|
6.2.3.7a
|
|
Automatic variable gauge systems (IC)
|
5.3.4a
|
X
|
X
|
X
|
6.1.3.1a
|
|
Minimum curve radius
|
4.2.3.6
|
X
|
n.a.
|
n.a.
|
-
|
|
Life guards
|
4.2.3.7
|
X
|
n.a.
|
n.a.
|
-
|
|
Braking
|
4.2.4
|
|
|
Functional requirements
|
4.2.4.2.1
|
X
|
X
|
n.a
|
-
|
|
Safety requirements
|
4.2.4.2.2
|
X
|
n.a
|
n.a
|
6.2.3.5
|
|
Type of brake system
|
4.2.4.3
|
X
|
X
|
n.a
|
-
|
|
Brake command
|
4.2.4.4
|
|
|
Emergency braking
|
4.2.4.4.1
|
X
|
X
|
X
|
-
|
|
Service braking
|
4.2.4.4.2
|
X
|
X
|
X
|
-
|
|
Direct braking command
|
4.2.4.4.3
|
X
|
X
|
X
|
-
|
|
Dynamic braking command
|
4.2.4.4.4
|
X
|
X
|
n.a
|
-
|
|
Parking braking command
|
4.2.4.4.5
|
X
|
X
|
X
|
-
|
|
Braking performance
|
4.2.4.5
|
|
|
General requirements
|
4.2.4.5.1
|
X
|
n.a
|
n.a
|
-
|
|
Emergency braking
|
4.2.4.5.2
|
X
|
X
|
X
|
6.2.3.8
|
|
Service braking
|
4.2.4.5.3
|
X
|
X
|
X
|
6.2.3.9
|
|
Calculations related to thermal capacity
|
4.2.4.5.4
|
X
|
n.a
|
n.a
|
-
|
|
Parking brake
|
4.2.4.5.5
|
X
|
n.a
|
n.a
|
-
|
|
Limit of wheel rail adhesion profile
|
4.2.4.6.1
|
X
|
n.a
|
n.a
|
-
|
|
Wheel slide protection system
|
4.2.4.6.2
|
X
|
X
|
n.a
|
6.2.3.10
|
|
Wheel slide protection system (IC)
|
5.3.5
|
X
|
X
|
X
|
6.1.3.2
|
|
Interface with traction - Braking systems linked to traction (electric, hydro-dynamic)
|
4.2.4.7
|
X
|
X
|
X
|
-
|
|
Braking system independent of adhesion conditions
|
4.2.4.8
|
|
|
General
|
4.2.4.8.1.
|
X
|
n.a
|
n.a
|
-
|
|
Magnetic track brake
|
4.2.4.8.2.
|
X
|
X
|
n.a
|
-
|
|
Eddy current track brake
|
4.2.4.8.3
|
X
|
X
|
n.a.
|
-
|
|
Brake state and fault indication
|
4.2.4.9
|
X
|
X
|
X
|
-
|
|
Brake requirements for rescue purposes
|
4.2.4.10
|
X
|
X
|
n.a
|
-
|
|
Passenger related items
|
4.2.5
|
|
|
Sanitary systems
|
4.2.5.1
|
X
|
n.a
|
n.a
|
6.2.3.11
|
|
Audible communication system
|
4.2.5.2
|
X
|
X
|
X
|
-
|
|
Passenger alarm
|
4.2.5.3
|
X
|
X
|
X
|
-
|
|
Passenger alarm – safety requir.
|
4.2.5.3
|
X
|
n.a
|
n.a
|
6.2.3.5
|
|
Communication devices for passengers
|
4.2.5.4
|
X
|
X
|
X
|
-
|
|
Exterior doors: access to and egress from Rolling Stock
|
4.2.5.5
|
X
|
X
|
X
|
-
|
|
Exterior doors – safety requir.
|
4.2.5.5
|
X
|
n.a
|
n.a
|
6.2.3.5
|
|
Exterior door system construction
|
4.2.5.6
|
X
|
n.a
|
n.a
|
-
|
|
inter-unit doors
|
4.2.5.7
|
X
|
X
|
n.a
|
-
|
|
Internal air quality
|
4.2.5.8
|
X
|
n.a
|
n.a
|
6.2.3.12
|
|
Body side windows
|
4.2.5.9
|
X
|
|
|
-
|
|
Environmental conditions and aerodynamic effects
|
4.2.6
|
|
|
Environmental conditions
|
4.2.6.1
|
|
|
Temperature
|
4.2.6.1.1
|
X
|
n.a. X (1)
|
n.a.
|
-
|
|
Snow, ice and hail
|
4.2.6.1.2
|
X
|
n.a. X (1)
|
n.a.
|
-
|
|
(1) Type test if and as defined by the Applicant.
|
|
|
|
Aerodynamic effects
|
4.2.6.2
|
|
|
Slipstream effects on passengers on platform and on workers trackside
|
4.2.6.2.1
|
X
|
X
|
n.a.
|
6.2.3.13
|
|
Head pressure pulse
|
4.2.6.2.2
|
X
|
X
|
n.a.
|
6.2.3.14
|
|
Maximum pressure variations in tunnels
|
4.2.6.2.3
|
X
|
X
|
n.a.
|
6.2.3.15
|
|
Cross wind
|
4.2.6.2.4
|
X
|
n.a
|
n.a.
|
6.2.3.16
|
|
External lights & visible and audible warning devices
|
4.2.7
|
|
|
External front and rear lights
|
4.2.7.1
|
|
|
Head lightsIC
|
4.2.7.1.15.3.6
|
X
|
X
|
n.a
|
-
6.1.3.3
|
|
Marker lightsIC
|
4.2.7.1.2
5.3.7
|
X
|
X
|
n.a
|
-
6.1. 3.4
|
|
Tail lightsIC
|
4.2.7.1.35.3.8
|
X
|
X
|
n.a
|
-6.1.3.5
|
|
Lamp controls
|
4.2.7.1.4
|
X
|
X
|
n.a
|
-
|
|
Horn
|
4.2.7.2
|
|
|
General – warning soundIC
|
4.2.7.2.1
5.3.9
|
X
|
X
|
n.a
|
-
6.1.3.6
|
|
Warning horn sound pressure levels
|
4.2.7.2.25.3.9
|
X
|
X
|
n.a
|
6.2.3.17
6.1.3.6
|
|
Protection
|
4.2.7.2.3
|
X
|
n.a
|
n.a
|
-
|
|
Control
|
4.2.7.2.4
|
X
|
X
|
n.a
|
-
|
|
Traction and electrical equipment
|
4.2.8
|
|
|
Traction performance
|
4.2.8.1
|
|
|
General
|
4.2.8.1.1
|
|
|
Requirements on performance
|
4.2.8.1.2
|
X
|
n.a
|
n.a
|
-
|
|
Power supply
|
4.2.8.2
|
|
|
General
|
4.2.8.2.1
|
X
|
n.a
|
n.a
|
-
|
|
Operation within range of voltages and frequencies
|
4.2.8.2.2
|
X
|
X
|
n.a
|
-
|
|
Regenerative brake with energy to the overhead contact line
|
4.2.8.2.3
|
X
|
X
|
n.a
|
-
|
|
Maximum power and current from the overhead contact line
|
4.2.8.2.4
|
X
|
X
|
n.a
|
6.2.3.18
|
|
Maximum current at standstill for DC systems
|
4.2.8.2.5
|
X
|
X
|
n.a
|
-
|
|
Power factor
|
4.2.8.2.6
|
X
|
X
|
n.a
|
6.2.3.19
|
|
System energy disturbances
|
4.2.8.2.7
|
X
|
X
|
n.a
|
-
|
|
Energy consumption measuring function
|
4.2.8.2.8
|
X
|
X
|
n.a
|
-
|
|
Requirements linked to pantograph
|
4.2.8.2.9
|
X
|
X
|
n.a
|
6.2.3.20 & 21
|
|
Pantograph (IC)
|
5.3.10
|
X
|
X
|
X
|
6.1.3.7
|
|
Contact strips (IC)
|
5.3.11
|
X
|
X
|
X
|
6.1.3.8
|
|
Electrical protection of the trainIC Main circuit breaker
|
4.2.8.2.10
5.3.12
|
X
|
X
|
n.a
|
-
|
|
Diesel and other thermal traction system
|
4.2.8.3
|
-
|
-
|
-
|
Other Directive
|
|
Protection against electrical hazards
|
4.2.8.4
|
X
|
X
|
n.a
|
-
|
|
Cab and operation
|
4.2.9
|
|
|
Driver´s Cab
|
4.2.9.1
|
X
|
n.a
|
n.a
|
-
|
|
General
|
4.2.9.1.1
|
X
|
n.a
|
n.a
|
-
|
|
Access and egress
|
4.2.9.1.2
|
X
|
n.a
|
n.a
|
-
|
|
Access and egress in operating conditions
|
4.2.9.1.2.1
|
X
|
n.a
|
n.a
|
-
|
|
Driver's cab emergency exit
|
4.2.9.1.2.2
|
X
|
n.a
|
n.a
|
-
|
|
External visibility
|
4.2.9.1.3
|
X
|
n.a
|
n.a
|
-
|
|
Front visibility
|
4.2.9.1.3.1
|
X
|
n.a
|
n.a
|
-
|
|
Rear and side view
|
4.2.9.1.3.2
|
X
|
n.a
|
n.a
|
-
|
|
Interior layout
|
4.2.9.1.4
|
X
|
n.a
|
n.a
|
-
|
|
Driver's seatIC
|
4.2.9.1.5
5.3.13
|
X
X
|
n.a
X
|
n.a
X
|
-
|
|
Driver's desk- Ergonomics
|
4.2.9.1.6
|
X
|
n.a
|
n.a
|
-
|
|
Climate control and air quality
|
4.2.9.1.7
|
X
|
X
|
n.a
|
6.2.3.12
|
|
Internal lighting
|
4.2.9.1.8
|
X
|
X
|
n.a
|
-
|
|
Windscreen-Mechanical characteristics
|
4.2.9.2.1
|
X
|
X
|
n.a
|
6.2.3.22
|
|
Windscreen-Optical characteristics
|
4.2.9.2.2
|
X
|
X
|
n.a
|
6.2.3.22
|
|
Windscreen-Equipment
|
4.2.9.2.3
|
X
|
X
|
n.a
|
-
|
|
Driver machine interface
|
4.2.9.3
|
|
|
Driver´s activity control function
|
4.2.9.3.1
|
X
|
X
|
X
|
-
|
|
Speed indication
|
4.2.9.3.2
|
-
|
-
|
-
|
-
|
|
Driver display unit and screens
|
4.2.9.3.3
|
X
|
X
|
n.a
|
-
|
|
Controls and indicators
|
4.2.9.3.4
|
X
|
X
|
n.a
|
-
|
|
Labelling
|
4.2.9.3.5
|
X
|
n.a
|
n.a
|
-
|
|
Radio remote control function by staff for shubting operation
|
4.2.9.3.6
|
X
|
X
|
n.a
|
-
|
|
Onboard tools and portable equipment
|
4.2.9.4
|
X
|
n.a
|
n.a
|
-
|
|
Storage facility for staff personal effects
|
4.2.9.5
|
X
|
n.a
|
n.a
|
-
|
|
Recording device
|
4.2.9.6
|
X
|
X
|
X
|
-
|
|
Fire safety and evacuation
|
4.2.10
|
|
|
General and categorisation
|
4.2.10.1
|
X
|
n.a
|
n.a
|
-
|
|
Mesures to prevent fire
|
4.2.10.2
|
X
|
X
|
n.a
|
-
|
|
Mesures to detect/control fire
|
4.2.10.3
|
X
|
X
|
n.a
|
-
|
|
Requirements related to emergencies
|
4.2.10.4
|
X
|
X
|
n.a
|
-
|
|
Requirements related to evacuation
|
4.2.10.5
|
X
|
X
|
n.a
|
-
|
|
Servicing
|
4.2.11
|
|
|
Cleaning of driver's cab windscreen
|
4.2.11.2
|
X
|
X
|
n.a
|
-
|
|
Connection to toilet discharge systemIC
|
4.2.11.3
5.3.14
|
X
|
n.a
|
n.a
|
-
|
|
Water refilling equipment
|
4.2.11.4
|
X
|
n.a
|
n.a
|
-
|
|
Interface for water refillingIC
|
4.2.11.5
5.3.15
|
X
|
n.a
|
n.a
|
-
|
|
Special requirements for stabling of trains
|
4.2.11.6
|
X
|
X
|
n.a
|
-
|
|
Refuelling equipment
|
4.2.11.7
|
X
|
n.a
|
n.a
|
-
|
|
Train interior cleaning – power supply
|
4.2.11.8
|
X
|
n.a
|
n.a
|
-
|
|
Documentation for operation and maintenance
|
4.2.12
|
|
|
General
|
4.2.12.1
|
X
|
n.a
|
n.a
|
-
|
|
General documentation
|
4.2.12.2
|
X
|
n.a
|
n.a
|
-
|
|
Documentation related to maintenance
|
4.2.12.3
|
X
|
n.a
|
n.a
|
-
|
|
The maintenance design justification file
|
4.2.12.3.1
|
X
|
n.a
|
n.a
|
-
|
|
The Maintenance description file
|
4.2.12.3.2
|
X
|
n.a
|
n.a
|
-
|
|
Operating documentation
|
4.2.12.4
|
X
|
n.a
|
n.a
|
-
|
|
Lifting diagram and instructions
|
4.2.12.4
|
X
|
n.a
|
n.a
|
-
|
|
Rescue related descriptions
|
4.2.12.5
|
X
|
n.a
|
n.a
|
-
|
’;
(91)Appendix I is replaced by the following:
‘APPENDIX I - Aspects for which the technical specification is not available
(open points)
Open points that relate to technical compatibility between the vehicle and the network:
|
Element of the Rolling Stock sub-system
|
Clause of this TSI
|
Technical aspect not covered by this TSI
|
Comments
|
|
Compatibility with train detection systems
|
4.2.3.3.1
|
See specification referenced in Annex J-2, index 1.
|
Open points also identified in the TSI CCS.
|
|
Running dynamic behaviour for 1520 mm track gauge system
|
4.2.3.4.2 4.2.3.4.3
|
Running dynamic behaviour. Equivalent conicity.
|
Normative documents referred to in the TSI are based on experience gained on the 1435 mm system.
|
|
Braking system independent of adhesion conditions
|
4.2.4.8.3
|
Eddy current track brake
|
Equipment not mandatory.
Electromagnetic compatibility with concerned network.
|
|
Aerodynamic effect on ballasted track for RST of design speed >300 km/h
|
4.2.6.2.5
|
Limit value and conformity assessment in order to limit risks induced by the projection of ballast
|
On-going work within CEN.
Open point also in TSI INF.
|
Open points that do not relate to technical compatibility between the vehicle and the network:
|
Element of the Rolling Stock sub-system
|
Clause of this TSI
|
Technical aspect not covered by this TSI
|
Comments
|
|
Fire Containment and Control Systems
|
4.2.10.3.4
|
Conformity assessment of FCCS other than full partitions.
|
Assessment procedure of efficiency for controlling fire and smoke developed by CEN according to a request for standard issued by ERA.
|
’;
(92)Appendix J is replaced by the following:
‘APPENDIX J - Technical specifications referred to in this TSI
J.1
Standards or normative documents
|
|
TSI
|
Normative document
|
|
Index N°
|
Characteristics to be assessed
|
Point
|
Document N°
|
Mandatory points
|
|
1
|
Inner coupling for articulated units
|
4.2.2.2.2
|
EN 12663-1:2010+A1:2014
|
6.5.3, 6.7.5
|
|
2
|
End coupling – manual UIC type – pipes interface
|
4.2.2.2.3
|
EN 15807:2011
|
relevant cl.6
|
|
3
|
End coupling – manual UIC type – end cocks
|
4.2.2.2.3
|
EN 14601:2005+ A1:2010
|
relevant cl.6
|
|
4
|
End coupling – manual UIC type – lateral location of brake pipe and cocks
|
4.2.2.2.3
|
UIC 648:Sept 2001
|
relevant cl.6
|
|
5
|
Rescue coupling - interface with recovery unit
|
4.2.2.2.4
|
UIC 648:Sept 2001
|
relevant cl.6
|
|
6
|
Staff access for coupling and uncoupling – space for shunting staff
|
4.2.2.2.5
|
EN 16839:2017
|
4
|
|
7
|
Strength of vehicle structure – generalcategorisation of rolling stockmethod of verification
|
4.2.2.4
Appendix C
Section C.1
|
EN 12663-1:2010+A1:2014
|
relevant cl.6
5.2
9.2
6.1 – 6.5
|
|
8
|
Passive safety – generalcategorisationscenariosobstacle deflector
|
4.2.2.5
|
FprEN 15227:2017
|
Except Annex A
5-table 1
5-table 3, 6, 6.5
|
|
9
|
Lifting and jacking - geometry of permanent and removable points
|
4.2.2.6
|
EN 16404:2016
|
5.2, 5.3
|
|
10
|
Lifting and jacking - marking
|
4.2.2.6
|
EN 15877-2:2013
|
4.5.17
|
|
11
|
Lifting and jacking - strength method of verification
|
4.2.2.6
|
EN 12663-1:2010+A1:2014
|
6.3.2, 6.3.3, 9.2
|
|
12
|
Fixing of devices to carbody structure
|
4.2.2.7
|
EN 12663-1:2010+A1:2014
|
6.5.2
|
|
13
|
Load conditions and weighed mass – load conditionshypothesis of load conditions
|
4.2.2.10
|
EN 15663:2009
/AC:2010
|
2.1
relevant cl.6
|
|
14
|
Gauging – method, reference contoursverification of eddy current track brakes
verification of pantograph gauge
|
4.2.3.1
4.2.4.8.3(3)
|
EN 15273-2:2013+A1:2016
|
relevant cl 6
relevant cl. 6
A.3.12
|
|
15
|
Axle bearing condition monitoring – zone visible to track side equipment
|
4.2.3.3.2.2
|
EN 15437-1:2009
|
5.1, 5.2
|
|
16
|
Running dynamic behaviour
|
4.2.3.4.2
Appendix C
|
EN 14363:2016
|
relevant cl.6
|
|
17
|
Running dynamic behaviour – limit values for running safety
|
4.2.3.4.2.1
|
EN 14363:2016
|
7.5
|
|
18
|
NOT USED
|
|
19
|
Running dynamic behaviour – track loading limit values
|
4.2.3.4.2.2
|
EN 14363: 2016
|
7.5
|
|
20
|
Structural design of the bogie frame
|
4.2.3.5.1
|
EN 13749:2011
|
6.2,
Annex C
|
|
21
|
Structural design of the bogie frame – body to bogie connection
|
4.2.3.5.1
|
EN 12663-1:2010+A1:2014
|
relevant cl. 6
|
|
22
|
Braking – type of brake system, UIC brake system
|
4.2.4.3
6.2.7a
|
EN 14198:2016
|
5.4
|
|
23
|
Braking performance – calculation – general
|
4.2.4.5.1
|
EN 14531-1:2005 or
EN 14531-6:2009
|
relevant cl.6
|
|
24
|
Braking performance – friction coefficient
|
4.2.4.5.1
|
EN 14531-1:2005
|
5.3.1.4
|
|
25
|
Emergency braking performance – response time / delay timebrake weight percentage
|
4.2.4.5.2
|
EN 14531-1:2005
|
5.3.3
5.12
|
|
26
|
Emergency braking performance – calculation
|
4.2.4.5.2
|
EN 14531-1:2005 or
EN 14531-6:2009
|
relevant cl.6
|
|
27
|
Emergency braking performance – friction coefficient
|
4.2.4.5.2
|
EN 14531-1:2005
|
5.3.1.4
|
|
28
|
Service braking performance – calculation
|
4.2.4.5.3
|
EN 14531-1:2005 or
EN 14531-6:2009
|
relevant cl.6
|
|
29
|
Parking brake performance – calculation
|
4.2.4.5.5
|
EN 14531-1:2005 or
EN 14531-6:2009
|
relevant cl.6
|
|
30
|
Wheel slide protection system – designverification methodwheel rotation monitoring system
|
4.2.4.6.2
|
EN 15595:2009+A1:2011
|
4
5, 6
4.2.4.3
|
|
31
|
Magnetic track brake
|
4.2.4.8.2
|
EN 16207:2014
|
Annex C
|
|
32
|
Door obstacle detection – sensitivitymaximum force
|
4.2.5.5.3
|
EN 14752:2015
|
5.2.1.4.1
5.2.1.4.2.2
|
|
33
|
Door emergency opening – manual force to open the door
|
4.2.5.5.9
|
EN 14752:2015
|
5.5.1.5
|
|
34
|
Environmental conditions – temperature
|
4.2.6.1.1
|
EN 50125-1:2014
|
4.3
|
|
35
|
Environmental conditions – snow, ice and hail conditions
|
4.2.6.1.2
|
EN 50125-1:2014
|
4.7
|
|
36
|
Environmental conditions – obstacle deflector
|
4.2.6.1.2
|
EN 15227:2008
+A1:2011
|
relevant cl.6
|
|
37
|
Aerodynamic effects –crosswind method of verification
|
4.2.6.2.4.
|
EN 14067-6:2010
|
5
|
|
38
|
Head lights – colourdimmed headlamp luminous intensityfull-beam headlamp luminous intensity alignment
|
4.2.7.1.1
|
EN 15153-1:2013+A1:2016
|
5.3.3
5.3.4 table 2 first line
5.3.4 table 2 first line
5.3.5
|
|
39
|
Marker lights – colourspectral radiation distributionluminous intensity
|
4.2.7.1.2
|
EN 15153-1:2013+A1:2016
|
5.4.3.1 table 4
5.4.3.2
5.4.4
table 6
|
|
40
|
Tail lights – colourluminous intensity
|
4.2.7.1.3
|
EN 15153-1:2013+A1:2016
|
5.5.3
table 7
5.5.4
table 8
|
|
41
|
Warning horn sound pressure levels
|
4.2.7.2.2
|
EN 15153-2:2013+A1:2016
|
5.2.2
|
|
42
|
Regenerative brake with energy to the overhead contac tline
|
4.2.8.2.3
|
EN 50388:2012 and EN 50388:2012/AC:2013
|
12.1.1
|
|
43
|
Maximum power and current from the overhead contact line – automatic regulation of current
|
4.2.8.2.4
|
EN 50388:2012 and EN 50388:2012/AC:2013
|
7.2
|
|
44
|
Power factor – verification method
|
4.2.8.2.6
|
EN 50388:2012 and EN 50388:2012/AC:2013
|
6
|
|
45
|
System energy disturbances for AC systems – harmonics and dynamic effectscompatibility study
|
4.2.8.2.7
|
EN 50388:2012 and EN 50388:2012/AC:2013
|
10.1
10.3
Table 5
Annex D
10.4
|
|
46
|
Working range in height of pantograph (IC level) – characteristics
|
4.2.8.2.9.1.2
|
EN 50206-1:2010
|
4.2, 6.2.3
|
|
47
|
Pantograph head geometry
|
4.2.8.2.9.2
|
EN 50367:2012 and EN 50367:2012/AC:2013
|
5.3.2.2
|
|
48
|
Pantograph head geometry – type 1600 mm
|
4.2.8.2.9.2.1
|
EN 50367:2012 and EN 50367:2012/AC:2013
|
Annex A.2 Figure A.6
|
|
49
|
Pantograph head geometry – type 1950 mm
|
4.2.8.2.9.2.2
|
EN 50367:2012 and EN 50367:2012/AC:2013
|
Annex A.2 Figure A.7
|
|
50
|
Pantograph current capacity (IC level)
|
4.2.8.2.9.3
|
EN 50206-1:2010
|
6.13.2
|
|
51
|
Pantograph lowering (RST level) – time to lower the pantographADD
|
4.2.8.2.9.10
|
EN 50206-1:2010
|
4.7
4.8
|
|
52
|
Pantograph lowering (RST level) – dynamic insulating distance
|
4.2.8.2.9.10
|
EN 50119:2009 and EN 50119:2009/A1:2013
|
Table 2
|
|
53
|
Electrical protection of the train – coordination of protection
|
4.2.8.2.10
|
EN 50388:2012 and EN 50388:2012/AC:2013
|
11
|
|
54
|
Protection against electrical hazard
|
4.2.8.4
|
EN 50153:2014
|
relevant cl.6
|
|
55
|
Windscreen – mechanical characteristics
|
4.2.9.2.1
|
EN 15152:2007
|
4.2.7, 4.2.9
|
|
56
|
Windscreen –primary/secondary imagesoptical distorsionhazeluminous transmittancechromaticity
|
4.2.9.2.2
|
EN 15152:2007
|
4.2.2
4.2.3
4.2.4
4.2.5
4.2.6
|
|
57
|
Recording device – functional requirementsrecording performanceintegritydata integrity safeguardlevel of protection
|
4.2.9.6
|
EN/IEC 62625-1:2013
|
4.2.1, 4.2.2, 4.2.3, 4.2.4
4.3.1.2.2
4.3.1. 4
4.3.1.5
4.3.1.7
|
|
58
|
Measures to prevent fire – material requirements of rolling stock,except passenger seats
Measures to prevent fire – material requirements of rolling stock,except passenger seats
|
4.2.10.2.1
|
EN 45545-2:2013+A1:2015
EN 16989:2018
|
relevant cl.6
relevant cl. 6
|
|
59
|
Specific measures for flammable liquids
|
4.2.10.2.2
|
EN 45545-2:2013+A1:2015
|
Table 5
|
|
60
|
Fire spreading protection measures for passenger rolling stock – partition test
|
4.2.10.3.4
|
EN 1363-1:2012
|
relevant cl 6
|
|
61
|
Fire spreading protection measures for passenger rolling stock – partition test
|
4.2.10.3.5
|
EN 1363-1:2012
|
relevant cl.6
|
|
62
|
Emergency lighting – lighting level
|
4.2.10.4.1
|
EN 13272:2012
|
5.3
|
|
63
|
Running capability
|
4.2.10.4.4
|
EN 50553:2012 and EN 50553:2012/AC:2013
|
relevant cl.6
|
|
64
|
Interface for water filling
|
4.2.11.5
|
EN 16362:2013
|
4.1.2
figure 1
|
|
65
|
Special requirements for stabling of trains – local external auxiliary power supply
|
4.2.11.6
|
EN/IEC 60309-2:1999 and amendments EN 60309-2:1999/A11:2004, A1: 2007 and A2:2012
|
relevant cl.6
|
|
66
|
Automatic centre buffer coupler – type 10
|
5.3.1
|
EN 16019:2014
|
relevant cl.6
|
|
67
|
Manual end coupling – UIC type
|
5.3.2
|
EN 15551:2017
|
relevant cl.6
|
|
68
|
Manual end coupling – UIC type
|
5.3.2
|
EN 15566:2016
|
relevant cl.6
|
|
69
|
Rescue coupler
|
5.3.3
|
EN 15020:2006
+A1:2010
|
relevant cl.6
|
|
70
|
Main circuit breaker – coordination of protection
|
5.3.12
|
EN 50388:2012 and EN 50388:2012/AC:2013
|
11
|
|
71
|
Wheels – verification methoddecision criteriafurther verification methodthermomechanical behaviour
|
6.1.3.1
|
EN 13979-1:2003
+A2:2011
|
7.2.1, 7.2.2
7.2.3
7.3
6
|
|
72
|
Wheel slide protection – method of verificationtest programme
|
6.1.3.2
|
EN 15595:2009+A1:2011
|
5
only 6.2.3 of 6.2
|
|
73
|
Head lamps – colourluminous intensity
|
6.1.3.3
|
EN 15153-1:2013+A1:2016
|
6.3
6.4
|
|
74
|
Marker lamps – colourluminous intensity
|
6.1.3.4
|
EN 15153-1:2013+A1:2016
|
6.3
6.4
|
|
75
|
Tail lamps – colour luminous intensity
|
6.1.3.5
|
EN 15153-1:2013+A1:2016
|
6.3
6.4
|
|
76
|
Horn – soundingsound pressure level
|
6.1.3.6
|
EN 15153-2:2013+A1:2016
|
6
6
|
|
77
|
Pantograph – static contact force
|
6.1.3.7
|
EN 50367:2012 and EN 50367:2012/AC:2013
|
7.2
|
|
78
|
Pantograph - limit value
|
6.1.3.7
|
EN 50119:2009 and EN 50119:2009/A1:2013
|
5.1.2
|
|
79
|
Pantograph – verification method
|
6.1.3.7
|
EN 50206-1:2010
|
6.3.1
|
|
80
|
Pantograph – dynamic behaviour
|
6.1.3.7
|
EN 50318:2002
|
relevant cl.6
|
|
81
|
Pantograph – interaction characteristics
|
6.1.3.7
|
EN 50317:2012 and EN 50317:2012/AC:2012
|
relevant cl.6
|
|
82
|
Contact strips – verification method
|
6.1.3.8
|
EN 50405:2015
|
7.2, 7.3
7.4, 7.6
7.7
|
|
83
|
Safety against derailment running on twisted track
|
6.2.3.3
|
EN 14363:2016
|
4, 5, 6.1
|
|
84
|
Running dynamic behaviour – method of verificationassessment of criteriaconditions of assessment
|
6.2.3.4
|
EN 14363:2016
|
4, 5, 7
|
|
85
|
Equivalent conicity – rail section definitions
|
6.2.3.6
|
EN 13674-1:2011
|
relevant cl.6
|
|
86
|
Equivalent conicity – wheel profile definitions
|
6.2.3.6
|
EN 13715:2006+A1:2010
|
relevant cl.6
|
|
87
|
Wheelset – assembly
|
6.2.3.7
|
EN 13260:2009
+A1:2010
|
3.2.1
|
|
88
|
Wheelset – Powered and non-powered axles, method of verification, decision criteria
|
6.2.3.7
|
EN 13103-1:2017
|
5, 6
7
|
|
89
|
NOT USED
|
|
90
|
Axle boxes/bearings
|
6.2.3.7
|
EN 12082:2007+A1:2010
|
6
|
|
91
|
Emergency braking performance
|
6.2.3.8
|
EN 14531-1:2005
|
5.11.3
|
|
92
|
Service braking performance
|
6.2.3.9
|
EN 14531-1:2005
|
5.11.3
|
|
93
|
Wheel slide protection, method of verification of performance
|
6.2.3.10
|
EN 15595:2009+A1:2011
|
6.4
|
|
94
|
Slipstream effect – full scale tests – simplified assessment
|
6.2.3.13
|
EN 14067-4:2013
|
6.2.2.1
4.2.4 and table 7
|
|
95
|
Head pressure pulse – method of verificationCFDMoving model – simplified assessment method
|
6.2.3.14
|
EN 14067-4:2013
|
6.1.2.1
6.1.2.4
6.1.2.2
4.1.4 and table 4
|
|
96
|
Maximum pressure variations - distance xp between the entrance portal and the measuring position, the definitions of ΔpFr, ΔpN, ΔpT, the minimum tunnel length
|
6.2.3.15
|
EN 14067-5:2006
+A1:2010
|
relevant cl.6
|
|
97
|
Horn – sound pressure level
|
6.2.3.17
|
EN 15153-2:2013+A1:2016
|
5
|
|
98
|
Maximum power and current from the overhead contact line – method of verification
|
6.2.3.18
|
EN 50388:2012 and EN 50388:2012/AC:2013
|
15.3
|
|
99
|
Power factor - method of verification
|
6.2.3.19
|
EN 50388:2012 and EN 50388:2012/AC:2013
|
15.2
|
|
100
|
Current collection dynamic behaviour – dynamic tests
|
6.2.3.20
|
EN 50317:2012 and EN 50317:2012/AC:2012
|
relevant cl.6
|
|
101
|
Windscreen – characteristics
|
6.2.3.22
|
EN 15152:2007
|
6.2.1 to 6.2.7
|
|
102
|
Structural strength
|
Appendix C
Section C.1
|
EN 12663-2:2010
|
5.2.1-5.2.4
|
|
103
|
NOT USED
|
|
104
|
NOT USED
|
|
105
|
NOT USED
|
|
106
|
NOT USED
|
|
107
|
Design values for new wheel profiles – evaluation of the equivalent conicity
|
6.2.3.6
|
EN 14363:2016
|
Annexes O and P
|
|
108
|
Slipstream effects – Requirements
|
4.2.6.2.1
|
EN 14067-4:2013
|
4.2.2.1, 4.2.2.2, 4.2.2.3 and 4.2.2.4
|
|
109
|
Head pressure pulse – Requirements
|
4.2.6.2.2
|
EN 14067-4:2013
|
4.1.2
|
|
110
|
End coupling – Compatibility between units –manual UIC type
|
4.2.2.2.3
|
EN 16839:2017
|
5, 6
7, 8
|
|
111
|
‘Single pole’ power supply line
|
4.2.11.6
|
CLC/TS 50534:2010
|
Annex A
|
|
112
|
Communication protocols
|
4.2.12.2
|
IEC 61375
|
relevant cl. (1)
|
|
113
|
Gangways-Flange intercommunication connections
|
6.2.7a
|
EN 16286-1:2013
|
Annexes A and B
|
|
114
|
Physical interface between units for the signal transmission
|
6.2.7a
|
UIC 558, January 1996
|
Plate 2
|
|
115
|
Marking: length over buffers and electric power supply
|
6.2.7a
|
EN 15877-2:2013
|
4.5.5.1
4.5.6.3
|
|
116
|
On-board location function-Requirements
|
4.2.8.2.8.1
|
EN 50463-3:2017
|
4.4
|
|
117
|
Accuracy of energy measurement function for active energy measurement:
Requirements
Class designations
Assessment methodology
|
4.2.8.2.8.2
6.2.3.19b
|
EN 50463-2:2017
|
4.2.3.1 and 4.2.3.4
4.3.3.4, 4.3.4.3 and 4.4.4.2
5.4.3.4.1, 5.4.3.4.2, 5.4.4.3.1, Table 3, 5.4.3.4.3.1 and 5.4.4.3.2.1
|
|
118
|
Energy measurement function: consumption point identification - Definition
|
4.2.8.2.8.3
|
EN 50463-1:2017
|
4.2.5.2
|
|
119
|
Interface protocols between on-board energy measurement system (EMS) and on-ground data collection system (DCS) - Requirements
|
4.2.8.2.8.4
|
EN 50463-4:2017
|
4.3.3.1, 4.3.3.3, 4.3.4, 4.3.5, 4.3.6 and 4.3.7
|
|
120
|
Energy measurement function: mean temperature coefficient of each device - Assessment methodology
|
6.2.3.19b
|
EN 50463-2:2017
|
5.4.3.4.3.2 and 5.4.4.3.2.2
|
|
121
|
The compiling and handling of data within the data handing system-Assessment methodology
|
6.2.3.19b
|
EN 50463-3:2017
|
5.4.8.3, 5.4.8.5 and 5.4.8.6
|
|
122
|
On- board energy measurement system-Tests
|
6.2.3.19b
|
EN 50463-5:2017
|
5.3.3 and 5.5.4
|
6clauses of the standard that are in direct relationship to the requirement expressed in the clause of the TSI indicated in column 3.
J.2
Technical documents (available on ERA website)
|
|
TSI
|
ERA technical document
|
|
Index N°
|
Characteristics to be assessed
|
Point
|
Mandatory ref
Document N°
|
Points
|
|
1
|
Interface between control-command signalling trackside and other subsytems
|
4.2.3.3.1
|
ERA/ERTMS/033281 rev 4.0
|
3.1 & 3.2
|
|
2
|
Friction elements for wheel tread brake for freight wagons
|
7.1.4.2
|
ERA/TD/2013-02/INT v.3.0
|
All
|
’;
ANNEX V
The Annex to Regulation (EU) 1303/2014 is amended as follows:
(1)in Sections 1.1, 3, 4.1, 4.4 and 6.2.5 the references to "Directive 2008/57/EC" are replaced by references to "Directive (EU) 2016/797";
(2)in section 1.1.1(a), "European Union rail network" is replaced by "network of the Union rail system";
(3)in section 1.1.3.1"European Union rail" is replaced by "network of the Union rail";
(4)section 1.1.4 is modified as follows:
“1.1.4 Risk scope
1.1.4.1. Risks covered by this TSI
(a)This TSI covers only specific risks to the safety of passengers and on-board staff in tunnels for the subsystems above.
(b)Where a risk analysis comes to the conclusion that other tunnel incidents might be of relevance, specific measures to deal with these scenarios shall be defined.
1.1.4.2. Risks not covered by this TSI
(a)Risks not covered by this TSI are as follows:
(1)Health and safety of staff involved in maintenance of the fixed installations in tunnels.
(2)Financial loss due to damage to structures and trains, and consequently the losses resulting from non-availability of the tunnel for repairs.
(3)Trespass into the tunnel through the tunnel portals.
(4)Terrorism, as a deliberate and premeditated act which is designed to cause wanton destruction, injury and loss of life.
(5)Risks for people in the neighbourhood of a tunnel where collapse of the structure could have catastrophic consequences.”
(5)section 1.2 is replaced as follows:
"1.2 Geographical scope
The geographical scope of this TSI is the network of the Union rail system as described in Annex I of Directive (EU) 2016/797 with the exclusion of the cases referred to in Section 1(3) and 1(4) of Directive (EU) 2016/797";
(6)"fire fighting point(s)" is replaced by "evacuation and rescue point(s)" in sections 1.1.1(b), 2.2.1(b), 2.4(c), 4.2.1.7, 4.2.3, 4.4.1(c), 4.4.2(a), 4.4.6;
(7)in point (b) of Section 2.2.3, the text "panic and to" is deleted;
(8)In point (c) (1) of Section 2.3, the text "inside the tunnel" is deleted;
(9)point (f) of Section 2.3 " is replaced as follows:
"If the expectations of the emergency response services expressed in emergency plans go beyond the assumptions described above, the need for additional measures or tunnel equipment can be considered.";
(10)in Section 2.4, a definition (b1) "Final place of safety" is added as follows:
"(b1) Final place of safety: the final place of safety is the place where passengers and staff will no longer be impacted by the effects of the initial incident (e.g. smoke opacity and toxicity, temperature). It is the termination point of the evacuation.";
(11)point 2.4(c) is replaced as follows:
"(c) Evacuation and rescue point: an evacuation and rescue point is a defined location, inside or outside the tunnel, where fire fighting equipment can be used by the emergency response services and where passengers and staff can evacuate from a train.";
(12)a definition (g) “CSM on risk assessment” is added as follows:
"(g) CSM on risk assessment: this term is used to designate the Annex I of the Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) No 402/2013 of 30 April 2013 on the common safety method for risk evaluation and assessment and repealing Regulation (EC) No 352/2009"
(13)section 3 is replaced as follows:
3.
Essential requirements
(a)The following table indicates basic parameters of this TSI and their correspondence to the essential requirements as set out and numbered in Annex III to Directive (EU) 2016/797.
(b)For meeting the essential requirements, the corresponding parameters of sections 4.2.1, 4.2.2 and 4.2.3 shall apply.
3.1
Infrastructure and energy subsystems
(a)In order to meet the essential requirement ‘Safety’ applying to the Infrastructure and Energy subsystems, the CSM on risk assessment may be applied as an alternative to the corresponding parameters of sections 4.2.1 and 4.2.2.
(b)Accordingly, for the risks identified in point 1.1.4 and the scenarios listed in point 2.2, the risk can be assessed by:
(1)a comparison with a reference system,
(2)an explicit risk estimation and evaluation.
(c)For meeting the essential requirements other than ‘Safety’, the corresponding parameters of sections 4.2.1 and 4.2.2 shall apply.
|
Element of the infrastructure sub-system
|
Ref. Clause
|
Safety
|
Reliability Availa-bility
|
Health
|
Environ-mental protection
|
Technical compati-bility
|
Accessi-bility
|
|
Prevent unauthorised access to emergency exits and technical rooms
|
4.2.1.1.
|
2.1.1
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Fire resistance of tunnel structures
|
4.2.1.2.
|
1.1.4
2.1.1
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Fire reaction of building material
|
4.2.1.3.
|
1.1.4
2.1.1
|
|
1.3.2
|
1.4.2
|
|
|
|
Fire detection
|
4.2.1.4.
|
1.1.4
2.1.1
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Evacuation facilities
|
4.2.1.5.
|
1.1.5
2.1.1
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Escape walkways
|
4.2.1.6.
|
2.1.1
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Evacuation and rescue points
|
4.2.1.7
except (b)
|
2.1.1
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Evacuation and rescue points
|
4.2.1.7 (b)
|
|
|
|
|
1.5
|
|
|
Emergency communication
|
4.2.1.8.
|
2.1.1
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Power supply for emergency response services
|
4.2.1.9
|
2.1.1
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Reliability of electrical installations
|
4.2.1.10
|
2.1.1
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Element of the energy sub-system
|
Ref. Clause
|
Safety
|
Reliability Availa-bility
|
Health
|
Environ-mental protection
|
Technical compati-bility
|
Accessi-bility
|
|
Sectioning of contact line
|
4.2.2.1.
|
2.2.1
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Earthing of contact line
|
4.2.2.2.
|
2.2.1
|
|
|
|
|
|
3.2
Rolling stock subsystem
(a)a. For meeting the essential requirements, the corresponding parameters of section 4.2.3 shall apply.
|
Element of the rolling stock
sub-system
|
Ref. Clause
|
Safety
|
Reliability Availa-bility
|
Health
|
Environ-mental protection
|
Technical compati-bility
|
Accessi-bility
|
|
Measures to prevent fire
|
4.2.3.1
|
1.1.4
2.4.1
|
|
1.3.2
|
1.4.2
|
|
|
|
Measures to detect and control fire
|
4.2.3.2
|
1.1.4
2.4.1
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Requirements related to emergencies
|
4.2.3.3
|
2.4.1
|
2.4.2
|
|
|
1.5
2.4.3
|
|
|
Requirements related to evacuation
|
4.2.3.4
|
2.4.1
|
|
|
|
|
|
(14)in section 4.1, "European Union rail system" is replaced by "Union rail system";
(15)section 4.2.1.2(b) is deleted;
(16)section 4.2.1.3 is replaced as follows:
"4.2.1.3 This specification applies to all tunnels.
(a)This specification applies to construction products and building elements inside tunnels. These products shall fulfil the requirements of Commission Regulation (EU) 2016/364:
(1)Tunnel building material shall fulfil the requirements of classification A2
(2)Non-structural panels and other equipment shall fulfil the requirements of classification B.
(3)Exposed cables shall have the characteristics of low flammability, low fire spread, low toxicity and low smoke density.
(b)Materials that would not contribute significantly to a fire load shall be listed. They are allowed to not comply with the above.";
(17)section 4.2.1.4(a) is replaced as follows:
"(a) Fire in technical rooms shall be detected in order to alert the infrastructure manager.";
(18)section 4.2.1.5.2(b3) is deleted;
(1)in section 4.2.1.5.4, the terms "on escape routes" and "as low as possible," are deleted and point (c) is replaced as follows:
"(c) Autonomy and reliability: an alternative electricity supply shall be available for an appropriate period of time after failure of the main supply. The time required shall be consistent with the evacuation scenarios and reported in the Emergency Plan.";
(2)In section 4.2.1.5.5, point (f), the term "cross-passages" is replaced by "cross-passage";
(3)in section 4.2.1.6 point (a), the term "top" is replaced by "bottom";
(4)section 4.2.1.7 is modified as follows:
(a)in point (a1) the terms "length of the train" are replaced by the terms "length of the passenger train";
(b)in point (a2) the terms "safe space" are replaced by "open air area" and the terms "along a safe space" are deleted;
(5)table in 4.2.1.7 is replaced as follows:
|
Rolling stock category according to paragraph 4.2.3
|
Maximum distance from the portals to an evacuation and rescue point and between evacuation and rescue points
|
|
Category A
|
5 km
|
|
Category B
|
20 km
|
(6)in point 4 of point (c) of section 4.2.1.7 is replaced as follows:
"It shall be possible to switch off and earth the contact line, either locally or remotely";
(7)a new section 4.2.1.9 is added with the following text:
“4.2.1.9 Electricity supply for emergency response services
This specification applies to all tunnels of more than 1 km length.
(a)The electricity supply system in the tunnel shall be suitable for the emergency response services equipment in accordance with the emergency plan for the tunnel. Some national emergency response services groups may be self-sufficient in relation to electricity supply. In this case, the option of not providing electricity supply facilities for the use of such groups may be appropriate. Such a decision, however, must be described in the emergency plan. ”
(8)a new section 4.2.1.10 is added with the following text:
“4.2.10 Reliability of electrical systems
This specification applies to all tunnels of more than 1 km length.
(a)Electrical systems identified by the Infrastructure Manager as vital to the safety of passengers in the tunnel shall be kept in use as long as necessary according to the evacuation scenarios considered in the emergency plan.
(b)Autonomy and reliability: an alternative power supply shall be available for an appropriate period of time after failure of the main power supply. The time required shall be consistent with the evacuation scenarios considered and included in the emergency plan.”
(9)a new section 4.2.1.11 is added with the following text:
“4.2.1.11. Communication and lighting at switching locations
This specification applies to all tunnels of more than 1 km in length.
(a)When the contact line is divided into sections that can be locally switched, a means of communication and lighting shall be provided at the switching location”.
(10)section 4.2.2.1 is replaced as follows:
“4.2.2.1. Sectioning of contact line
This specification applies to all tunnels of more than 1 km length.
(a)The traction power supply system in tunnels may be divided into sections.
(b)In such case, it shall be possible to switch off each section of the contact line, either locally or remotely.”;
(11)in section 4.2.2.2, the term "Overhead line or conductor rail earthing" is replaced by "Earthing of contact line". The point c and the term "operations" in point b are deleted.
(12)section 4.2.2.3 is deleted;
(13)section 4.2.2.4 is deleted;
(14)section 4.2.2.5. is deleted;
(15)in the table in section 4.3.1 the reference to clause "4.2.2.4(a)" is replaced by a reference to clause "4.2.1.3";
(16)in the table in section 4.3.2 the terms "specific elements for train crew and auxiliary staff" and "4.6.3.2.3" are deleted;
(17)section 4.4.2 is replaced as follows:
“These rules apply to tunnels of more than 1 km in length
(a)An emergency plan shall be developed under the direction of the Infrastructure Manager(s), in co-operation with the emergency response services and the relevant authorities for each tunnel. Station managers shall be equally involved if one or more stations are used as a safe area or an evacuation and rescue point. Railway Undertakings already operating in the tunnel must be consulted. In case the emergency plan concerns a new tunnel, Railway Undertakings planning to operate in the tunnel may be consulted
(b)The emergency plan shall be consistent with the self-rescue, evacuation, fire-fighting and rescue facilities available.
(c)Detailed tunnel-specific incident scenarios adapted to the local tunnel conditions shall be developed for the emergency plan.
(d)Once developed, the emergency plan shall be communicated to Railway Undertakings intending to use the tunnel”
(18)section 4.4.4. is modified as follows:
“4.4.4.
Switching off and Earthing procedures
These rules apply to all tunnels.
(a)In the case it is required to switch off the traction power supply system the infrastructure manager shall make sure that relevant sections of the contact line have been switched off, and inform the emergency response services before they enter the tunnel or a section of the tunnel.
(b)It is the responsibility of the infrastructure manager to switch off the traction power supply.
(c)Procedures and responsibilities for earthing of the contact shall be defined between the Infrastructure Manager and the emergency response services, and reported in the emergency plan. Provision shall be made for switching off the section in which the incident has taken place.”
(19)In Section 4.4.6.(a) the text “in the Register of Infrastructure defined in clause 4.8.1 and” is deleted
(20)In Section 4.4.6.(c) the text "panic and" is deleted;
(21)Section 4.8 is deleted;
(22)Section 6.2.5 is modified as follows:
(a)"Article 18(3)" is replaced by "Article 15(4)”;
(b)"a notified body" is replaced by "the applicant";
(23)Section 6.2.6 is replaced as follows:
"6.2.6. Assessment of conformity for the Safety requirements applying to the Infrastructure and Energy subsystems
(a)This clause applies when a comparison with a reference system or an explicit risk estimation is used to meet the essential requirement ‘Safety’ applying to the Infrastructure and Energy subsystems.
(b)In such case, the applicant shall:
(1)determine the risk acceptance principle, the methodology for the risk assessment, the safety requirements to be fulfilled by the system and the demonstration that they are fulfilled;
(2)determine the risk acceptance levels with the relevant national authority/authorities;
(3)designate the independent assessment body as defined in the CSM on risk assessment. This assessment body can be the notified body selected for the Infrastructure or Energy subsystem if recognised or accredited as per Section 7 of the CSM on risk assessment.
(c)A safety assessment report shall be provided in compliance with the requirements defined in the CSM on risk assessment.
(d)The EC certificate issued by the notified body shall explicitly mention the risk acceptance principle used for meeting the ‘Safety’ requirement of this TSI. It shall also mention the methodology applied for the risk assessment and the risk acceptance levels."
(24)Section 6.2.7 is modified as follows:
Section 6.2.7.1. is deleted: "Prevent unauthorised access to emergency exits and equipment rooms The assessment shall confirm that: (a) Emergency exit doors to the surface and doors to technical rooms are provided with suitable locks (b)The locks provided are consistent with the overall strategy for security for the tunnel and adjacent infrastructure (c) Emergency exits are not lockable from the inside and shall be able to be opened by evacuating persons (d) Access arrangements are in place for the emergency response services" is replaced by "not used"
Section 6.2.7.2. (a)(2) is deleted
In section 6.2.7.3. (a), the term "4.2.1.3 (c)" is replaced by "4.2.1.3 (b)"
Section 6.2.7.4. (b) is deleted
Section 6.2.7.5. is replaced by the following text:
"6.2.7.5. Emergency lighting in upgraded/renewed tunnels
In case of upgraded/renewed tunnels as required by clause 7.2.2.1, the assessment consists in the verification of the existence of the lighting. It is not necessary to apply detailed requirements."
In section 6.2.7.6, the term "installations" is replaced by "systems" and the reference to clause "4.2.2.5" is replaced by a reference to clause "4.2.1.11."
(25)Section 7(b) is modified as follows:
The terms "suitable for safe integration in accordance with Section 15(1) of Directive 2008/57/EC with all non-TSI compliant tunnels within the geographical scope of this TSI." is replaced by "technically compatible with all non-TSI compliant tunnels within the geographical scope of this TSI in accordance with Article 21(3) of Directive (EU) 2016/797.";
(26)Section 7.1.1.(b) is modified as follows:
"In the latter case Article 24 and 25 of Directive 2008/57/EC apply." is deleted;
(27)Section 7.2.2 is replaced as follows:
"7.2.2. Upgrade and renewal measures for tunnels
In case of the upgrade or renewal of a tunnel, according to Article 15(7) and Annex IV of Directive (EU) 2016/797, the notified body issues certificates of verification for those parts of the subsystem composing the tunnel under the scope of the upgrade or renewal.";
7.2.2.1. Upgrade or renewal of a tunnel
(a)A tunnel is considered to be upgraded or renewed in the context of this TSI when any major modification or substitution work are carried out on a subsystem (or part of it) composing the tunnel.
(b)Assemblies and components that are not included in the scope of a particular upgrade or renewal programme do not have to be made compliant at the time of such a programme.
(c)When upgrading or renewal works are carried out, the following parameters apply if they are in the scope of work:
4.2.1.1. Prevent unauthorised access to emergency exits and technical rooms
4.2.1.3. Fire reaction of building material
4.2.1.4. Fire detection in technical rooms
4.2.1.5.4 Emergency lighting: where provided, it is not necessary to apply detailed requirements
4.2.1.5.5 Escape signage
4.2.1.8. Emergency communication
(d)The tunnel emergency plan shall be revised.
7.2.2.2. Extension of a tunnel
(a)A tunnel is considered to be extended in the context of this TSI when its geometry is affected (e.g. extension in length, connection to another tunnel).
(b)When a tunnel extension is carried out, then the following measures shall be implemented for assemblies and components included in the extension. For their application, the tunnel length to consider is the total tunnel length after extension:
4.2.1.1. Prevent unauthorised access to emergency exits and technical rooms
4.2.1.2. Fire resistance of tunnel structures
4.2.1.3. Fire reaction of building material
4.2.1.4. Fire detection in technical rooms
4.2.1.5.4 Emergency lighting
4.2.1.5.5 Escape signage
4.2.1.6. Escape walkways
4.2.1.8. Emergency communication
4.2.1.9. Electricity supply for emergency response services
4.2.1.11. Reliability of electrical installations
4.2.1.10. Reliability of electrical systems
4.2.1.11 Communication and lighting at switching locations
4.2.2.1. Sectioning of contact line
4.2.2.2. Earthing of contact line
(c)The CSM on risk assessment shall be implemented as described in point 6.2.6 for defining the relevance of applying other measures of clause 4.2.1.5 and the measures of clause 4.2.1.7 to the complete tunnel resulting from the extension.
(d)When applicable, The tunnel emergency plan shall be revised.";
(28)section 7.4.1 is replaced by the following:
‘7.4.1. General
(1)The specific cases, as listed in the following clause, describe special provisions that are needed and authorised on particular networks of each Member State.
(2)These specific cases are classified as ‘T’ cases: ‘temporary’ cases: the target system shall be reached by 31 December 2025.
(3)Any specific case applicable to rolling stock within the scope of this TSI in detailed in the LOC&PAS TSI.’;
(29)Table of appendix B is replaced as follows:
|
Characteristics to be assessed
|
Step of the project
|
Particular assessment procedures
|
|
|
Design
review
|
Assembly before putting into service
|
|
|
|
1
|
2
|
3
|
|
4.2.1.1. Prevent unauthorised access to emergency exits and technical rooms
|
X
|
X
|
|
|
4.2.1.2. Fire resistance of tunnel structures
|
X
|
|
6.2.7.2
|
|
4.2.1.3. Fire reaction of building material
|
X
|
|
6.2.7.3
|
|
4.2.1.4. Fire detection in technical rooms
|
X
|
X
|
|
|
4.2.1.5. Evacuation facilities
|
X
|
X
|
6.2.7.4
6.2.7.5
|
|
4.2.1.6. Escape walkways
|
X
|
X
|
|
|
4.2.1.7 Evacuation and rescue points
|
X
|
X
|
|
|
4.2.1.8 Emergency communication
|
X
|
|
|
|
4.2.1.9.
Electricity supply for emergency response services
|
X
|
|
|
|
4.2.1.10. Reliability of electrical systems
|
X
|
|
6.2.7.6
|
|
4.2.2.1. Sectioning of contact line
|
X
|
X
|
|
|
4.2.2.2. Earthing of contact line
|
X
|
X
|
|
’.
ANNEX VI
The Annex to Regulation (EU) 2016/919 is amended as follows:
(1)Section 1.1 is amended as follows:
(a)in the second subparagraph, the text ‘Annex I points 1.2 and 2.2 of Directive 2008/57/EC’ is replaced by the text ‘Annex I point 2 of Directive (EU) 2016/797’;
(b)points (1) to (4) are replaced by the following:
‘(1)locomotives and passenger rolling stock, including thermal or electric traction units, self-propelling thermal or electric passenger trains, and passenger coach, if equipped with a driving cab.
(2)special vehicles, such as on-track machines, if equipped with a driving cab and intended to be used in transport mode on its own wheels.
This list of vehicles shall include those which are specially designed to operate on the different types of high-speed lines described in point 1.2. (Geographical scope).’;
(2)Section 1.2 is replaced by the following:
‘1.2.
Geographical Scope
The geographical scope of this TSI is the network of the whole rail system, as described in Annex I point 1 of Directive (EU) 2016/797 and excludes the infrastructure cases referred to in Articles 1(3) and 1(4) of Directive (EU) 2016/797.
The TSI shall apply to networks with 1435 mm, 1520 mm, 1524 mm, 1600 mm and 1668 mm track gauges. However, it shall not apply to short border crossing lines with 1520 mm track gauges that are connected to the network of third countries.’;
(3)Section 1.3 is amended as follows:
(a)the text ‘Article 5(3) of Directive 2008/57/EC’ is replaced by the text ‘Article 4(3) of Directive (EU) 2016/797’;
(b)points (8) and (9) are added after point (7) as follows:
‘(8)indicates the provisions applicable to the existing subsystems, in particular in the event of upgrading and renewal and, in such cases, the modification work which requires an application for a new authorisation for the vehicle or trackside subsystem — Chapter 7 (Implementing the Control-Command and Signalling Subsystems TSI);
(9)indicates the parameters of the subsystems to be checked by the railway undertaking and the procedures to be applied to check those parameters after the delivery of the vehicle authorisation for placing on the market and before the first use of the vehicle to ensure compatibility between vehicles and the routes on which they are to be operated — Chapter 4 (Characterisation of the Subsystem). ’;
(c)the text ‘Article 5(5) of Directive 2008/57/EC’ is replaced by the text ‘Article 4(5) of Directive (EU) 2016/797’;
(4)The first paragraph of section 2.1 is replaced by the following:
‘The Control-Command and Signalling Subsystems are defined in Annex II of Directive (EU) 2016/797 as:
(a)Trackside control-command and signalling as: “all the trackside equipment required to ensure safety and to command and control movements of trains authorised to travel on the network.”
(b)On-board control-command and signalling as “all the on-board equipment required to ensure safety and to command and control movements of trains authorised to travel on the network. ’;
(5)Section 2.2 is amended as follows:
(a)The first paragraph is replaced by the following:
“The Control-Command and Signalling Subsystem TSI specifies only those requirements which are necessary to assure the interoperability of the Union rail system and the compliance with the essential requirements.";
(b)the text ‘Class B systems for the trans-European rail system network are a limited set of train protection limited set of train protection legacy systems that were in use in the trans- European rail network before 20 April 2001’ is replaced by ‘Class B systems for the trans-European rail system network are a limited set of train protection and voice radio legacy systems that were already in use in the trans- European rail network before 20 April 2001’;
(c)the text ‘Class B systems for other parts of the network of the rail system in the European Union are a limited set of train protection limited set of train protection legacy systems that were in use in the trans- European rail network before 1 July 2015’ is replaced by ‘Class B systems for other parts of the network of the rail system in the European Union are a limited set of train protection and voice radio legacy systems that were already in use in the trans- European rail network before 1 July 2015’;
(d)the text ‘The list of Class B systems is established in the European Railway Agency technical documents ‘List of CCS Class B systems, ERA/TD/2011-11, version 3.0.’ is replaced by ‘The list of Class B systems is established in the European Union Agency for Railways technical document ‘List of CCS Class B systems, ERA/TD/2011-11, version 4.0.’;
(e)the text 'All Control-Command and Signalling Subsystems, even where not specified in this TSI, shall meet the requirements set out in Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) No 402/2013.' is added at the end of Section 2.2.
(6)Section 2.3 is replaced by the following:
‘2.3 Trackside Application Levels (ETCS)
The interfaces specified by this TSI define the means of data transmission to, and (where appropriate) from trains. The ETCS specifications referenced by this TSI provide application levels from which a trackside implementation may choose the means of transmission that meet its requirements.
This TSI defines the requirements for all application levels.
For the technical definition of the ETCS application levels see Annex A, 4.1 c.’;
(7)Section 3.1 is amended as follows:
(a)the text ‘Directive 2008/57/EC’ is replaced by the reference to ‘Directive (EU) 2016/797’;
(b)a new point (6) is added after point 5 as follow:
‘(6)
Accessibility.’;
(8)Section 3.2.1 is replaced by the following:
‘3.2.1 Safety
Every Control-Command and Signalling Subsystems project shall take the measures necessary to ensure that the level of risk of an incident occurring within the scope of the Control-Command and Signalling Subsystems, is not higher than the objective for the service.
To ensure that the measures taken to achieve safety do not jeopardise interoperability, the requirements of the basic parameter defined in point 4.2.1 (Control-Command and Signalling reliability, availability and safety characteristics relevant to interoperability) shall be respected.
For the ETCS Class A system the safety objective is apportioned between the Control-Command and Signalling On-board and Trackside Subsystems. The detailed requirements are specified in the basic parameter defined in point 4.2.1 (Control-Command and Signalling reliability, availability and safety characteristics relevant to interoperability). This safety requirement shall be met together with the availability requirements as defined in Point 3.2.2 (Reliability and Availability).
For the ETCS Class A system the risk management process set out in Annex I to the Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) No 402/2013 shall be applied, as referred to in Article 6(1)(a) of Directive (EU)2016/798 of the European Parliament and of the Council. Additionally the correct application of the risk management process as set out in Annex I of Regulation 402/2013, as well as the appropriateness of the results from this application, shall be independently assessed by a CSM assessment body according to Article 6 of that Regulation. The CSM Assessment Body shall be accredited or recognised according to the requirements in Annex II of Regulation 402/2013 in the fields of “Control-command and signalling” and “System safe integration” as listed in item 5 “classification” of ERADIS database entry for Assessment Bodies.
The application of the specifications as referred to in Annex A, Table A 3 is an appropriate means to fully comply to the risk management as set out in Annex I of the Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) No 402/2013 for design, implementation, production, installation and validation (incl. Safety acceptance) of interoperability constituents and subsystems. When different specifications from the ones referred to in Annex A, Table 3 are applied, at least equivalence shall be demonstrated with the specifications in Annex A, Table 3.
To avoid unnecessary duplication of independent assessment work, the independent safety assessment activities that are required by the specifications referred to in Annex A, Table A 3 shall be carried out by an Assessment Body accredited or recognized as specified in the section above instead of a CENELEC independent safety assessor.’;
(9)The second paragraph of section 3.2.2 is replaced by the following:
‘The level of risk caused by age and wear of components used within the subsystem shall be monitored. The requirements for maintenance stated in point 4.5 shall be respected. ’;
(10)Section 3.2.5.2 is deleted;
(11)A new section 3.2.6 is added as follows:
‘3.2.6 Accessibility
No requirements are mandated for the CCS subsystems for the essential requirement accessibility.’
(12)Section 4.1.1 is amended as follows:
(a)in point (16) the text ‘points 4.2.16’ is replaced by ‘point 4.2.16’;
(b)a new point (17) is added as follows:
‘(17)
ETCS and Radio System Compatibility (point 4.2.17)’;
(13)In section 4.1.2 the text ‘limiting the movement of TSI-compliant on-board subsystems.’ is replaced by ‘limiting the movement of vehicles with TSI-compliant on-board subsystems.’;
(14)Table 4.1 in section 4.1.3 is replaced by:
‘Table 4.1
|
Subsystem
|
Part
|
Basic parameters
|
|
Control-Command and Signalling On-board
|
Train protection
|
4.2.1, 4.2.2, 4.2.5, 4.2.6, 4.2.8, 4.2.9, 4.2.12, 4.2.14, 4.2.16, 4.2.17
|
|
|
Voice radio communication
|
4.2.1.2, 4.2.4.1, 4.2.4.2, 4.2.5.1, 4.2.13, 4.2.16, 4.2.17
|
|
|
Data radio communication
|
4.2.1.2, 4.2.4.1, 4.2.4.3, 4.2.5.1, 4.2.6.2, 4.2.16, 4.2.17
|
|
Control-Command and Signalling Trackside
|
Train protection
|
4.2.1, 4.2.3, 4.2.5, 4.2.7, 4.2.8, 4.2.9, 4.2.15, 4.2.16, 4.2.17
|
|
|
Voice radio communication
|
4.2.1.2, 4.2.4, 4.2.5.1, 4.2.7, 4.2.16, 4.2.17
|
|
|
Data radio communication
|
4.2.1.2, 4.2.4, 4.2.5.1, 4.2.7, 4.2.16, 4.2.17
|
|
|
Train detection
|
4.2.10, 4.2.11, 4.2.16
|
’;
(15)The title of section 4.2.1 is replaced by ‘Control-Command and Signalling reliability, availability and safety characteristics relevant to interoperability’;
(16)Section 4.2.1.1 is amended as follows:
(a)the text ‘on board’ is replaced by ‘on-board’;
(17)Section 4.2.2 is replaced by the following:
‘4.2.2.
On-board ETCS functionality
The basic parameter for ETCS on-board functionality describes all of the functions needed to run a train in a safe way. The primary function is to provide automatic train protection and cab signalling:
(1)setting the train characteristics (e.g, maximum train speed, braking performance),
(2)selecting the supervision mode on the basis of information from trackside,
(3)performing odometry functions,
(4)locating the train in a coordinate system based on Eurobalise locations,
(5)calculating the dynamic speed profile for its mission on the basis of train characteristics and of information from trackside,
(6)supervising the dynamic speed profile during the mission,
(7)providing the intervention function.
These functions shall be implemented in accordance with Annex A 4.2.2 b and their performance shall conform to Annex A 4.2.2 a.
The requirements for tests are specified in Annex A 4.2.2 c.
The main functionality is supported by other functions, to which Annex A 4.2.2 a and Annex A 4.2.2 b also apply, together with the additional specifications indicated below:
(1)Communication with the Control-Command and Signalling Trackside Subsystem.
(a)Eurobalise data transmission. See point 4.2.5.2 (Eurobalise communication with the train).
(b)Euroloop data transmission. See point 4.2.5.3 (Euroloop communication with the train). This functionality is optional for the on-board subsystem unless operating on an ETCS level 1 line where Euroloop is installed and the release speed is set to zero for safety reasons (e.g. protection of danger points).
(c) Radio data transmission for radio infill. See Annex A, 4.2.2 d, point 4.2.5.1 (Radio communications with the train), point 4.2.6.2 (Interface between GSM-R Radio Data Communication and ETCS) and point 4.2.8 (Key Management). This radio functionality is optional for the on-board subsystem unless operating on an ETCS level 1 line where radio data transmission for radio infill is installed and the release speed is set to zero for safety reasons (e.g., protection of danger points).
(d)Radio data transmission. See point 4.2.5.1 (Radio communications with the train), point 4.2.6.2 (Interface between GSM-R Radio Data Communication and ETCS) and point 4.2.8 (Key Management). Is optional unless operating on an ETCS level 2 or level 3 line.
(2)Communicating with the driver. See Annex A, 4.2.2 e and point 4.2.12 (ETCS DMI).
(3)Communicating with the STM. See point 4.2.6.1 (Interface between ETCS and STM). This function includes:
(a)managing the STM output,
(b)providing data to be used by the STM,
(c)managing STM transitions.
(4)Managing information about the completeness of the train (train integrity) — Supplying the train integrity to the on-board subsystem, is optional unless it is required by trackside.
(5)Equipment health monitoring and degraded mode support. This function includes:
(a)initialising the on-board ETCS functionality,
(b)providing degraded mode support,
(c)isolating the on-board ETCS functionality.
(6)Support data recording for regulatory purposes. See point 4.2.14 (Interface to Data Recording for Regulatory Purposes).
(7)Forwarding information/orders and receiving state information from rolling stock:
(a)to the DMI. See point 4.2.12 (ETCS DMI)
(b)to/from the train interface unit. See Annex A, 4.2.2 f. ’;
(18)Section 4.2.3 is replaced by the following:
‘4.2.3.
Trackside ETCS functionality
This Basic parameter describes the ETCS trackside functionality. It contains all ETCS functionality to provide a safe path to a specific train.
The main functionality is:
(1)locating a specific train in a coordinate system based on Eurobalise locations (level 2 and level 3),
(2)translating the information from trackside signalling equipment into a standard format for the Control-Command and Signalling On-board Subsystem,
(3)sending movement authorities including track description and orders assigned to a specific train.
These functions shall be implemented in accordance with Annex A 4.2.3 b and their performance shall conform to Annex A 4.2.3 a.
The main functionality is supported by other functions, to which Annex A 4.2.3 a and Annex A 4.2.3 b also apply, together with the additional specifications indicated below:
(1)communicating with the Control-Command and Signalling On-board Subsystem. This includes:
(a)Eurobalise data transmission. See point 4.2.5.2 (Eurobalise communication with the train) and point 4.2.7.4 (Eurobalise/Line-side Electronic Unit (LEU));
(b)Euroloop data transmission. See point 4.2.5.3 (Euroloop communication with the train) and point 4.2.7.5 (Euroloop/LEU). Euroloop is only relevant in level 1, in which it is optional;
(c) Radio data transmission for radio infill. See Annex A, 4.2.3 d, point 4.2.5.1 (Radio communications with the train), point 4.2.7.3 (GSM-R/trackside ETCS functionality) and point 4.2.8 (Key Management). Radio in-fill is only relevant in level 1, in which it is optional;
(d)Radio data transmission. See point 4.2.5.1 (Radio communications with the train), point 4.2.7.3 (GSM-R/trackside ETCS functionality) and point 4.2.8 (Key Management). Radio data transmission is only relevant to level 2 and level 3.
(2)generating information/orders to the on-board ETCS, e.g. information related to closing/opening the air flaps, lowering/raising the pantograph, opening/closing the main power switch, changing from traction system A to traction system B. Implementation of this functionality is optional for trackside; it can however be required by other applicable TSIs or national rules or the application of risk evaluation and assessment to ensure safe integration of subsystems;
(3)managing the transitions between areas supervised by different Radio Block Centres (RBCs) (only relevant for level 2 and level 3). See point 4.2.7.1 (Functional interface between RBCs) and point 4.2.7.2 (Technical interface between RBCs). ’;
(19)In section 4.2.6.3 the reference to ‘4.2.6f’ is deleted.
(20)In section 4.2.11 the text ‘Control-Command and Signalling equipment.’ is replaced by ‘Control-Command and Signalling train detection equipment.’
(21)In section 4.2.16 the text ‘by Control-command and signalling On-board Subsystems’ is replaced by ‘by Control-command and signalling On-board Interoperability Constituents and Subsystems’;
(22)A new section 4.2.17 is added as follows:
‘4.2.17
ETCS and Radio System Compatibility
Due to the different possible implementations and the status of the migration to fully compliant CCS Subsystems, checks shall be performed in order to demonstrate the technical compatibility between the on-board and trackside CCS Subsystems. The necessity of these checks shall be considered as a temporary measure to increase the confidence on the technical compatibility between the CCS subsystems to achieve the principle stated in point 6.1.2.1.
4.2.17.1
ETCS System Compatibility
ETCS System Compatibility (ESC) shall be the recording of technical compatibility between ETCS on-board and ETCS trackside parts of the CCS subsystems within an area of use.
ESC type shall be the value assigned to record the technical compatibility between an ETCS on-board and a section within the area of use. All sections of the Union network which require the same set of checks for the demonstration of ESC shall have the same ESC type.
4.2.17.2
Radio System Compatibility
Radio System Compatibility (RSC) shall be the recording of technical compatibility between voice or data radio and GSM-R trackside parts of the CCS subsystems.
RSC type shall be the value assigned to record the technical compatibility between a voice or data radio and a section within the area of use. All sections of the Union network which require the same set of checks for the demonstration of RSC shall have the same RSC type.’;
(23)Section 4.3 is amended as follows:
(a)in the title of the tables, the text ‘Clause’ is replaced by ‘Point’;
(b)section 4.3.1 is replaced by the following:
1.1.1.Interface to the Traffic Operation and Management Subsystem
|
Interface with Traffic Operation and Management TSI
|
|
Reference CCS TSI
|
|
Reference Traffic Operation and Management TSI
|
|
|
Parameter
|
Point
|
Parameter
|
Point
|
|
Operating rules (normal and degraded conditions)
|
4.4
|
Rule book
Operating rules
|
4.2.1.2.1
4.4
|
|
Visibility of trackside Control-Command and Signalling objects
|
4.2.15
|
Signal and line-side marker sighting
|
4.2.2.8
|
|
Train braking performance and characteristics
|
4.2.2
|
Braking performance
|
4.2.2.6
|
|
Use of sanding equipment
On-board flange lubrication
Use of composite brake blocks
|
4.2.10
|
Rule book
|
4.2.1.2.1
|
|
Interface to Data Recording for Regulatory Purposes
|
4.2.14
|
Data recording on-board
|
4.2.3.5
|
|
ETCS DMI
|
4.2.12
|
Train running number
|
4.2.3.2.1
|
|
GSM-R DMI
|
4.2.13
|
Train running number
|
4.2.3.2.1
|
|
Key Management
|
4.2.8
|
Ensuring that the train is in running order
|
4.2.2.7
|
(c)section 4.3.2 is replaced by the following:
‘4.3.2.
Interface to the Rolling Stock Subsystem
|
Interface with Rolling Stock TSIs
|
|
Reference CCS TSI
|
Reference Rolling Stock TSIs
|
|
Parameter
|
Point
|
Parameter
|
|
Point
|
|
Compatibility with trackside train detection systems: vehicle design
|
4.2.10
|
Rolling stock characteristics to be compatible with train detection systems based on track circuits
|
HS RS TSI wheelset location
axle load
sanding
electrical resistance between wheels
CR RS TSI
LOC & PAS TSI
Wagon TSI
|
4.2.7.9.2
4.2.3.2
4.2.3.10
4.2.3.3.1
4.2.3.3.1.1
4.2.3.3.1.1
4.2.3.2
|
|
|
|
Rolling stock characteristics to be compatible with train detection systems based on axle counters
|
HS RS TSI wheelset geometry
wheels
CR RS TSI
LOC & PAS TSI
Wagon TSI
|
4.2.7.9.2
4.2.7.9.3
4.2.3.3.1.2
4.2.3.3.1.2
4.2.3.3
|
|
|
|
Rolling stock characteristics to be compatible with loop equipment
|
HS RS TSI
CR RS TSI
LOC & PAS TSI
Wagon TSI
|
None
4.2.3.3.1.3
4.2.3.3.1.3
None4.2.3.3
|
|
Electromagnetic compatibility between rolling stock and Control-Command and Signalling trackside equipment
|
4.2.11
|
Rolling stock characteristics to be compatible with train detection systems based on track circuits
|
HS RS TSI
CR RS TSI
LOC & PAS TSI
Wagon TSI
|
4.2.6.6.1
4.2.3.3.1.1
4.2.3.3.1.1
None4.2.3.3
|
|
|
|
Rolling stock characteristics to be compatible with train detection systems based on axle counters
|
HS RS TSI
CR RS TSI
LOC & PAS TSI
Wagon TSI
|
4.2.6.6.1
4.2.3.3.1.2
4.2.3.3.1.2
None4.2.3.3
|
|
Train braking performance and characteristics
|
4.2.2
|
Emergency braking performance
|
HS RS TSI
Emergency braking
Service braking
CR RS TSI Emergency braking
Service braking
LOC & PAS TSI
Emergency braking
Service braking
Wagon TSI
|
4.2.4.1
4.2.4.4
4.2.4.5.2
4.2.4.5.3
4.2.4.5.2
4.2.4.5.3
4.2.4.1.2
|
|
Position of Control-Command and Signalling on-board antennas
|
4.2.2
|
Kinematic gauge
|
HS RS TSI
CR RS TSI
LOC & PAS TSI
Wagon TSI
|
4.2.3.1
4.2.3.1
4.2.3.1
none
|
|
Isolation of on-board ETCS functionality
|
4.2.2
|
Operating rules
|
HS RS TSI
CR RS TSI
LOC & PAS TSI
Wagon TSI
|
4.2.7.9.1
4.2.12.3
4.2.12.3
none
|
|
Data interfaces
|
4.2.2
|
Monitoring and diagnostic concepts
|
HS RS TSI
CR RS TSI
LOC & PAS TSI
Wagon TSI
|
4.2.7.10
4.2.1.1
4.2.1.1
None
|
|
Visibility of trackside Control-Command and Signalling objects
|
4.2.15
|
External visibility
Head lights
|
HS RS TSI
CR RS TSI
LOC & PAS TSI
Wagon TSI
|
4.2.7.4.1.1
4.2.7.1.1
4.2.7.1.1
None
|
|
|
|
Driver’s external field of view
|
HS RS TSI
line of sight
windscreen
CR RS TSI line of sight
windscreen
LOC & PAS TSI
line of sight
windscreen
Wagon TSI
|
4.2.2.6 b
4.2.2.7
4.2.9.1.3.1
4.2.9.2
4.2.9.1.3.1
4.2.9.2
None
|
|
Interface to data recording for regulatory purposes
|
4.2.14
|
Recording device
|
HS RS TSI
CR RS TSI
LOC & PAS TSI
Wagon TSI
|
4.2.7.10
4.2.9.6
4.2.9.6
none
|
|
Commands to rolling stock equipment
|
4.2.2
4.2.3
|
Phase separation
|
HS RS TSI
CR RS TSI
LOC & PAS TSI
Wagon TSI
|
4.2.8.3.6.7
4.2.8.2.9.8
4.2.8.2.9.8
none
|
|
Emergency braking command
|
4.2.2
|
Emergency braking command
|
HS RS TSI
CR RS TSI
LOC & PAS TSI
Wagon TSI
|
none
4.2.4.4.1
4.2.4.4.1
none
|
|
Construction of equipment
|
4.2.16
|
Material requirements
|
HS RS TSI
CR RS TSI
LOC&PAS TSI
Wagon TSI
|
4.2.7.2.2
4.2.10.2.1
4.2.10.2.1
none
|
(d)in section 4.3.4 the text ‘Phase separation points’ is replaced by ‘Phase separation sections’;
(24)In section 4.4 the text ‘Traffic Operation and Management TSI’ is replaced by ‘Operation and Traffic Management TSI’.
(25)In section 4.5.1 at the end of point (1) the following text is added “For equipment error corrections see point 6.5,’.
(26)Section 4.8 is replaced by:
‘4.8 Registers
The data to be provided for the registers provided for in Articles 48 and 49 of Directive (EU) 2016/797 are those indicated in Commission Implementing Regulation 2001/665/EU and Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) XXX.’;
(27)A new section 4.9 is added below section 4.8 as follows:
‘4.9.
Route compatibility checks before the use of authorised vehicles
The parameters of the on-board CCS subsystem to be used by the railway undertaking, for the purpose of route compatibility check, are described in Appendix D1 of Regulation XXX (OPE TSI). ’;
(28)Section 5.1 is replaced by the following:
‘5.1 Definition
In accordance with Article 2(7) of Directive (EU) 2016/797, interoperability constituents means any elementary component, group of components, subassembly or complete assembly of equipment incorporated or intended to be incorporated into a subsystem, upon which the interoperability of the rail system depends directly or indirectly, including both tangible objects and intangible objects.’;
(29)In section 5.2.2 a new paragraph is added at the end of the section as follows:
‘Compliance of interfaces internal to the group of ICs to basic parameters of Chapter 4 does not have to be verified. Compliance of interfaces external to the group of ICs has to be verified to demonstrate conformity with the basic parameters related to the requirements of these external interfaces.’;
(30)Section 5.3 is amended as follows:
(a)Table 5.1.a is replaced by:
‘Table 5.1.a Basic interoperability constituents in the Control-Command and Signalling On-board Subsystem
|
1
|
2
|
3
|
4
|
|
N
|
Interoperability constituent IC
|
Characteristics
|
Specific requirements to be assessed by reference to Chapter 4
|
|
1
|
ETCS on-board
|
Reliability, Availability, Maintainability, Safety (RAMS)
|
4.2.1
4.5.1
|
|
|
|
On-board ETCS functionality (excluding odometry)
|
4.2.2
|
|
|
|
ETCS and GSM-R air gap interfaces
·RBC
·Radio in-fill unit (data transmission optional)
·Eurobalise air gap
·Euroloop air gap (data transmission optional)
|
4.2.5
4.2.5.1
4.2.5.1
4.2.5.2
4.2.5.3
|
|
|
|
Interfaces
·STM (implementation of interface K optional)
·GSM-R ETCS Data Only Radio
·Odometry
·Key management system
·ETCS ID Management
·ETCS Driver-Machine Interface
·Train interface
·On-board recording device
|
4.2.6.1
4.2.6.2
4.2.6.3
4.2.8
4.2.9
4.2.12
4.2.2
4.2.14
|
|
|
|
Construction of equipment
|
4.2.16
|
|
2
|
Odometry equipment
|
Reliability, Availability, Maintainability, Safety (RAMS)
|
4.2.1
4.5.1
|
|
|
|
On-board ETCS functionality: only Odometry
|
4.2.2
|
|
|
|
Interfaces
·On-board ETCS
|
4.2.6.3
|
|
|
|
Construction of equipment
|
4.2.16
|
|
3
|
Interface of External STM
|
Interfaces
·On-board ETCS
|
4.2.6.1
|
|
4
|
GSM-R voice cab radio
Note: SIM card, antenna, connecting cables and filters are not part of this interoperability constituent
|
Reliability, Availability, Maintainability, (RAM)
|
4.2.1.2
4.5.1
|
|
|
|
Basic communication functions
|
4.2.4.1
|
|
|
|
Voice and operational communication applications
|
4.2.4.2
|
|
|
|
Interfaces
·GSM-R air gap
·GSM-R Driver-Machine Interface
|
4.2.5.1
4.2.13
|
|
|
|
Construction of equipment
|
4.2.16
|
|
5
|
GSM-R ETCS Data only Radio
Note: SIM card, antenna, connecting cables and filters are not part of this interoperability constituent
|
Reliability, Availability, Maintainability (RAM)
|
4.2.1.2
4.5.1
|
|
|
|
Basic communication functions
|
4.2.4.1
|
|
|
|
ETCS data communication applications
|
4.2.4.3
|
|
|
|
Interfaces
·On-board ETCS
·GSM-R air gap
|
4.2.6.2
4.2.5.1
|
|
|
|
Construction of equipment
|
4.2.16
|
|
6
|
GSM-R SIM card
Note: it is the responsibility of the GSM-R network operator to deliver to railway undertakings the SIM cards to be inserted in GSM-R terminal equipment
|
Basic communication functions
|
4.2.4.1
|
|
|
|
Construction of equipment
|
4.2.16
|
’;
(b)table 5.1.b is replaced by:
‘Table 5.1.b Groups of interoperability constituents in the Control-Command and Signalling On-board Subsystem
This table is an example to show the structure. Other groups are allowed.
|
1
|
2
|
3
|
4
|
|
N
|
Group of Interoperability constituents
|
Characteristics
|
Specific requirements to be assessed by reference to Chapter 4
|
|
1
|
ETCS on-board
Odometry equipment
|
Reliability, Availability, Maintainability, Safety (RAMS)
|
4.2.1
4.5.1
|
|
|
|
On-board ETCS functionality
|
4.2.2
|
|
|
|
ETCS and GSM-R air gap interfaces
·RBC
·Radio in-fill unit (data transmission optional)
·Eurobalise air gap
·Euroloop air gap (data transmission optional)
|
4.2.5
4.2.5.1
4.2.5.1
4.2.5.2
4.2.5.3
|
|
|
|
Interfaces
·STM (implementation of interface K optional)
·GSM-R ETCS Data Only Radio
·Key management system
·ETCS-ID Management
·ETCS Driver Machine Interface
·Train interface
·On-board recording device
|
4.2.6.1
4.2.6.2
4.2.8
4.2.9
4.2.12
4.2.2
4.2.14
|
|
|
|
Construction of equipment
|
4.2.16
|
’;
(c)table 5.2.a is replaced by:
‘Table 5.2.a Basic interoperability constituents in the Control-Command and Signalling Trackside Subsystem
|
1
|
2
|
3
|
4
|
|
N
|
Interoperability constituent IC
|
Characteristics
|
Specific requirements to be assessed by reference to Chapter 4
|
|
1
|
RBC
|
Reliability, Availability, Maintainability, Safety (RAMS)
|
4.2.1
4.5.1
|
|
|
|
Trackside ETCS functionality ( excluding communication via Eurobalises, radio in-fill and Euroloop)
|
4.2.3
|
|
|
|
ETCS and GSM-R air gap interfaces: only radio communication with train
|
4.2.5.1
|
|
|
|
Interfaces
·Neighbouring RBC
·Data radio communication
·Key management system
·ETCS-ID Management
|
4.2.7.1, 4.2.7.2
4.2.7.3
4.2.8
4.2.9
|
|
|
|
Construction of equipment
|
4.2.16
|
|
2
|
Radio in-fill unit
|
Reliability, Availability, Maintainability, Safety (RAMS)
|
4.2.1
4.5.1
|
|
|
|
Trackside ETCS functionality (excluding communication via Eurobalises, Euroloop and level 2 and level 3 functionality)
|
4.2.3
|
|
|
|
ETCS and GSM-R air gap interfaces: only radio communication with train
|
4.2.5.1
|
|
|
|
Interfaces
·Data radio communication
·Key management system
·ETCS-ID Management
·Interlocking and LEU
|
4.2.7.3
4.2.8
4.2.9
4.2.3
|
|
|
|
Construction of equipment
|
4.2.16
|
|
3
|
Eurobalise
|
Reliability, Availability, Maintainability, Safety (RAMS)
|
4.2.1
4.5.1
|
|
|
|
ETCS and GSM-R air gap interfaces: only Eurobalise communication with train
|
4.2.5.2
|
|
|
|
Interfaces
·LEU - Eurobalise
|
4.2.7.4
|
|
|
|
Construction of equipment
|
4.2.16
|
|
4
|
Euroloop
|
Reliability, Availability, Maintainability, Safety (RAMS)
|
4.2.1
4.5.1
|
|
|
|
ETCS and GSM-R air gap interfaces: only Euroloop communication with train
|
4.2.5.3
|
|
|
|
Interfaces
·LEU – Euroloop
|
4.2.7.5
|
|
|
|
Construction of equipment
|
4.2.16
|
|
5
|
LEU Eurobalise
|
Reliability, Availability, Maintainability, Safety (RAMS)
|
4.2.1
4.5.1
|
|
|
|
Trackside ETCS functionality (excluding communication via radio in-fill, Euroloop and level 2 and level 3 functionality)
|
4.2.3
|
|
|
|
Interfaces
·LEU - Eurobalise
|
4.2.7.4
|
|
|
|
Construction of equipment
|
4.2.16
|
|
6
|
LEU Euroloop
|
Reliability, Availability, Maintainability, Safety (RAMS)
|
4.2.1
4.5.1
|
|
|
|
Trackside ETCS functionality (excluding communication via radio in-fill, Eurobalise and level 2 and level 3 functionality)
|
4.2.3
|
|
|
|
Interfaces
·LEU – Euroloop
|
4.2.7.5
|
|
|
|
Construction of equipment
|
4.2.16
|
|
7
|
Axle Counter
|
Trackside train detection systems (only parameters relevant for axle counters)
|
4.2.10
|
|
|
|
Electromagnetic compatibility (only parameters relevant for axle counters)
|
4.2.11
|
|
|
|
Construction of equipment
|
4.2.16
|
’;
(31)Section 6.1 is replaced by the following:
‘6.1.
Introduction
6.1.1.
General principles
6.1.1.1.
Compliance with basic parameters
Fulfilment of the essential requirements set out in Chapter 3 of this TSI shall be ensured through compliance with the basic parameters specified in Chapter 4.
This compliance shall be demonstrated by:
(1)assessing the conformity of the interoperability constituents specified in Chapter 5 (see point 6.2.1, 6.2.2, 6.2.3, 6.2.4),
(2)verifying the subsystems (see point 6.3 and point 6.4).
6.1.1.2.
Essential requirements fulfilled by National Rules
In certain cases, some of the essential requirements may be met by national rules, because of:
(1)the use of Class B systems,
(2)open points in the TSI,
(3)non-application of TSIs (derogations) under Article 7 of Directive (EU) 2016/797,
(4)specific cases described in point 7.6.
In such cases, assessment of conformity with those rules shall be carried out under the responsibility of the Member States concerned according to notified procedures. See point 6.4.2.
6.1.1.3.
Partial fulfilment of TSI requirements
With regard to checking if essential requirements are fulfilled through compliance with the basic parameters, and without prejudice to the obligations set out in Chapter 7 of this TSI, control-command and signalling interoperability constituents and subsystems that do not implement all functions, performance and interfaces as specified in Chapter 4 (including the specifications referred to in Annex A), can obtain EC certificates of conformity or, respectively, certificates of verification, under the following conditions for issuing and using the certificates:
(1)The applicant for EC verification of a trackside control-command and signalling subsystem is responsible for deciding which functions, performance and interfaces need to be implemented to meet the objectives for the service and to ensure that no requirements contradicting or exceeding the TSIs are exported to the on-board control-command and signalling subsystems;
(2)The operation of an on-board control-command and signalling subsystem, that does not implement all functions, performance and interfaces specified in this TSI, may be subject to conditions and limits of use due to compatibility and/or safe integration with trackside control-command and signalling subsystems. Without prejudice to the tasks of a Notified Body described in respective Union legislation and related documents the applicant for EC verification is responsible for ensuring that the technical file provides all the information that an operator needs to identify such conditions and limits of use.
(3)The authorising entity may refuse for duly justified reasons the authorisation for placing in service or on the market, or place conditions and limits of use on the operation, of control-command and signalling subsystems that do not implement all functions, performance and interfaces specified in this TSI.
If a control-command and signalling interoperability constituent or subsystem does not implement all functions, performance and interfaces specified in this TSI, the provisions of point 6.4.3 shall apply.
6.1.2.
Principles for testing ETCS and GSM-R
6.1.2.1.
Principle
The principle is that a Control-Command and Signalling On-board Subsystem covered by an 'EC' declaration of verification is able to run on every Control-Command and Signalling Trackside Subsystem covered by an 'EC' Declaration of verification, under the conditions specified in this TSI, with no additional verifications.
Achievement of this principle is facilitated by:
(1)rules for the design and installation of the Control-Command and Signalling On-board and the Trackside subsystems,
(2)test specifications to prove that the Control-Command and Signalling On-board and Trackside Subsystems comply with the requirements of this TSI and are mutually compatible.
6.1.2.2.
Operational test scenarios
For the purpose of this TSI, an “operational test scenario” means a sequence of trackside and on-board events related to or influencing the Control-command and Signalling subsystems (e.g. sending/receiving messages, exceeding a speed limit, actions of operators ) and the specified timing between them in order to test the intended railway system operation in situations relevant for ETCS and GSM-R (e.g. entry of a train into an equipped area, awakening of a train, overriding a signal at stop), by means of.
The operational tests scenarios are based on the engineering rules adopted for the project.
Check of compliance of a real implementation with an operational tests scenario shall be possible gathering information through easily accessible interfaces (preferably the standard interfaces specified in this TSI).
6.1.2.3.
Requirements for Operational test scenarios
The set of engineering rules for the trackside parts of ETCS and GSM-R and related operational test scenarios for the Trackside Control-command and Signalling Subsystem shall be sufficient to describe all intended system operations relevant for the Trackside Control-command and Signalling Subsystem in normal and identified degraded situations, and:
(1)shall be consistent with the specifications referenced in this TSI;
(2)shall assume that functions, interfaces and performance of the Control-command and Signalling On-board Subsystems interacting with the Trackside Subsystem are compliant with the requirements of this TSI;
(3)shall be the ones used in the EC Verification of the Trackside Control-command and Signalling Subsystem, to check that the implemented functions, interfaces and performance are able to ensure that the intended system operation in combination with the relevant modes and transitions between levels and modes of the Control-command and Signalling On-board Subsystems are respected.
6.1.2.4.
Requirements for ETCS System Compatibility
The Agency shall set up and manage the set of checks to demonstrate the technical compatibility of an on-board subsystem with the trackside subsystem in a technical document.
Infrastructure Managers shall submit to the Agency the definition of the necessary checks to demonstrate:
(a)the technical compatibility of an on-board subsystem with the trackside subsystem on their network by 1 September 2019 at the latest,
Infrastructure Managers shall classify the ETCS lines according to ESC types in RINF.
Infrastructure Managers shall submit to the Agency any changes on the necessary checks for their network to demonstrate the technical compatibility of an on-board subsystem with the trackside subsystem. The Agency shall update the technical document within 5 working days.
6.1.2.5.
Requirements for Radio System Compatibility
The Agency shall set up and manage the set of checks to demonstrate the technical compatibility of an on-board subsystem with the trackside subsystem in a technical document.
Infrastructure Managers shall submit to the Agency the definition of the necessary checks to demonstrate:
(a)the technical compatibility of an on-board subsystem with the trackside subsystem on their network by 1 September 2019 at the latest,
Infrastructure Managers shall classify their lines according to RSC types for voice and, if applicable, ETCS data in RINF.
Infrastructure Managers shall submit to the Agency any changes on the necessary checks for their network to demonstrate the technical compatibility of an on-board subsystem with the trackside subsystem. The Agency shall update the technical document within 5 working days.’;
(32)Section 6.2 is amended as follows:
(a)in section 6.2.1, the text ‘Article 13 and Annex IV to Directive 2008/57/EC’ is replaced by the text ‘Article 10(1) and Article 9(2) of Directive (EU) 2016/797’;
(b)in section 6.2.2, the text ‘Directive 2008/57/EC’ is replaced by the text ‘Directive (EU) 2016/797’;
(c)table 6.1 is replaced by the following:
‘Table 6.1 Conformity assessment requirements of an interoperability constituent or a group of interoperability constituents
|
N
|
Aspect
|
What to assess
|
supporting evidence
|
|
1
|
Functions, interfaces and performances
|
Check that all mandatory functions, interfaces and performances as described in the basic parameters referenced in the relevant table of Chapter 5 are implemented and that they comply with the requirements of this TSI
|
design documentation and running of test cases and test sequences, as described in the basic parameters referenced in the relevant table of Chapter 5
|
|
|
|
Check which optional functions and interfaces as described in the basic parameters referenced in the relevant table of Chapter 5 are implemented and that they comply with the requirements of this TSI
|
design documentation and running of test cases and test sequences, as described in the basic parameters referenced in the relevant table of Chapter 5
|
|
|
|
Check which additional functions and interfaces (not specified in this TSI) are implemented and that they do not lead to conflicts with implemented functions specified in this TSI
|
Impact analysis
|
|
2
|
Construction of equipment
|
Check compliance with mandatory conditions, where specified in the basic parameters referenced in the relevant table of Chapter 5
|
Documentation on material used and, where necessary, tests to ensure that the requirements of the basic parameters referenced in the relevant table of Chapter 5 are satisfied
|
|
|
|
In addition, check that the interoperability constituent functions correctly in the environmental conditions for which it is designed
|
Tests according to the applicant’s specifications
|
|
3
|
Reliability, Availability, Maintainability, Safety (RAMS)
|
Check compliance with the safety requirements described in the basic parameters referenced in the relevant table of Chapter 5, i.e.
1.respect for quantitative Tolerable Hazard Rates (THRs) caused by random failures
2.the development process is able to detect and eliminate systematic failures
|
1.Calculations for the THRs caused by random failures, supported by reliability data.
2.1.The manufacturer’s quality and safety management throughout design, manufacturing and testing conforms to a recognised standard (see note)
2.2.The software development life-cycle, the hardware development life-cycle and the integration of hardware and software have each been undertaken in accordance with a recognised standard (see note)
2.3.The safety verification and validation process has been undertaken in accordance with a recognised standard (see Note) and respects the safety requirements described in the basic parameters referenced in the relevant table of Chapter 5
2.4.The functional and technical safety requirements (correct operation under fault-free conditions, effects of faults and of external influences) are verified in accordance with a recognised standard (see Note)
Note: The standard shall satisfy at least the following requirements:
1.be compliant with the requirements for code of practice, as stated in Annex 1, point 2.3.2, of Regulation (EU) 402/2013
2. be widely acknowledged in the railway domain. If this is not the case, the standard will have to be justified and be acceptable to the Notified Body;
3.be relevant for the control of the considered hazards in the system under assessment;
4.be publicly available for all actors who want to use it.
|
|
4
|
|
Check that the quantitative reliability target (related to random failures) indicated by the applicant is met
|
Calculations
|
|
5
|
|
Elimination of systematic failures
|
Tests of equipment (full Interoperability Constituent or separately for subassemblies) in operational conditions, with repair when defects are detected.
Documentation accompanying the certificate which indicates which kind of verifications have been performed, which standards have been applied and criteria adopted to consider these tests completed (according to decisions of the applicant).
|
|
6
|
|
Check compliance with maintenance requirements – point 4.5.1
|
Document check
|
’;
(d)sections 6.2.5 and 6.2.6 are deleted;
(33)Section 6.3 is amended as follows:
(a)section 6.3.1 is replaced by the following:
‘6.3.1.
Assessment procedures for Control-Command and Signalling Subsystems
This Chapter deals with the 'EC' declaration of verification for the Control-Command and Signalling On-board Subsystem and the 'EC' declaration of verification for the Control-Command and Signalling Trackside Subsystem.
At the request of the applicant the Notified Body shall carry out an 'EC' verification of a Control-Command and Signalling On-board or Trackside Subsystem in accordance with Annex IV to Directive (EU) 2016/797.
The applicant shall draw up the 'EC' declaration of verification for the Control-Command and Signalling On-board or Trackside Subsystem in accordance with Article 15(1) and Article 15(9) of Directive (EU) 2016/797.
The content of the 'EC' declaration of verification shall conform to Article 15(9) of Directive (EU) 2016/797.
The assessment procedure shall be carried out using the modules specified in point 6.3.2 (Modules for Control-Command and Signalling Subsystems).
The 'EC' declarations of verification for a Control-Command and Signalling On-board Subsystem and of a Control-Command and Signalling Trackside Subsystem, together with the certificates of conformity, shall be deemed sufficient to ensure that the subsystems are compatible under the conditions specified in this TSI. ’;
(b)section 6.3.2.3 is replaced by the following:
‘6.3.2.3. Conditions for using modules for On-board and Trackside Subsystems
With reference to point 4.2 of Module SB (type-examination), design review is requested.
With reference to point 4.2 of Module SH1 (full quality management system with design examination), an additional type test is required. ’;
(c)in section 6.3.3, Table 6.2 is replaced by the following:
‘Table 6.2 Conformity assessment requirements for an On-board Subsystem
|
N
|
Aspect
|
What to assess
|
supporting evidence
|
|
1
|
Use of interoperability constituents
|
Check whether the interoperability constituents to be integrated into the subsystem are all covered by an 'EC' Declaration of conformity and a corresponding certificate.
The Subsystem needs to be checked with a SIM card compliant with the requirements of this TSI. Changing the SIM card with another one compliant with the TSI is not a modification of the Subsystem.
|
Existence and content of documents
|
|
|
|
Check conditions and limits of use on the use of Interoperability Constituents against the characteristics of the subsystem and of the environment
|
Analysis by document check
|
|
|
|
For interoperability constituents that have been certified against a version of the CCS TSI, which is different from the version applied for the ‘EC’ Verification of the subsystem and / or against a set of specifications which is different from the set of specifications applied for the ‘EC’ Verification of the subsystem, check that the certificate still ensures subsystem compliance with the requirements of the TSI currently in force.
|
Impact analysis by document checks
|
|
2
|
Integration of interoperability constituents in the subsystem
|
Check the correct installation and functioning of the internal interfaces of the subsystem - Basic parameter 4.2.6
|
Checks according to specifications
|
|
|
|
Check that additional functions (not specified in this TSI) do not impact the mandatory ones
|
Impact analysis
|
|
|
|
Check that the values of ETCS IDs are within the allowed range and, if required by this TSI, have unique values – Basic parameter 4.2.9
|
Check of design specifications
|
|
3
|
Integration with rolling stock
|
Check the correct installation of equipment - Basic Parameters 4.2.2, 4.2.4, 4.2.14 and conditions for installation of equipment, as specified by the manufacturer
|
Results of checks (according to specifications referenced in the Basic Parameters and the manufacturer's installation rules)
|
|
|
|
Check that the Control-Command and Signalling On-board Subsystem is compatible with the rolling stock environment – Basic parameter 4.2.16
|
Document check (certificates of interoperability constituents and possible integration methods checked against characteristics of rolling stock)
|
|
|
|
Check that parameters (e.g, braking parameters) are correctly configured and that they are within the allowed range
|
Document check (values of parameters checked against characteristics of rolling stock)
|
|
4
|
Integration with Class B
|
Check that the external STM is connected to on-board ETCS with TSI-compliant interfaces
|
Nothing to test: there is a standard interface already tested at interoperability constituent level. Its functioning has already been tested when checking the integration of interoperability constituents in the subsystem
|
|
|
|
Check that Class B functions implemented in the on-board ETCS– Basic parameter 4.2.6.1 - create no additional requirements for the Control-Command and Signalling Trackside Subsystem due to transitions
|
Nothing to test: everything has already been tested at interoperability constituent level
|
|
|
|
Check that separate Class B equipment which is not connected to the on-board ETCS– Basic Parameter 4.2.6.1 - creates no additional requirements for Control-Command and Signalling Trackside Subsystem due to transitions
|
nothing to test: no interface
|
|
|
|
Check that separate Class B equipment connected on-board ETCS using (partly) non TSI compliant interfaces – basic parameter 4.2.6.1 - creates no additional requirements for the Control-Command and Signalling Trackside Subsystem due to transitions. Also check that ETCS functions are not affected
|
impact analysis
|
|
5
|
Integration with Control-Command and Signalling Trackside Subsystems
|
Check that Eurobalise telegrams can be read (scope of this test is limited to checking that the antenna has been appropriately installed. The tests already carried out at Interoperability Constituent level shall not be repeated) – Basic Parameter 4.2.5
|
Test using a certified Eurobalise : the ability to read correctly the telegram is the supporting evidence.
|
|
|
|
Check that Euroloop telegrams (if applicable) can be read – Basic Parameter 4.2.5
|
Test using a certified Euroloop : the ability to read correctly the telegram is the supporting evidence.
|
|
|
|
Check that the equipment can handle a GSM-R call for voice and data (if applicable) – Basic Parameter 4.2.5
|
Test with a certified GSM-R network. The ability to set up, maintain and disconnect a connection is the supporting evidence.
|
|
6
|
Reliability, Availability, Maintainability, Safety (RAMS)
|
Check that the equipment complies with safety requirements - Basic Parameter 4.2.1
|
Application of procedures specified in the Common Safety Method for Risk Evaluation and Assessment.
|
|
|
|
Check that the quantitative reliability target is met - Basic Parameter 4.2.1
|
Calculations
|
|
|
|
Check the compliance with requirements about maintenance – point 4.5.2
|
Documents check
|
|
7
|
Integration with Control-Command and Signalling Trackside Subsystems and other subsystems:
tests under conditions representing the intended operation.
|
Test the behaviour of the subsystem under as many different conditions as reasonably possible representing the intended operation (e.g line gradient, train speed, vibrations, traction power, weather conditions, design of Control-Command and Signalling trackside functionality). The test must be able to verify:
1.that odometry functions are correctly performed - basic parameter 4.2.2
2.that the on-board Control-Command and Signalling Subsystem is compatible with the rolling stock environment – basic parameter 4.2.16
These tests must also be such as to increase confidence that there will be no systematic failures.
The scope of these tests excludes tests already carried out at different stages: tests performed on the interoperability constituents and tests performed on the subsystem in a simulated environment shall be taken into account.
Tests under environmental conditions are not necessary for on-board GSM-R voice equipment.
Note: Indicate in the certificate which conditions have been tested and which standards have been applied.
|
Reports of test runs.
|
’;
(d)a new section 6.3.3.1 is added after table 6.2 as follows:
‘6.3.3.1.
ETCS and radio system compatibility checks
Particular attention shall be given to assessing the conformity of the on-board CCS subsystem regarding the Basic Parameter ETCS and radio system compatibility referred to in 4.2.17.
Regardless of the module selected for the previous EC verification procedure for the on-board subsystem, the Notified Body shall check;
(a)the availability of the result of the technical compatibility checks for the selected area of use of the vehicle.
(b)The technical compatibility checks have been performed in accordance with the technical document published by the Agency.
(c)The technical compatibility checks results indicate all the incompatibilities and errors encountered during the technical compatibility checks.
The Notified Body shall not check again any aspect covered during the already performed EC Verification procedure for the on-board subsystem.
The Notified Body performing these checks may be a different one from the Notified Body performing the EC Verification procedure for the on-board subsystem.
Performing these checks also at the level of Interoperability Constituent may reduce the amount of checks at the level of Control-command and Signalling Subsystem. ’;
(e)in section 6.3.4, table 6.3 is replaced by the following:
‘Table 6.3 Conformity assessment requirements for a Trackside Subsystem
|
N
|
Aspect
|
What to assess
|
supporting evidence
|
|
1
|
Use of interoperability constituents
|
Check that all interoperability constituents to be integrated into the subsystem are covered by an EC declaration of conformity and the corresponding certificate.
|
Existence and content of documents
|
|
|
|
Check conditions and limits of use on the use of interoperability constituents against the characteristics of the subsystem and of the environment
|
Impact analysis by documents check
|
|
|
|
For interoperability constituents that have been certified against a version of the Control-Command and Signalling TSI, which is different from the version applied for the ‘EC’ Verification of the subsystem and / or against a set of specifications which is different from the set of specifications applied for the ‘EC’ Verification of the subsystem, check that the certificate still ensures compliance with the requirements of the TSI currently in force
|
impact analysis by comparison of specifications referenced in the TSI and certificates of the interoperability constituents
|
|
2
|
Integration of interoperability constituents in the subsystem
|
Check that the internal interfaces of the subsystem have been installed properly and function properly - Basic parameters 4.2.5, 4.2.7 and conditions specified by the manufacturer
(N/A for IC axle counter)
|
checks according to specifications
|
|
|
|
Check that additional functions (not specified in this TSI) do not impact the mandatory ones
|
impact analysis
|
|
|
|
Check that the values of ETCS IDs are within the allowed range and, if required by this TSI, have unique values – Basic Parameter 4.2.9
(N/A for IC axle counter)
|
check of design specifications
|
|
|
|
For IC axle counters (only):
The integration of the IC in the subsystem has to be verified:
Check index 77 document points 3.1.2.1, 3.1.2.4 and 3.1.2.5 only.
Check the correct installation of equipment and conditions specified by the manufacturer.
|
Document check
|
|
3
|
Visibility of trackside Control-Command objects
|
Check that requirements for marker boards specified in this TSI are fulfilled (characteristics, compatibility with the infrastructure requirements (gauge, …), compatibility with the driver’s field of view) – Basic parameter 4.2.15
|
Design documentation, results of tests or test runs with TSI compliant rolling stock
|
|
4
|
Integration with infrastructure
|
Check that the equipment has been properly installed - Basic parameters 4.2.3, 4.2.4 and conditions for installation specified by the manufacturer
|
Results of checks (according to specifications referenced in the basic parameters and manufacturer's installation rules)
|
|
|
|
Check that the Control-Command and Signalling Trackside subsystem equipment is compatible with the trackside environment – Basic parameter 4.2.16
|
Document check (certificates of interoperability constituents and possible methods of integration checked against trackside characteristics)
|
|
5
|
Integration with trackside signalling
|
Check that all functions required by the application are implemented in accordance with specifications referenced in this TSI - Basic parameter 4.2.3
|
Document check (applicant's design specification and certificates of interoperability constituents)
|
|
|
|
Check the correct configuration of parameters (Eurobalise telegrams, RBC messages, marker boards positions, etc.)
|
Document check (values of parameters checked against characteristics of trackside and of signalling)
|
|
|
|
Check that the interfaces are correctly installed and function properly.
|
Design verification and tests according to information supplied by the applicant
|
|
|
|
Check that the Control-Command and Signalling Trackside subsystem operates correctly according to information at the interfaces with trackside signalling (e.g., appropriate generation of Eurobalise telegrams by a LEU or of message by RBC)
|
Design verification and tests according to the information supplied by the applicant
|
|
6
|
Integration with Control-Command and Signalling On-board Subsystems and with rolling stock
|
Check the GSM-R coverage - Basic Parameter 4.2.4
|
On site measurements
|
|
|
|
Check that all functions required by the application are implemented in accordance with specifications referenced in this TSI - basic parameters 4.2.3, 4.2.4 and 4.2.5
|
Reports of the operational test scenarios specified in point 6.1.2 with at least two certified Control-Command and Signalling On-board Subsystems from different suppliers. The report shall indicate which operational test scenarios have been tested, which on-board equipment has been used and whether tests have been performed in laboratories, test lines or real implementation.
|
|
7
|
Compatibility of train detection systems
(Excluding axle counters)
|
Check that the train detection systems comply with the requirements of this TSI - Basic parameters 4.2.10 and 4.2.11
Check the correct installation of equipment and conditions specified by the manufacturer and/or the Infrastructure manager.
|
Evidence of compatibility of equipment from existing installations (for systems already in use); perform tests according to standards for new types.
On-site measurements to prove correctness of installation.
Document check of correct installation of equipment.
|
|
8
|
Reliability, Availability, Maintainability, Safety (RAMS)
|
Check compliance with safety requirements - Basic Parameter 4.2.1.1
|
Application of procedures specified in the Common Safety Method for Risk Evaluation and Assessment
|
|
|
|
Check that quantitative reliability targets are respected - Basic Parameter 4.2.1.2
|
Calculations
|
|
|
|
Check the compliance with requirements about maintenance – point 4.5.2
|
Document check
|
|
9
|
Integration with Control-Command and Signalling On-board Subsystems and rolling stock: tests under conditions representing the intended operation.
|
Test the behaviour of the subsystem under many different conditions as reasonably feasible representing the intended operation (e.g. train speed, number of trains on the line, weather conditions). The test must be able to verify:
3.the performance of train detection systems - Basic parameters 4.2.10, 4.2.11,
4.that the Control-Command and Signalling Trackside subsystem is compatible with trackside environment – Basic parameter 4.2.16
These tests will also increase confidence in the absence of systematic failures.
The scope of these tests excludes tests already done in different steps: tests performed at the level of interoperability constituents and tests performed on the subsystem in a simulated environment shall be taken into account.
Note: Indicate in the certificate which conditions have been tested and which standards have been applied.
|
Reports of test runs.
|
|
10
|
ETCS and radio System Compatibility
|
The necessary ESC and RSC check definition is made available to the Agency – Basic Parameter 4.2.17.
|
Technical compatibility checks for ESC and RSC published and maintained by the Agency.
|
’;
(34)Section 6.4 is replaced as follows:
(a)section 6.4.1 is replaced by the following:
‘6.4.1.
Assessment of parts of control-command and signalling subsystems
Pursuant to Article 15(7) of Directive (EU) 2016/797, the Notified Body may issue certificates of verification for certain parts of a subsystem, if allowed to do so under the relevant TSI.
As pointed out in point 2.2 (Scope) of this TSI, the trackside and on-board control-command and signalling subsystems contain parts, as specified in point 4.1 (Introduction).
A certificate of verification may be issued for each part or for a combination of parts specified in this TSI; the Notified Body only checks if that particular part fulfils the TSI requirements.
Regardless of which module is chosen, the Notified Body shall check that:
(1)the TSI requirements for the part in question have been fulfilled and
(2)the fulfilment of the TSI requirements already assessed for other parts of the same subsystem has not been modified. ’;
(b)in section 6.4.2, the text ‘certificate’ is replaced by the text ‘EC certificate’;
(c)section 6.4.3.3 is replaced by the following:
‘6.4.3.3.
Content of certificates
In any event, notified bodies shall coordinate with the Agency the way in which conditions and limits of use of interoperability constituents and subsystems are managed in the relevant certificates and technical files in the working group set up under Article 24 of Regulation (EU) 2016/796 of the European Parliament and of the Council. ’;
(d)Section 6.4.4 is replaced by the following:
‘6.4.4.
Intermediate Statement of Verification
If conformity is assessed for parts of subsystems specified by the applicant and different from the parts allowed by point in Table 4.1 (Introduction) of this TSI, or if only certain stages of the verification procedure have been performed, only an intermediate statement of verification may be issued.’;
(35)Section 6.5 is replaced by the following:
‘6.5.
Management of errors
Where deviations from intended functions and/or performance are detected during the tests or during the operational life of a subsystem, the applicants and/or operators shall inform the Agency and the authorising entity that issued the authorisations for the concerned trackside subsystems or vehicles, to initiate the procedures set out in Article 16 of Directive (EU) 2016/797. As a result of the application of Article 16(3) of that Directive:
(1)if the deviation is due to incorrect application of this TSI or to errors in design or installation of equipment, the applicant for the relevant certificates shall take the necessary corrective actions and the certificates affected and/or the corresponding technical file (for interoperability constituents and/or subsystems) shall be updated;
(2)if the deviation is due to errors in this TSI or in specifications referenced therein, the procedure set out in Article 6 of the Directive (EU) 2016/797 shall be initiated.
The Agency shall organise an efficient processing of all the information received in order to facilitate the Change Control Management process for improvement/further development of the specifications, including the test specifications. ’;
(36)Section 7.2 is amended as follows:
(a)two new sections 7.2.1a and 7.2.1b are added below section 7.2.1 as follows:
‘7.2.1a
Changes to an existing On-Board subsystem
This point defines the principles to be applied by the entities managing the change and authorising entities in line with the EC verification procedure described in Article 15(9), Article 21(12) and Annex IV of Directive (EU) 2016/797. This procedure is further developed in Article 13, 15 and 16 of Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) 2018/545 and in Decision 2010/713/EC.
This point applies in case of any change(s) to an existing on-board subsystem or on-board subsystem type, including renewal or upgrade. It does not apply in case of changes covered by Article 15(1)(a) of Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) 2018/545.
7.2.1a.1
Rules to manage changes in on-board CCS subsystems
1.Parts, as defined in Table 4.1 of this TSI, and basic parameters of the on-board subsystem that are not affected by the change(s) are exempt from conformity assessment against the provisions in this TSI. The list of parts and basic parameters affected by the change is to be provided by the entity managing the change.
2.A new assessment against the requirements of the applicable TSI shall only be needed for the basic parameters which may be affected by the change(s).
3.The entity managing the change shall inform a Notified Body of all changes affecting the conformity of the subsystem with the requirements of the relevant TSI(s) requiring new checks, in accordance with Articles 15 and 16 of Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) 2018/545 and Decision 2010/713/EU and by application of modules SB, SD/SF or SH1 for the EC verification, and if relevant Article 15(5) of Directive (EU) 2016/797. This information shall be provided by the entity managing the change with corresponding references to the technical documentation relating to the existing EC certificate.
4.The entity managing the change has to justify and document that applicable requirements remain consistent at subsystem level, and this has to be assessed by a Notified Body.
5.The changes impacting the Basic Design Characteristics of the on-board subsystem are defined in Table 7.1 Basic Design Characteristics shall be classified as 15(1)(c) or 15(1)(d) of Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) 2018/545, and in accordance with Table 7.1 changes not impacting but related to the basic characteristics shall be classified by the entity managing the change as 15(1)(b) of Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) 2018/545.
6.Changes not covered by point 7.2.1a.1(5) above are deemed not to have any impact on the basic design characteristics. They will be classified by the entity managing the change as 15(1)(a) or 15(1)(b) of Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) 2018/545.
Note: The classification of the changes set out in points 7.2.1a.2(5) and 7.2.1a.2(6) above is performed by the entity managing the change without prejudice of the safety judgement mandated in Article 21(12)(b) of Directive (EU) 2016/797.
7.All changes shall remain compliant with the applicable TSIs regardless its classification.
Table 7.1 Basic design characteristics
|
1. TSI Point
|
2. Related basic design characteristic(s)
|
3. Changes not impacting the basic design characteristics according to 15(1)(b) of Regulation (EU) 2018/545
|
4. Changes impacting the basic design characteristic but inside the acceptable range of parameters therefore to be classified as Art 15.1(c) of Regulation (EU) 2018/545
|
5. Changes impacting the basic design characteristic and outside the acceptable range of parameters therefore to be classified as Art 15.1(d) of Regulation (EU) 2018/545
|
|
4.2.2
On-board ETCS functionality
|
Set of specification of Annex A
|
Not Applicable
|
Not Applicable
|
Use another Annex A set of specifications
|
|
|
On-board ETCS implementation
|
Fulfilling all the conditions in point 7.2.1a.2 (change of realisation)
|
Not Applicable
|
Not fulfilling all the conditions in point 7.2.1a.2 (Functional change)
|
|
|
Managing information about the completeness of the train
|
Not applicable
|
Adding or removing train integrity supervision
|
Not applicable
|
|
4.2.17.1 ETCS System Compatibility
|
ETCS System Compatibility
|
Not applicable
|
Adding or removing ESC statements checked by a NoBo
|
Not applicable
|
|
4.2.4 Mobile communication functions for railways GSM-R
4.2.4.2
Voice and operational communication application
|
GSM-R Baseline
|
Not applicable
|
Not Applicable
|
Use another Baseline
|
|
|
Voice and operational communication implementation
|
Fulfilling all the conditions in point 7.2.1a.3 (change of realisation)
|
Not Applicable
|
Not fulfilling all the conditions in point 7.2.1a.3 (Functional change)
|
|
4.2.17.2 Radio System Compatibility
|
Radio Voice System Compatibility
|
Not applicable
|
Adding or removing RSC statements checked by a NoBo
|
Not applicable
|
|
4.2.4
Mobile communication functions for railways GSM-R
4.2.4.3
Data communication applications for ETCS
|
GSM-R Baseline
|
Not applicable
|
Not Applicable
|
Use another Baseline
|
|
|
Data communication for ETCS implementation
|
Fulfilling all the conditions in point 7.2.1a.3 (change of realisation)
|
Not Applicable
|
Not fulfilling all the conditions in point 7.2.1a.3 (Functional change)
|
|
4.2.17.2 Radio System Compatibility
|
Radio Data System Compatibility
|
Not applicable
|
Adding or removing RSC statements checked by a NoBo
|
Not applicable
|
|
4.2.4 Mobile communication functions for railways GSM-R
4.2.4.1 Basic communication function
|
SIM Card GSM-R Home Network
|
Not applicable
|
Replacement of a TSI compliant GSM-R SIM Card by another TSI compliant GSM-R SIM Card with a different GSM-R Home Network
|
Not applicable
|
|
|
SIM Card support of Group ID 555
|
Not applicable
|
Change the SIM Card support of Group ID 555
|
Not applicable
|
|
4.2.6.1 ETCS and Class B train protection
|
Class B train protection legacy system
|
The requirements for Class B system are the responsibility of the relevant Member State.
|
The requirements for Class B system are the responsibility of the relevant Member State.
|
Add or remove Class B train protection systems.
The requirements for Class B system are the responsibility of the relevant Member State.
|
|
4.2.5.1 Radio communication with the train
|
Class B radio legacy system
|
The requirements for Class B system are the responsibility of the relevant Member State.
|
The requirements for Class B system are the responsibility of the relevant Member State.
|
Add or remove Class B radio legacy systems.
The requirements for Class B system are the responsibility of the relevant Member State.
|
8.In order to establish the EC certificate, the Notified Body may refer to:
–The original EC certificate for parts of the design that are unchanged or those that are changed but do not affect the conformity of the subsystem, as far as it is still valid.
–Amendments to the original EC certificate for modified parts of the design that affect the conformity of the subsystem with the applicable TSI version used for the EC verification.
9.In any case, the entity managing the change shall ensure that the technical documentation which is relating to the EC certificate is updated accordingly.
10.The updated technical documentation, related to the EC certificate is referred to in the technical file accompanying the EC declaration of verification issued by the entity managing the change for on-board subsystem declared as conformant to the modified type.
7.2.1a.2
Conditions for a change in the On-board ETCS functionality that does not impact the basic design characteristics
1.The target functionality remains unchanged or is set to the state already expected during the original certification or authorisation. 2.The interfaces relevant for safety & technical compatibility remain unchanged or are set to the state already expected during the original certification or authorisation
3.An Assessment Body (CSM RA) as specified in point 3.2.1 has positively assessed the change. Any new/updated exported constraint or condition for use shall be included in the release note defined in 7.2.1a.2(7).
4.The change is performed under a quality management system approved by a notified body (e.g. according to modules CH1, SH1, CD, SD). For other modules (e.g. CF, SF) it shall be justified that the verification performed remains valid.
5.The individual configuration management defines a “system identifier” as a numbering scheme to identify the system version of a CCS subsystem and distinguish between a functional and a realization identifier. The ‘functional identifier’ is part of the system identifier and means a figure or a number of figures defined by the individual configuration management, which represents a baseline of the basic design characteristics for CCS implemented in a CCS subsystem. The ‘Realization identifier’ is part of the system identifier and means a figure or a number of figures defined by the individual configuration management of a supplier, which represents a specific configuration (e.g. HW and SW) of a CCS subsystem.
6.The functional part of the system identifier has not been changed after the change.
7.As part of the configuration management required by Article 5 of the of Regulation (EU) 2018/545 a release note about the change shall be made available to all parties concerned (e.g. The Agency and the national safety authorities, IMs, RUs, ECMs and keeper of the vehicle). More relevant information will be made available upon their request.
7.2.1a.3
Conditions for a change in the on-board mobile communication functions for railways that does not impact the basic design characteristics
1.The target functionality remains unchanged or is set to the state already expected during the original certification or authorisation.
2.The interfaces relevant for technical compatibility remain unchanged or are set to the state already expected during the original certification or authorisation
3.The change is performed under a quality management system approved by a notified body (e.g. according to modules CH1, SH1, CD, SD). For other modules (e.g. CF, SF) it shall be justified that the verification performed remains valid.
4.As part of the configuration management required by Article 5 of the of Regulation (EU) 2018/545, a release note about the change shall be made available to all parties concerned (e.g. The Agency and the national safety authorities, IMs, RUs, ECMs and keeper of the vehicle). More relevant information will be made available upon their request.
7.2.1b
Changes to an existing trackside subsystem
This point defines the principles to be applied by the entities managing the change and authorising entities in line with the EC verification procedure described in Article 15(9), Article 18(6) of Directive (EU) 2016/797 and in Decision 2010/713/EC.
In the event of upgrading or renewing the Control-Command and Signalling Subsystems bearing EC certificate of verification the following rules apply:
1.The changes require new authorisation if they impact basic parameters as defined in table 7.2.
Table 7.2 Trackside basic parameters modifications which requires a new authorisation
|
Basic Parameter
|
Modification which requires a new authorisation
|
|
4.2.3
|
Trackside ETCS functionality
|
Not fulfilling all the conditions in point 7.2.1b.1
|
|
4.2.4
4.2.4.2
|
Mobile communication functions for railways GSM-R
Voice and operational communication application
|
Not fulfilling all the conditions in point 7.2.1b.2
|
|
4.2.4
4.2.4.3
|
Mobile communication functions for railways GSM-R
Data communication applications for ETCS
|
Not fulfilling all the conditions in point 7.2.1b.2
|
2.The changes are permitted to be dealt with by only re-assessing those modifications that affect the conformity of the subsystem with the applicable TSIs version used for the EC verification. The entity managing the change has to justify and document that applicable requirements remain consistent at subsystem level, and this has to be assessed by a Notified Body.
3.The entity managing the change shall inform the Notified Body of all changes that may affect the conformity of the subsystem with the requirements of the relevant TSI(s) or the conditions for validity of the certificate.
This information shall be provided by the entity managing the change with corresponding references to the technical documentation relating to the existing EC certificate.
4.In order to establish the EC certificate, the Notified Body may to refer to:
–The original EC certificate for parts of the design that are unchanged or those that are changed but do not affect the conformity of the subsystem, as far as it is still valid.
–Additional EC certificate (amending the original certificate) for modified parts of the design that affect the conformity of the subsystem with the applicable TSI version used for the EC verification.
5.In any case, the entity managing the change shall ensure that the technical documentation which is relating to the EC certificate is updated accordingly.
7.2.1b.1
Conditions for a change in the trackside ETCS functionality that requires new authorisation for placing in service if not fulfilled
1.The target functionality remains unchanged or is set to the state already expected during the original certification or authorisation.
2.The interfaces relevant for safety & technical compatibility remain unchanged or are set to the state already expected during the original certification or authorisation.
3.An Assessment Body (CMS-RA) as specified in point 3.2.1 has positively assessed the change. Any new/updated exported constraint or condition for use shall be included in the release note defined in 7.2.1b.2(7).
4.The change is performed under a quality management system approved by a notified body (e.g. according to modules CH1, SH1, CD, SD). For other modules (e.g. CF, SF, SG) it shall be justified that the verification performed remains valid.
5.The individual configuration management defines a “system identifier” as a numbering scheme to identify the system version of a CCS subsystem and distinguish between a functional and a realization identifier. The ‘functional identifier’ is part of the system identifier and means a figure or a number of figures defined by the individual configuration management, which represents a baseline of the basic design characteristics for CCS implemented in a CCS subsystem. The ‘Realization identifier’ is part of the system identifier and means a figure or a number of figures defined by the individual configuration management of a supplier, which represents a specific configuration (e.g. HW and SW) of a CCS subsystem.
6.The functional part of the system identifier has not been changed after the change.
7. A release note about the change shall be made available to all parties concerned (e.g. The Agency and the national safety authorities, IMs, RUs). More relevant information will be made available upon their request.
7.2.1b.2
Conditions for a change in the trackside mobile communication functions for railways that requires a new authorisation for placing in service if not fulfilled
1.The target functionality remains unchanged or is set to the state already expected during the original certification or authorisation.
2.The interfaces relevant for technical compatibility remain unchanged or are set to the state already expected during the original certification or authorisation.
3.The change is performed under a quality management system approved by a notified body (e.g. according to modules CH1, SH1, CD, SD). For other modules (e.g. CF, SF, SG) it shall be justified that the verification performed remains valid.
4.A release note about the change shall be made available to all parties concerned (e.g. The Agency and the national safety authorities, IMs, RUs). More relevant information will be made available upon their request.
7.2.1b.3
Impact on the technical compatibility between on-board and trackside parts of the CCS subsystems
(b)in section 7.2.3, the text ‘Article 29(1) of Directive 2008/57/EC’ is replaced by ‘Article 51(1) of Directive (EU) 2016/797’;
(c)section 7.2.6
is replaced by the following:
‘7.2.6.
Conditions for mandatory and optional functions
The applicant for EC verification of a Control-command and Signalling Trackside subsystem shall check whether Control-command and Signalling Trackside functions, which are defined “optional” in this TSI, are required by other TSIs or national rules or by the application of risk evaluation and assessment to ensure safe integration of subsystems.
The trackside implementation of national or optional functions shall not prevent the use of that infrastructure by a train that complies only with the mandatory requirements of the On-board Class A system except as required for the following on-board optional functions:
(1)An ETCS Level 3 Trackside application requires that the on-board is able to confirm the train integrity;
(2)An ETCS Level 1 Trackside application with infill requires that the on-board is equipped with the corresponding in-fill data transmission (Euroloop or radio) if the release speed is set to zero for safety reasons (e.g. protection of danger points).
(3)When ETCS needs data transmission by radio, the data radio communication part as specified in this TSI is required.
An on-board subsystem, which incorporates a KER STM, may make it necessary to implement the K-interface. ’;
(37)Section 7.3.2 is amended as follows:
(a)the text ‘point’ is replaced by ‘section’;
(b)the text ‘already in service’ is replaced by ‘already on the market’;
(38)Section 7.4.1 is replaced by:
‘7.4.1
Trackside installations
Articles 1, 2 and Annex I to Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) 2017/6 of 5 January 2017 on the European Rail Traffic Management System European deployment plan shall apply as referred to in Article 47 of Regulation (EU) No 1315/2013.
Trackside shall not install and operate the Euroloop and radio infill data transmission, except on already existing installations or currently planned projects that use those data transmission. Such planned projects shall be notified to the European Commission by 30 June 2019.
7.4.1.1
High-speed network
It is mandatory to fit ETCS trackside when:
1.installing for the first time the train protection part of a Control-Command and Signalling Trackside Subsystem (with or without a Class B system); or
2.upgrading the existing train protection part of a Control-Command and Signalling Trackside Subsystem, where this would change the functions, performance and/or interoperability-relevant interfaces (air gaps) of the existing legacy system. This does not apply to modifications deemed necessary to mitigate safety-related defects in the legacy installation.’;
(39)Section 7.4.2.1 is amended as follows:
‘7.4.2.1.
New vehicles
1.New vehicles authorised to be placed on the market for the first time, including vehicles authorised in conformity to a type in accordance with Article 25 of Directive 2016/797/EC, shall be equipped with ETCS in accordance with Annex A of this TSI and shall comply with set of specifications #2 or #3 referred to in Table 2.1 of Annex A.
2.The requirement to be equipped with ETCS does not apply to:
(1)new mobile railway infrastructure construction and maintenance equipment,
(2)new shunting locomotives,
(3)other new vehicles not intended for operating on high-speed lines;
(a)if they are intended exclusively for national service operated outside the corridors defined in point Annex I of Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) 2017/6 and outside the lines ensuring the connections to the main European ports, marshalling yards, freight terminals and freight transport areas defined in Article 2(1) of Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) 2017/6 or
(b)if they are intended for off-TEN cross-border service, i.e., service until the first station in the neighbouring country or to the first station where there are connections further in the neighbouring country.
3.All vehicle type authorisations granted based on set of specifications #1 referred to in Table 2.1 of Annex A of this TSI shall not remain valid for authorising new vehicles in conformity to those vehicle types. All vehicles already authorised according to those vehicle types are not affected. ’;
(40)New section 7.4.2.3 is added as follows:
‘7.4.2.3
Application of the TSI requirements for new vehicles during a transition phase
1.Some projects or contracts, which started before the date of application of this TSI, may lead to the production of new vehicles equipped with ETCS complying with specification #1 referred to in Table 2.1. of Annex A of this TSI, and which do not fully comply with Article 7.4.2.1 of this TSI. For rolling stock concerned by those projects or contracts, and in accordance with point (f) of Article 4(3) of Directive (EU) 2016/797/EC, a transition phase is defined, during which the application of Section 7.4.2.1 of this TSI is not mandatory.
2.This transition phase applies to new vehicles based upon an existing authorised vehicle type issued before 1st January 2019.
3.The transition phase is:
(a)up to June 30 2020: new vehicles authorised to be placed on the market for the first time shall be equipped with ETCS in accordance with set of specifications #1, #2 or #3 referred to in Table 2.1 of Annex A of this TSI.
(b)as part of the authorisation, a date is specified by when the new vehicle type variant for specifications #2 or #3 is authorised and the concerned vehicles are upgraded to specifications #2 or #3 in conformity to the new variant. This migration date shall not be later than 01 July 2022. ’;
(41)In section 7.4.3, the text ‘placing in service’ is replaced by ‘placing on the market’;
(42)Section 7.4.4 is amended as follows:
(a)In the first paragraph the text ‘those lines with ETCS and decommissioning of class B systems’ is replaced by ‘those lines with ETCS and Class A Radio and decommissioning of class B systems’;
(b)In point (1) the text ‘General and context description, including facts and figures on existing train protection systems, such as capacity, safety, reliability performance, remaining economic lifetime of the installed equipment and cost benefit analysis of ETCS implementation.’ is replaced by ‘General and context description, including:
(1)facts and figures on existing train protection systems, such as capacity, safety, reliability performance;
(2) remaining economic lifetime of the installed equipment and cost benefit analysis of ETCS and Class A Radio implementation;
(3)national requirements relevant for Baseline 3 on-board units;
(4) information on communication systems between on-board units and track side installations (e.g. radio circuit switching or packet switching, in-fill options for ETCS; Class B communication systems)’;
(c)In point (4)(i) the text ‘The dates of ETCS deployment’ is replace by ‘The dates of ETCS and Class A Radio deployment’;
(d)In point (4)(iiii) the text ‘or other parts of the network.’ is replaced by ‘or other parts of the network, including service facilities’;
(e)In the third paragraph the text ‘at least every five years.’ is replaced by ‘at least every five year. The update of the national implementation plans shall take into account the introduction of the next generation communication system(s), including but no limited to the date of start of operation and, when applicable, the date of decommissioning of GSM-R on (parts of) the Network.’;
(43)the text ‘Article 29(1) of Directive 2008/57/EC’ is replaced by ‘Article 51(1) of Directive (EU) 2016/797’;
(44)In section 7.5 the fourth paragraph is replaced by the following:
‘Implementing a train detection system that is compliant with the requirements of this TSI can be done independently of the installation of ETCS or GSM-R.’;
(45)A new section 7.5a is added below section 7.5 as follows:
‘7.5a ETCS and radio system compatibility checks implementation rules
Existing vehicles shall be deemed compatible with the ETCS and radio system compatibility types of the networks on which they are operating by 1 September 2019 without any further checks, maintaining the existing restrictions or conditions for use.
Any subsequent modification of the vehicle or the infrastructure regarding the technical or route compatibility shall be managed according to the requirements specified for ETCS and Radio system compatibility. ’;
(46)In section 7.6.1, the text ‘points below should be read’ is replaced by ‘points below shall be read’;
(47)Section 7.6.2.1 is amended as follows;
(48)the text ‘the vehicle should have’ is replaced by ‘the vehicle shall have’;
(a)the text ‘Index 77, point 3.1.2.4’ is replace by ‘Index 77, point 3.1.2.3’;
(b)the text ‘Index 77, point 3.1.8’ is replace by ‘Index 77, point 3.1.7’;
(49)Section 7.6.2.2 is amended as follows:
(a)the text ‘Index 77, point 3.1.2.4’ is replace by ‘Index 77, point 3.1.2.3’;
(50)In the last two rows in the third column of the table, the text ‘set of specifications 2’ is replace by ‘set of specifications 2 or 3’;
(51)Section 7.6.2.3 is amended as follows:
(a)the text ‘Index 77, point 3.1.2.4’ is replace by ‘Index 77, point 3.1.2.3’;
(b)the text ‘Index 77, point 3.1.8’ is replace by ‘Index 77, point 3.1.7’;
(c)in the first row in the second column of the table; the text ‘T3’ is replaced by ‘P’;
(d)in the first row in the third column of the table, the text ‘This Specific Case is linked with the use of TVM’ is replaced by ‘This Specific Case is linked with the use of track circuits using electrical joints’;
(e)in the first row in the first column of the table, the text ‘the vehicle should have’ is replaced by ‘the vehicle shall have’;
(f)a new row is added at the end of the table as follows:
|
4.2.10 Trackside Train Detection Systems
Index 77, point 3.1.4.1.
In addition to the TSI requirements, the allowed maximum amount of sand per unit and per rail within 30 s is: 750 g
|
P
|
This specific case is linked to the use of track circuits with a higher sensitivity regarding the isolation layer between wheels and rails due to sanding on the French Network
|
(52)Section 7.6.2.6 is replaced by the following:
‘7.6.2.6. Sweden
|
Specific case
|
Category
|
Notes
|
|
4.2.4 Mobile communication functions for railways – GSM-R
Index 33, statement 4.2.3:
It is permissible to put on the market on-board Control-Command and Signalling Subsystems including 2 Watt GSM-R voice cab radios and ETCS data only radios. The subsystems shall be able to operate in networks with -82 dBm.
|
P
|
No impact on interoperability
|
|
4.2.10 — Trackside Train Detection Systems
Index 77, point 3.1.2.1:
Maximum axle distance between two axles ≤ 17,5 m (ai in Fig. 1, point 3.1.2.1).
|
P
|
|
|
4.2.10 — Trackside Train Detection Systems
Index 77, point 3.1.2.3:
Minimum axle distance between first and last axle ≥ 4,5 m (L-b1-b2 in Fig. 1, point 3.1.2.3).
|
P
|
|
|
4.2.10 — Trackside Train Detection Systems
Index 77, point 3.2.2.5:
Frequency range: 0,0-2,0 Hz
Interference current limit [rms value]: 25,0 A Evaluation method: Low-Pass filter
Evaluation parameters: (Down sampling to 1 kHz, followed by) 2.0 Hz 4th order Butterworth low-pass filter, followed by an ideal rectifier to give the absolute value.
The maximum interference current for a rail vehicle must not exceed 25,0 A in the frequency range 0,0-2,0 Hz. Inrush current may exceed 45,0 A for less than 1,5 seconds and 25 A for less than 2,5 seconds.
|
P
|
|
’;
(53)In section 7.6.2.7 the text ‘Index 77, point 3.1.2.4’ is replace by ‘Index 77, point 3.1.4.1’
(54)In section 7.6.2.8 a new row is added at the end of the table as follows:
‘
|
4.2.10 Trackside Train Detection Systems
Index 77, point 3.2.2.5:
Frequency range: 93 - 110 Hz
Interference current limit [rms value]:
2.8 A (for influencing unit)
2 A (for one traction unit)
Evaluation method: Band Pass Filters
Evaluation parameters:
• BP filter characteristics:
Centre frequencies: 95, 96, 98, 100, 104, 106 and 108 Hz
3dB-Bandwidth: 4 Hz
Butterworth, 6th order
• RMS calculation:
Integration time: 0.5 s
Time overlap: 50 %
|
T3
|
This specific case is needed because these track circuits may be modified by shifting the centre frequency from 100 Hz to 106,7 Hz. This would make obsolete a vehicle related NTR requiring a 100 Hz monitoring system.
|
’;
(55)A new section 7.6.2.9 is added after 7.6.2.8 as follows:
‘7.6.2.9 Italy
|
Specific case
|
Category
|
Notes
|
|
|
|
|
|
4.2.10 — Trackside Train Detection Systems
Index 77, point 3.2.2.4 and point 3.2.2.6:
Frequency range: 82 - 86 Hz
Interference current limit [rms value]: 1.125 A
Evaluation method: FFT
Evaluation parameters: Time window 1s, Hanning window, 50% overlap, average on 6 consecutive windows
|
P
|
|
’;
(56)A new section 7.6.2.10 is added after 7.6.2.9 as follows:
‘7.6.2.10 Czech Republic
|
Specific case
|
Category
|
Notes
|
|
4.2.10 — Trackside Train Detection Systems
Index 77, point 3.2.2.4 and point 3.2.2.6:
Frequency range: 70.5 - 79.5 Hz
Interference current limit [rms value]: 1 A
Evaluation method: Band Pass Filters
Evaluation parameters:
•
BP filter characteristics:
Centre frequencies: 73,75, 77 Hz (continuous band)
3dB-Bandwidth: 5 Hz
Butterworth, order 2*4
•
RMS calculation:
Integration time: 0.5 s
Time overlap: min 75 %
Frequency range: 271.5 – 278.5 Hz
Interference current limit [rms value]: 0.5 A
Evaluation method: Band Pass Filters
Evaluation parameters:
•
BP filter characteristics:
Centre frequencies: 274, 276 Hz (continuous band)
3dB-Bandwidth: 5 Hz
Butterworth, order 2*4
•
RMS calculation:
Integration time: 0.5 s
Time overlap: min 75 %
|
T3
|
This specific case is needed as long as track circuits type EFCP are used.
|
’;
(57)A new section 7.6.2.11 is added after 7.6.2.10 as follows:
‘7.6.2.10 The Netherlands
|
Specific case
|
Category
|
Notes
|
|
4.2.10 — Trackside Train Detection Systems
Index 77, point 3.2.2.6:
Frequency range: 65-85 Hz
(ATBEG limit)
Interference current limit [rms value]: 0,5 A
Evaluation method: Band Pass Filters
Evaluation parameters:
•
BP filter characteristics
Centre frequency: 75 Hz
3dB-Bandwith: 20 Hz
20dB-Bandwith: 40 Hz
•
RMS calculation
Integration time: 5 s
Time overlap: 80%
Transient shorter than 1s only exceeding the ATBEG limit and not the GRS limit may be ignored.
Frequency range: 65-85 Hz
(GRS TC limit)
Interference current limit [rms value]: 1,7 A
Evaluation method: Band Pass Filters
Evaluation parameters:
•
BP filter characteristics
Centre frequency: 75 Hz
3dB-Bandwith: 20 Hz
20dB-Bandwith: 40 Hz
•
RMS calculation
Integration time: 1,8 s
Time overlap: 80%
|
T3
|
This Specific Cases is needed in the context of the Class-B system ATBEG.
|
’;
(58)Annex A is replaced by the following:
‘Annex A
References
For each reference made in the basic parameters (Chapter 4 of this TSI) the following table indicates the corresponding mandatory specifications, via the Index in Table A 2 (Table A 2.1, Table A 2.2, Table A 2.3).
Table A 1
|
Reference in Chapter 4
|
Index number (see Table A 2)
|
|
4.1
|
|
|
4.1 a
|
Intentionally deleted
|
|
4.1 b
|
Intentionally deleted
|
|
4.1 c
|
3
|
|
|
|
|
4.2.1
|
|
|
4.2.1 a
|
27, 78
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
4.2.2
|
|
|
4.2.2 a
|
14
|
|
4.2.2 b
|
1, 4, 13, 15, 60
|
|
4.2.2 c
|
31, 37b, c, d
|
|
4.2.2 d
|
18, 20
|
|
4.2.2 e
|
6
|
|
4.2.2 f
|
7, 81, 82
|
|
|
|
|
4.2.3
|
|
|
4.2.3 a
|
14
|
|
4.2.3 b
|
1, 4, 13, 15, 60
|
|
4.2.3 c
|
Intentionally deleted
|
|
4.2.3 d
|
18, 21
|
|
|
|
|
4.2.4
|
|
|
4.2.4 a
|
64, 65
|
|
4.2.4 b
|
66
|
|
4.2.4 c
|
67
|
|
4.2.4 d
|
68
|
|
4.2.4 e
|
73, 74
|
|
4.2.4 f
|
32, 33
|
|
4.2.4 g
|
48
|
|
4.2.4 h
|
69, 70
|
|
4.2.4 j
|
71, 72
|
|
4.2.4 k
|
75, 76
|
|
|
|
|
4.2.5
|
|
|
4.2.5 a
|
64, 65
|
|
4.2.5 b
|
10, 39, 40
|
|
4.2.5 c
|
19, 20
|
|
4.2.5 d
|
9, 43
|
|
4.2.5 e
|
16, 50
|
|
|
|
|
4.2.6
|
|
|
4.2.6 a
|
8, 25, 26, 36 c, 49, 52
|
|
4.2.6 b
|
29, 45
|
|
4.2.6 c
|
46
|
|
4.2.6 d
|
34
|
|
4.2.6 e
|
20
|
|
4.2.6 f
|
Intentionally deleted
|
|
|
|
|
4.2.7
|
|
|
4.2.7 a
|
12
|
|
4.2.7 b
|
62, 63
|
|
4.2.7 c
|
34
|
|
4.2.7 d
|
9
|
|
4.2.7 e
|
16
|
|
|
|
|
4.2.8
|
|
|
4.2.8 a
|
11, 79, 83
|
|
|
|
|
4.2.9
|
|
|
4.2.9 a
|
23
|
|
|
|
|
4.2.10
|
|
|
4.2.10 a
|
77 (point 3.1)
|
|
|
|
|
4.2.11
|
|
|
4.2.11 a
|
77 (point 3.2)
|
|
|
|
|
4.2.12
|
|
|
4.2.12 a
|
6, 51
|
|
|
|
|
4.2.13
|
|
|
4.2.13 a
|
32, 33, 51, 80
|
|
|
|
|
4.2.14
|
|
|
4.2.14 a
|
5
|
|
|
|
|
4.2.15
|
|
|
4.2.15 a
|
38
|
Specifications
One of the three tables in Table A 2 (Table A 2.1, Table A 2.2, Table A 2.3) of this Annex shall be applied for the trackside subsystem. For the on-board subsystem either Table A 2.2 or Table A 2.3 shall be applied.
When a document listed in Table A 2 incorporates, by copying or by reference to, a clearly identified point of another document, this point, and only this, shall be considered a part of the document listed in Table A 2.
For the purposes of this TSI, when a document listed in Table A 2 makes a “mandatory” or “normative” reference to a document not listed in Table A 2, the referenced document shall always be understood as an acceptable means of compliance with basic parameters (that can be used for certification of Interoperability Constituents and Subsystems and not requiring future revisions of the TSI) and not as a mandatory specification.
Note: specifications indicated as ‘Reserved’ in Table A 2 are also listed as open points in Annex G when there is a need for notification of national rules to close the corresponding open points. Reserved documents not listed as open points are intended as improvements to the system.
Table A 2.1 - List of mandatory specifications
|
Index N
|
Set of specifications # 1 (only for trackside Subsystems)
(ETCS Baseline 2 and GSM-R Baseline 1)
|
|
|
Reference
|
Name of Specification
|
Version
|
Notes
|
|
1
|
ERA/ERTMS/003204
|
ERTMS/ETCS Functional requirement specification
|
5.0
|
|
|
2
|
Intentionally deleted
|
|
|
|
|
3
|
SUBSET-023
|
Glossary of Terms and Abbreviations
|
2.0.0
|
|
|
4
|
SUBSET-026
|
System Requirements Specification
|
2.3.0
|
|
|
5
|
SUBSET-027
|
FFFIS Juridical recorder-downloading tool
|
2.3.0
|
Note 1
|
|
6
|
SUBSET-033
|
FIS for man-machine interface
|
2.0.0
|
|
|
7
|
SUBSET-034
|
FIS for the train interface
|
2.0.0
|
|
|
8
|
SUBSET-035
|
Specific Transmission Module FFFIS
|
2.1.1
|
|
|
9
|
SUBSET-036
|
FFFIS for Eurobalise
|
2.4.1
|
|
|
10
|
SUBSET-037
|
EuroRadio FIS
|
2.3.0
|
|
|
11
|
SUBSET-038
|
Offline key management FIS
|
2.3.0
|
|
|
12
|
SUBSET-039
|
FIS for the RBC/RBC handover
|
2.3.0
|
|
|
13
|
SUBSET-040
|
Dimensioning and Engineering rules
|
2.3.0
|
|
|
14
|
SUBSET-041
|
Performance Requirements for Interoperability
|
2.1.0
|
|
|
15
|
SUBSET-108
|
Interoperability related consolidation on TSI Annex A documents
|
1.2.0
|
|
|
16
|
SUBSET-044
|
FFFIS for Euroloop
|
2.3.0
|
|
|
17
|
Intentionally deleted
|
|
|
|
|
18
|
SUBSET-046
|
Radio infill FFFS
|
2.0.0
|
|
|
19
|
SUBSET-047
|
Trackside-Trainborne FIS for Radio infill
|
2.0.0
|
|
|
20
|
SUBSET-048
|
Trainborne FFFIS for Radio infill
|
2.0.0
|
|
|
21
|
SUBSET-049
|
Radio infill FIS with LEU/interlocking
|
2.0.0
|
|
|
22
|
Intentionally deleted
|
|
|
|
|
23
|
SUBSET-054
|
Responsibilities and rules for the assignment of values to ETCS variables
|
2.1.0
|
|
|
24
|
Intentionally deleted
|
|
|
|
|
25
|
SUBSET-056
|
STM FFFIS Safe time layer
|
2.2.0
|
|
|
26
|
SUBSET-057
|
STM FFFIS Safe link layer
|
2.2.0
|
|
|
27
|
SUBSET-091
|
Safety Requirements for the Technical Interoperability of ETCS in Levels 1 and 2
|
2.5.0
|
|
|
28
|
Intentionally deleted
|
|
|
|
|
29
|
SUBSET-102
|
Test specification for interface “K”
|
1.0.0
|
|
|
30
|
Intentionally deleted
|
|
|
|
|
31
|
SUBSET-094
|
Functional requirements for an on-board reference test facility
|
2.0.2
|
|
|
32
|
EIRENE FRS
|
GSM-R Functional requirements specification
|
8.0.0
|
Note 10
|
|
33
|
EIRENE SRS
|
GSM-R System requirements specification
|
16.0.0
|
Note 10
|
|
34
|
A11T6001
|
(MORANE) Radio Transmission FFFIS for EuroRadio
|
13.0.0
|
|
|
35
|
Intentionally deleted
|
|
|
|
|
36 a
|
Intentionally deleted
|
|
|
|
|
36 b
|
Intentionally deleted
|
|
|
|
|
36 c
|
SUBSET-074-2
|
FFFIS STM Test cases document
|
1.0.0
|
|
|
37 a
|
Intentionally deleted
|
|
|
|
|
37 b
|
SUBSET-076-5-2
|
Test cases related to features
|
2.3.3
|
|
|
37 c
|
SUBSET-076-6-3
|
Test sequences
|
2.3.3
|
|
|
37 d
|
SUBSET-076-7
|
Scope of the test specifications
|
1.0.2
|
|
|
37 e
|
Intentionally deleted
|
|
|
|
|
38
|
06E068
|
ETCS Marker-board definition
|
2.0
|
|
|
39
|
SUBSET-092-1
|
ERTMS EuroRadio Conformance Requirements
|
2.3.0
|
|
|
40
|
SUBSET-092-2
|
ERTMS EuroRadio test cases safety layer
|
2.3.0
|
|
|
41
|
Intentionally deleted
|
|
|
|
|
42
|
Intentionally deleted
|
|
|
|
|
43
|
SUBSET 085
|
Test specification for Eurobalise FFFIS
|
2.2.2
|
|
|
44
|
Intentionally deleted
|
|
|
|
|
45
|
SUBSET-101
|
Interface “K” Specification
|
1.0.0
|
|
|
46
|
SUBSET-100
|
Interface “G” Specification
|
1.0.1
|
|
|
47
|
Intentionally deleted
|
|
|
|
|
48
|
Reserved
|
Test specification for mobile equipment GSM-R
|
|
Note 4
|
|
49
|
SUBSET-059
|
Performance requirements for STM
|
2.1.1
|
|
|
50
|
SUBSET-103
|
Test specification for Euroloop
|
1.0.0
|
|
|
51
|
Reserved
|
Ergonomic aspects of the DMI
|
|
|
|
52
|
SUBSET-058
|
FFFIS STM Application layer
|
2.1.1
|
|
|
53
|
Intentionally deleted
|
|
|
|
|
54
|
Intentionally deleted
|
|
|
|
|
55
|
Intentionally deleted
|
|
|
|
|
56
|
Intentionally deleted
|
|
|
|
|
57
|
Intentionally deleted
|
|
|
|
|
58
|
Intentionally deleted
|
|
|
|
|
59
|
Intentionally deleted
|
|
|
|
|
60
|
Intentionally deleted
|
|
|
|
|
61
|
Intentionally deleted
|
|
|
|
|
62
|
Reserved
|
RBC-RBC Test specification for safe communication interface
|
|
|
|
63
|
SUBSET-098
|
RBC-RBC Safe Communication Interface
|
1.0.0
|
|
|
64
|
EN 301 515
|
Global System for Mobile Communication (GSM); Requirements for GSM operation on railways
|
2.3.0
|
Note 2
|
|
65
|
TS 102 281
|
Detailed requirements for GSM operation on railways
|
3.0.0
|
Note 3
|
|
66
|
TS 103 169
|
ASCI Options for Interoperability
|
1.1.1
|
|
|
67
|
(MORANE) P 38 T 9001
|
FFFIS for GSM-R SIM Cards
|
5.0
|
Note 10
|
|
68
|
ETSI TS 102 610
|
Railway Telecommunication; GSM; Usage of the UUIE for GSM operation on railways
|
1.3.0
|
|
|
69
|
(MORANE) F 10 T 6002
|
FFFS for Confirmation of High Priority Calls
|
5.0
|
|
|
70
|
(MORANE) F 12 T 6002
|
FIS for Confirmation of High Priority Calls
|
5.0
|
|
|
71
|
(MORANE) E 10 T 6001
|
FFFS for Functional Addressing
|
4.1
|
|
|
72
|
(MORANE) E 12 T 6001
|
FIS for Functional Addressing
|
5.1
|
|
|
73
|
(MORANE) F 10 T6001
|
FFFS for Location Dependent Addressing
|
4
|
|
|
74
|
(MORANE) F 12 T6001
|
FIS for Location Dependent Addressing
|
3
|
|
|
75
|
(MORANE) F 10 T 6003
|
FFFS for Presentation of Functional Numbers to Called and Calling Parties
|
4
|
|
|
76
|
(MORANE) F 12 T 6003
|
FIS for Presentation of Functional Numbers to Called and Calling Parties
|
4
|
|
|
77
|
ERA/ERTMS/033281
|
Interfaces between CCS trackside and other subsystems
|
4.0
|
Note 7
|
|
78
|
Reserved
|
Safety requirements for ETCS DMI functions
|
|
|
|
79
|
Not applicable
|
Not applicable
|
|
|
|
80
|
Not applicable
|
Not applicable
|
|
|
|
81
|
Not applicable
|
Not applicable
|
|
|
|
82
|
Not applicable
|
Not applicable
|
|
|
Table A 2.2 - List of mandatory specifications
|
Index N
|
Set of specifications # 2
(ETCS Baseline 3 Maintenance Release 1 and GSM-R Baseline 1)
|
|
|
Reference
|
Name of Specification
|
Version
|
Notes
|
|
1
|
Intentionally deleted
|
|
|
|
|
2
|
Intentionally deleted
|
|
|
|
|
3
|
SUBSET-023
|
Glossary of Terms and Abbreviations
|
3.1.0
|
|
|
4
|
SUBSET-026
|
System Requirements Specification
|
3.4.0
|
|
|
5
|
SUBSET-027
|
FIS Juridical Recording
|
3.1.0
|
|
|
6
|
ERA_ERTMS_015560
|
ETCS Driver Machine interface
|
3.4.0
|
|
|
7
|
SUBSET-034
|
Train Interface FIS
|
3.1.0
|
|
|
8
|
SUBSET-035
|
Specific Transmission Module FFFIS
|
3.1.0
|
|
|
9
|
SUBSET-036
|
FFFIS for Eurobalise
|
3.0.0
|
|
|
10
|
SUBSET-037
|
EuroRadio FIS
|
3.1.0
|
|
|
11
|
SUBSET-038
|
Offline key management FIS
|
3.0.0
|
|
|
12
|
SUBSET-039
|
FIS for the RBC/RBC handover
|
3.1.0
|
|
|
13
|
SUBSET-040
|
Dimensioning and Engineering rules
|
3.3.0
|
|
|
14
|
SUBSET-041
|
Performance Requirements for Interoperability
|
3.1.0
|
|
|
15
|
Intentionally deleted
|
|
|
|
|
16
|
SUBSET-044
|
FFFIS for Euroloop
|
2.4.0
|
|
|
17
|
Intentionally deleted
|
|
|
|
|
18
|
Intentionally deleted
|
|
|
|
|
19
|
SUBSET-047
|
Trackside-Trainborne FIS for Radio infill
|
3.0.0
|
|
|
20
|
SUBSET-048
|
Trainborne FFFIS for Radio infill
|
3.0.0
|
|
|
21
|
Intentionally deleted
|
|
|
|
|
22
|
Intentionally deleted
|
|
|
|
|
23
|
SUBSET-054
|
Responsibilities and rules for the assignment of values to ETCS variables
|
3.0.0
|
|
|
24
|
Intentionally deleted
|
|
|
|
|
25
|
SUBSET-056
|
STM FFFIS Safe time layer
|
3.0.0
|
|
|
26
|
SUBSET-057
|
STM FFFIS Safe link layer
|
3.0.0
|
|
|
27
|
SUBSET-091
|
Safety Requirements for the Technical Interoperability of ETCS in Levels 1 and 2
|
3.4.0
|
|
|
28
|
Intentionally deleted
|
|
|
|
|
29
|
SUBSET-102
|
Test specification for interface “K”
|
2.0.0
|
|
|
30
|
Intentionally deleted
|
|
|
|
|
31
|
SUBSET-094
|
Functional requirements for an on-board reference test facility
|
3.0.0
|
|
|
32
|
EIRENE FRS
|
GSM-R Functional requirements specification
|
8.0.0
|
Note 10
|
|
33
|
EIRENE SRS
|
GSM-R System requirements specification
|
16.0.0
|
Note 10
|
|
34
|
A11T6001
|
(MORANE) Radio Transmission FFFIS for EuroRadio
|
13.0.0
|
|
|
35
|
Intentionally deleted
|
|
|
|
|
36 a
|
Intentionally deleted
|
|
|
|
|
36 b
|
Intentionally deleted
|
|
|
|
|
36 c
|
SUBSET-074-2
|
FFFIS STM Test cases document
|
3.0.0
|
|
|
37 a
|
Intentionally deleted
|
|
|
|
|
37 b
|
SUBSET-076-5-2
|
Test cases related to features
|
3.2.0
|
|
|
37 c
|
SUBSET-076-6-3
|
Test sequences
|
3.1.0
|
|
|
37 d
|
SUBSET-076-7
|
Scope of the test specifications
|
3.2.0
|
|
|
37 e
|
Intentionally deleted
|
|
|
|
|
38
|
06E068
|
ETCS Marker-board definition
|
2.0
|
|
|
39
|
SUBSET-092-1
|
ERTMS EuroRadio Conformance Requirements
|
3.0.0
|
|
|
40
|
SUBSET-092-2
|
ERTMS EuroRadio test cases safety layer
|
3.0.0
|
|
|
41
|
Intentionally deleted
|
|
|
|
|
42
|
Intentionally deleted
|
|
|
|
|
43
|
SUBSET 085
|
Test specification for Eurobalise FFFIS
|
3.0.0
|
|
|
44
|
Intentionally deleted
|
|
|
|
|
45
|
SUBSET-101
|
Interface “K” Specification
|
2.0.0
|
|
|
46
|
SUBSET-100
|
Interface “G” Specification
|
2.0.0
|
|
|
47
|
Intentionally deleted
|
|
|
|
|
48
|
Reserved
|
Test specification for mobile equipment GSM-R
|
|
Note 4
|
|
49
|
SUBSET-059
|
Performance requirements for STM
|
3.0.0
|
|
|
50
|
SUBSET-103
|
Test specification for Euroloop
|
1.1.0
|
|
|
51
|
Intentionally deleted
|
|
|
|
|
52
|
SUBSET-058
|
FFFIS STM Application layer
|
3.1.0
|
|
|
53
|
Intentionally deleted
|
|
|
|
|
54
|
Intentionally deleted
|
|
|
|
|
55
|
Intentionally deleted
|
|
|
|
|
56
|
Intentionally deleted
|
|
|
|
|
57
|
Intentionally deleted
|
|
|
|
|
58
|
Intentionally deleted
|
|
|
|
|
59
|
Intentionally deleted
|
|
|
|
|
60
|
SUBSET-104
|
ETCS System Version Management
|
3.2.0
|
|
|
61
|
Intentionally deleted
|
|
|
|
|
62
|
Intentionally deleted
|
|
|
|
|
63
|
SUBSET-098
|
RBC-RBC Safe Communication Interface
|
3.0.0
|
|
|
64
|
EN 301 515
|
Global System for Mobile Communication (GSM); Requirements for GSM operation on railways
|
2.3.0
|
Note 2
|
|
65
|
TS 102 281
|
Detailed requirements for GSM operation on railways
|
3.0.0
|
Note 3
|
|
66
|
TS 103 169
|
ASCI Options for Interoperability
|
1.1.1
|
|
|
67
|
(MORANE) P 38 T 9001
|
FFFIS for GSM-R SIM Cards
|
5.0
|
Note 10
|
|
68
|
ETSI TS 102 610
|
Railway Telecommunication; GSM; Usage of the UUIE for GSM operation on railways
|
1.3.0
|
|
|
69
|
(MORANE) F 10 T 6002
|
FFFS for Confirmation of High Priority Calls
|
5.0
|
|
|
70
|
(MORANE) F 12 T 6002
|
FIS for Confirmation of High Priority Calls
|
5.0
|
|
|
71
|
(MORANE) E 10 T 6001
|
FFFS for Functional Addressing
|
4.1
|
|
|
72
|
(MORANE) E 12 T 6001
|
FIS for Functional Addressing
|
5.1
|
|
|
73
|
(MORANE) F 10 T6001
|
FFFS for Location Dependent Addressing
|
4
|
|
|
74
|
(MORANE) F 12 T6001
|
FIS for Location Dependent Addressing
|
3
|
|
|
75
|
(MORANE) F 10 T 6003
|
FFFS for Presentation of Functional Numbers to Called and Calling Parties
|
4
|
|
|
76
|
(MORANE) F 12 T 6003
|
FIS for Presentation of Functional Numbers to Called and Calling Parties
|
4
|
|
|
77
|
ERA/ERTMS/033281
|
Interfaces between CCS trackside and other subsystems
|
4.0
|
Note 7
|
|
78
|
Intentionally deleted
|
|
|
Note 6
|
|
79
|
SUBSET-114
|
KMC-ETCS Entity Off-line KM FIS
|
1.0.0
|
|
|
80
|
Intentionally deleted
|
|
|
Note 5
|
|
81
|
Reserved
|
Train Interface FFFIS
|
|
|
|
82
|
Reserved
|
FFFIS TI – Safety Analysis
|
|
|
Table A 2.3 - List of mandatory specifications
|
Index N
|
Set of specifications # 3
(ETCS Baseline 3 Release 2 and GSM-R Baseline 1)
|
|
|
Reference
|
Name of Specification
|
Version
|
Notes
|
|
1
|
Intentionally deleted
|
|
|
|
|
2
|
Intentionally deleted
|
|
|
|
|
3
|
SUBSET-023
|
Glossary of Terms and Abbreviations
|
3.3.0
|
|
|
4
|
SUBSET-026
|
System Requirements Specification
|
3.6.0
|
|
|
5
|
SUBSET-027
|
FIS Juridical Recording
|
3.3.0
|
|
|
6
|
ERA_ERTMS_015560
|
ETCS Driver Machine interface
|
3.6.0
|
|
|
7
|
SUBSET-034
|
Train Interface FIS
|
3.2.0
|
|
|
8
|
SUBSET-035
|
Specific Transmission Module FFFIS
|
3.2.0
|
|
|
9
|
SUBSET-036
|
FFFIS for Eurobalise
|
3.1.0
|
|
|
10
|
SUBSET-037
|
EuroRadio FIS
|
3.2.0
|
|
|
11
|
SUBSET-038
|
Offline key management FIS
|
3.1.0
|
|
|
12
|
SUBSET-039
|
FIS for the RBC/RBC handover
|
3.2.0
|
|
|
13
|
SUBSET-040
|
Dimensioning and Engineering rules
|
3.4.0
|
|
|
14
|
SUBSET-041
|
Performance Requirements for Interoperability
|
3.2.0
|
|
|
15
|
Intentionally deleted
|
|
|
|
|
16
|
SUBSET-044
|
FFFIS for Euroloop
|
2.4.0
|
|
|
17
|
Intentionally deleted
|
|
|
|
|
18
|
Intentionally deleted
|
|
|
|
|
19
|
SUBSET-047
|
Trackside-Trainborne FIS for Radio infill
|
3.0.0
|
|
|
20
|
SUBSET-048
|
Trainborne FFFIS for Radio infill
|
3.0.0
|
|
|
21
|
Intentionally deleted
|
|
|
|
|
22
|
Intentionally deleted
|
|
|
|
|
23
|
SUBSET-054
|
Responsibilities and rules for the assignment of values to ETCS variables
|
3.0.0
|
|
|
24
|
Intentionally deleted
|
|
|
|
|
25
|
SUBSET-056
|
STM FFFIS Safe time layer
|
3.0.0
|
|
|
26
|
SUBSET-057
|
STM FFFIS Safe link layer
|
3.1.0
|
|
|
27
|
SUBSET-091
|
Safety Requirements for the Technical Interoperability of ETCS in Levels 1 and 2
|
3.6.0
|
|
|
28
|
Intentionally deleted
|
|
|
|
|
29
|
SUBSET-102
|
Test specification for interface “K”
|
2.0.0
|
|
|
30
|
Intentionally deleted
|
|
|
|
|
31
|
SUBSET-094
|
Functional requirements for an on-board reference test facility
|
3.1.0
|
|
|
32
|
EIRENE FRS
|
GSM-R Functional requirements specification
|
8.0.0
|
Note 10
|
|
33
|
EIRENE SRS
|
GSM-R System requirements specification
|
16.0.0
|
Note 10
|
|
34
|
A11T6001
|
(MORANE) Radio Transmission FFFIS for EuroRadio
|
13.0.0
|
|
|
35
|
Intentionally deleted
|
|
|
|
|
36 a
|
Intentionally deleted
|
|
|
|
|
36 b
|
Intentionally deleted
|
|
|
|
|
36 c
|
SUBSET-074-2
|
FFFIS STM Test cases document
|
3.1.0
|
|
|
37 a
|
Intentionally deleted
|
|
|
|
|
37 b
|
SUBSET-076-5-2
|
Test cases related to features
|
3.3.0
|
|
|
37 c
|
SUBSET-076-6-3
|
Test sequences
|
3.2.0
|
|
|
37 d
|
SUBSET-076-7
|
Scope of the test specifications
|
3.3.0
|
|
|
37 e
|
Intentionally deleted
|
|
|
|
|
38
|
06E068
|
ETCS Marker-board definition
|
2.0
|
|
|
39
|
SUBSET-092-1
|
ERTMS EuroRadio Conformance Requirements
|
3.1.0
|
|
|
40
|
SUBSET-092-2
|
ERTMS EuroRadio test cases safety layer
|
3.1.0
|
|
|
41
|
Intentionally deleted
|
|
|
|
|
42
|
Intentionally deleted
|
|
|
|
|
43
|
SUBSET 085
|
Test specification for Eurobalise FFFIS
|
3.0.0
|
|
|
44
|
Intentionally deleted
|
|
|
|
|
45
|
SUBSET-101
|
Interface “K” Specification
|
2.0.0
|
|
|
46
|
SUBSET-100
|
Interface “G” Specification
|
2.0.0
|
|
|
47
|
Intentionally deleted
|
|
|
|
|
48
|
Reserved
|
Test specification for mobile equipment GSM-R
|
|
Note 4
|
|
49
|
SUBSET-059
|
Performance requirements for STM
|
3.1.0
|
|
|
50
|
SUBSET-103
|
Test specification for Euroloop
|
1.1.0
|
|
|
51
|
Intentionally deleted
|
|
|
|
|
52
|
SUBSET-058
|
FFFIS STM Application layer
|
3.2.0
|
|
|
53
|
Intentionally deleted
|
|
|
|
|
54
|
Intentionally deleted
|
|
|
|
|
55
|
Intentionally deleted
|
|
|
|
|
56
|
Intentionally deleted
|
|
|
|
|
57
|
Intentionally deleted
|
|
|
|
|
58
|
Intentionally deleted
|
|
|
|
|
59
|
Intentionally deleted
|
|
|
|
|
60
|
SUBSET-104
|
ETCS System Version Management
|
3.3.0
|
|
|
61
|
Intentionally deleted
|
|
|
|
|
62
|
Intentionally deleted
|
|
|
|
|
63
|
SUBSET-098
|
RBC-RBC Safe Communication Interface
|
3.0.0
|
|
|
64
|
EN 301 515
|
Global System for Mobile Communication (GSM); Requirements for GSM operation on railways
|
2.3.0
|
Note 2
|
|
65
|
TS 102 281
|
Detailed requirements for GSM operation on railways
|
3.0.0
|
Note 3
|
|
66
|
TS 103 169
|
ASCI Options for Interoperability
|
1.1.1
|
|
|
67
|
(MORANE) P 38 T 9001
|
FFFIS for GSM-R SIM Cards
|
5.0
|
Note 10
|
|
68
|
ETSI TS 102 610
|
Railway Telecommunication; GSM; Usage of the UUIE for GSM operation on railways
|
1.3.0
|
|
|
69
|
(MORANE) F 10 T 6002
|
FFFS for Confirmation of High Priority Calls
|
5.0
|
|
|
70
|
(MORANE) F 12 T 6002
|
FIS for Confirmation of High Priority Calls
|
5.0
|
|
|
71
|
(MORANE) E 10 T 6001
|
FFFS for Functional Addressing
|
4.1
|
|
|
72
|
(MORANE) E 12 T 6001
|
FIS for Functional Addressing
|
5.1
|
|
|
73
|
(MORANE) F 10 T6001
|
FFFS for Location Dependent Addressing
|
4
|
|
|
74
|
(MORANE) F 12 T6001
|
FIS for Location Dependent Addressing
|
3
|
|
|
75
|
(MORANE) F 10 T 6003
|
FFFS for Presentation of Functional Numbers to Called and Calling Parties
|
4
|
|
|
76
|
(MORANE) F 12 T 6003
|
FIS for Presentation of Functional Numbers to Called and Calling Parties
|
4
|
|
|
77
|
ERA/ERTMS/033281
|
Interfaces between CCS trackside and other subsystems
|
4.0
|
Note 7
|
|
78
|
Intentionally deleted
|
|
|
Note 6
|
|
79
|
SUBSET-114
|
KMC-ETCS Entity Off-line KM FIS
|
1.1.0
|
|
|
80
|
Intentionally deleted
|
|
|
Note 5
|
|
81
|
Reserved
|
Train Interface FFFIS
|
|
|
|
82
|
Reserved
|
FFFIS TI – Safety Analysis
|
|
|
|
83
|
SUBSET-137
|
On-line Key Management FFFIS
|
1.0.0
|
|
Note 1: only the functional description of information to be recorded is mandatory, not the technical characteristics of the interface
Note 2: the points of the specifications listed in point 2.1 of EN 301 515 which are referenced in Index 32 and Index 33 as “MI” are mandatory.
Note 3: the change requests (CRs) listed in table 1 and 2 of TS 102 281 which affect points referenced in Index 32 and Index 33 as “MI” are mandatory.
Note 4: Index 48 refers only to test cases for GSM-R mobile equipment. It is kept "reserved" for the time being. When agreed in a future revision of the TSI, the catalogue of available harmonised test cases for the assessment of mobile equipment and networks, according to the steps indicated in point 6.1.2 of this TSI, will be introduced in these tables.
Note 5: the products which are on the market are already tailored to the needs of the RU related to GSM-R Driver Machine Interface and fully interoperable so there is no need for a standard in the TSI CCS.
Note 6: information that was intended for index 78 is now incorporated in Index 27 (SUBSET-091).
Note 7: this document is ETCS and GSM-R baseline independent.
Note 8: Intentionally deleted.
Note 9: Intentionally deleted.
Note 10: Only the (MI) requirements are mandated by TSI CCS.
Note 11: Intentionally deleted.
Note 12: Intentionally deleted.
Note 13: Intentionally deleted.
Note 14: Intentionally deleted.
Table A 3 - List of mandatory standards
The application of the version of the standards listed in the table below, and their subsequent amendments when published as harmonised standard in the certification process is an appropriate means to fully comply to the risk management as set out in Annex I of the Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) No 402/2013, without prejudice for the provisions of chapter 4 and chapter 6 of this TSI.
|
No
|
Reference
|
Document name and comments
|
Version
|
Note
|
|
A1
|
EN 50126-1
|
Railway applications —The specification and demonstration of reliability, availability, maintainability and safety (RAMS) – Part 1: Generic RAMS Process
|
2017
(19991,2)
|
|
|
A2
|
EN 50128
|
Railway applications — Communication, signalling and processing systems — Software for railway control and protection systems
|
2011
|
|
|
A3
|
EN 50129
|
Railway applications — Communication, signalling and processing systems — Safety related electronic systems for signalling
|
2003
|
1
|
|
A4
|
EN 50159
|
Railway applications - Communication, signalling and processing systems
|
2010
|
1
|
|
A5
|
EN 50126-2
|
Railway Applications - The specification and demonstration of reliability, availability, maintainability and safety (RAMS) – Part 2: Systems Approach to Safety
|
2017
|
3
|
Note 1: this standard is harmonised, see “Commission Communication in the framework of the implementation of the Directive 2008/57/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 17 June 2008 on the interoperability of the rail system within the Community (recast)” (OJ C 435, 15.12.2017), where also published editorial corrigenda are indicated.
Note 2: this version of the standard may be used during the transitional period defined in the updated version of the standard.
Note 3: To be used in combination with EN 50126-1 (2017)’;
(59)the Annex G is replaced by the following:
(60)Open Points
|
Open Point
|
Notes
|
|
Braking aspects
|
It only applies to ETCS Baseline 2 (see Annex A, Table A 2, Index 15).
Resolved for ETCS Baseline 3 (see Annex A, Table A 2, Indexes 4 and 13).
|
|
Reliability/ availability requirements
|
Frequent occurrences of degraded situations caused by failures of control-command and signalling equipment will decrease the system safety.
|
|
Characteristics of sand applied to tracks
|
See Annex A, Table A 2, Index 77
This is not an open point for 1520 mm.
|
|
Characteristics of flange lubricators
|
See Annex A, Table A 2, Index 77
|
|
Combination of rolling stock characteristics influencing shunting impedance
|
See Annex A, Table A 2, Index 77
|
|
Conducted interference:
· Vehicle impedance
· Substation impedance (for DC networks only)
· Out-band limits
· Interference current limits attributed to the substations and attributed to the rolling stock
· Measurement, test and evaluation specification
|
See Annex A, Table A 2, Index 77
|
’;